RAN Network Optimization Parameter Reference RAN10!0!01

RAN
10.0
Network Optimization Parameter Reference
Issue
Draft
Date
2008-03-20
Part Number
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any
assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address:
Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
support@huawei.com
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2008. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

RAN
Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................1
1 Power Control Parameters........................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Uplink Power Control Parameters...................................................................................................................1-2
1.1.1 Power Offset Between Access Preamble and Message Control Part.....................................................1-4
1.1.2 Constant for Calculating the PRACH Initial Transmit Power...............................................................1-5
1.1.3 PRACH Power Ramp Step.....................................................................................................................1-6
1.1.4 Maximum Number of Preamble Retransmission Attempts...................................................................1-7
1.1.5 Maximum Preamble Loop......................................................................................................................1-7
1.1.6 Default Constant of DPCCH Transmit Power.......................................................................................1-8
1.1.7 Maximum Allowed Uplink Transmit Power..........................................................................................1-9
1.2 Downlink Power Control Parameters............................................................................................................1-10
1.2.1 Maximum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio Link....................................................................1-12
1.2.2 Minimum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio Link.....................................................................1-13
1.2.3 PCPICH Transmit Power.....................................................................................................................1-14
1.2.4 Maximum PCPICH Transmit Power....................................................................................................1-15
1.2.5 Minimum PCPICH Transmit Power....................................................................................................1-16
2 Handover Parameters................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Intra-Frequency Handover Parameters............................................................................................................2-2
2.1.1 Switch of Softer Handover Combination Indication..............................................................................2-4
2.1.2 Soft Handover Relative Thresholds.......................................................................................................2-5
2.1.3 Soft Handover Absolute Thresholds......................................................................................................2-7
2.1.4 1F Event Blind Handover Trigger Condition.........................................................................................2-8
2.1.5 Hysteresis Related to Soft Handover.....................................................................................................2-9
2.1.6 Time to Trigger Related to Soft Handover...........................................................................................2-12
2.1.7 Minimum Quality Threshold of Soft Handover...................................................................................2-14
2.1.8 Parameters Related to Soft Handover Failure......................................................................................2-15
2.1.9 Affect 1A and 1B Event Threshold Flag..............................................................................................2-16
2.1.10 Neighboring Cell Individual Offset....................................................................................................2-17
2.1.11 Cell Individual Offset.........................................................................................................................2-18
2.2 Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency Handover Parameters..............................................................................2-18
2.2.1 Inter-Frequency Measurement Report Mode.......................................................................................2-23
2.2.2 Inter-Frequency Measurement Periodic Report Interval......................................................................2-25
Issue Draft (2008-03-20)

Contents
RAN
2.2.3 Hysteresis Related to Inter-Frequency Handover................................................................................2-25
2.2.4 Time to Trigger Related to Inter-Frequency Hard Handover...............................................................2-27
2.2.5 Start or Stop Thresholds for the RSCP-Based Inter-Frequency Measurement....................................2-29
2.2.6 EC/No-based Inter-Frequency Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds...................................................2-31
2.2.7 Target Frequency Trigger Threshold of Inter-Frequency Coverage....................................................2-32
2.2.8 Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of Inter-Frequency Handover.........................................2-34
2.2.9 Retry Period of 2B Event.....................................................................................................................2-35
2.2.10 Maximum Retry Times of 2B Event..................................................................................................2-35
2.2.13 Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist Switch................................................................................2-38
2.2.14 Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist Measurement Threshold Choice........................................2-38
2.2.15 Inter-Frequency Measurement Timer Length....................................................................................2-39
2.2.16 Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency Handover Priority.........................................................................2-40
2.3 Non Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency Handover Management Parameters................................................2-41

2.3.1 Hysteresis of Event 2C.........................................................................................................................2-42
2.3.2 Time to Trigger for Event 2C...............................................................................................................2-43
2.3.3 Inter-Frequency Measure Target Frequency Trigger Ec/No Threshold...............................................2-44
2.3.4 Retry Period of 2C Event.....................................................................................................................2-44
2.3.5 Maximum Retry Times of 2C Event....................................................................................................2-45
2.3.6 Inter-Frequency Measurement Timer Length......................................................................................2-45
2.3.7 Hysteresis of Downlink RSCP QoS Frequency...................................................................................2-46
2.3.8 DownLink Qos Measurement Timer Length.......................................................................................2-47
2.3.9 UpLink Qos Measurement Timer Length............................................................................................2-48
2.4 Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management Parameters.................................................................2-49
2.4.1 Inter-RAT Measurement Report Mode................................................................................................2-54
2.4.2 Inter-RAT Periodical Report Interval...................................................................................................2-55
2.4.3 BSIC Verify Selection Switch..............................................................................................................2-56
2.4.4 Event 3A Measurement Quantity.........................................................................................................2-57
2.4.5 RSCP-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds.............................................................2-58
2.4.6 Ec/No-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds............................................................2-59
2.4.7 Inter-RAT Handover Judging Thresholds............................................................................................2-60
2.4.8 Time to Trigger Related to Inter-RAT Handover................................................................................2-61
2.4.9 Hysteresis Related to the Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover........................................................2-62
2.4.10 Time to Trigger for Verified GSM Cells...........................................................................................2-63
2.4.11 Time to Trigger for Non-Verified GSM Cells...................................................................................2-64
2.4.12 Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of Inter-RAT Handover...............................................2-65
2.4.13 Inter-RAT Measurement Timer Length.............................................................................................2-67
2.4.14 Retry Period of 3A Event...................................................................................................................2-68
2.4.15 Maximum Retry Times of 3A Event..................................................................................................2-68
ii

RAN
Contents
2.5 Non Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management Parameters.........................................................2-70

2.5.1 Inter-RAT Service Handover Switch...................................................................................................2-73
2.5.2 Hysteresis of Event 3C.........................................................................................................................2-74
2.5.3 Time to Trigger for Event 3C...............................................................................................................2-75
2.5.4 BSIC Verify Selection Switch..............................................................................................................2-76
2.5.5 Non-Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Decision Thresholds.......................................................2-77
2.5.6 Maximum Number of Inter-RAT Handover Attempts........................................................................2-78
2.5.7 Inter-RAT Measurement Timer Length...............................................................................................2-79
2.5.8 Switch used to Send Load Information to 2G......................................................................................2-80
2.5.9 Switch for Non-Coverage Based Handover according to 2G Load Information.................................2-81
2.5.10 2G Load Threshold by Inter-Rat Handover in CS-Domain...............................................................2-81
2.5.11 2G Load Threshold by Inter-RAT Handover in PS-domain..............................................................2-82
2.5.12 Retry Period of 3C Event...................................................................................................................2-83
2.5.13 Maximum Retry Times of 3C Event..................................................................................................2-84
2.5.14 Measurement Quantity of 3A Frequency in QoS Handover..............................................................2-84
2.5.15 Hysteresis of Downlink RSCP QoS Frequency.................................................................................2-85
2.5.16 DownLink Qos Measurement Timer Length.....................................................................................2-86
2.5.17 UpLink Qos Measurement Timer Length..........................................................................................2-86
2.6 Blind Handover Management Parameters.....................................................................................................2-87
2.6.1 Blind Handover Flag............................................................................................................................2-88
2.6.2 Blind Handover Priority.......................................................................................................................2-89
2.6.3 Ec/N0 Threshold for Direct Retry........................................................................................................2-90
2.7 Cell Selection and Reselection Parameters...................................................................................................2-91
2.7.1 Measurement Hysteresis Parameters....................................................................................................2-93
2.7.2 Cell Reselection Offset.........................................................................................................................2-95
2.7.3 Minimum Quality Criterion.................................................................................................................2-96
2.7.4 Minimum Access Level.......................................................................................................................2-97
2.7.5 Cell Reselection Start Thresholds........................................................................................................2-97
2.7.6 Reselection Hysteresis Time................................................................................................................2-99
2.7.7 Minimum Access Level of Inter-RAT Cells......................................................................................2-100
2.7.8 Signal Level Threshold for MS in 2G Idle Mode to Search for 3G Cells..........................................2-101
2.7.9 Signal Level Offset for 3G Cell Reselection......................................................................................2-102
2.7.10 Signal Level Threshold for 3G Cell Reselection.............................................................................2-102
2.8 Neighboring Cell Management Parameters................................................................................................2-103
2.8.1 Neighboring Cell Priority Flag...........................................................................................................2-103
2.8.2 Neighboring Cell Priority...................................................................................................................2-104
3 Admission Control Parameters................................................................................................3-1

3.1 Uplink and Downlink Initial Access Rates of BE Services............................................................................3-6
3.2 Intelligent Admission Algorithm Switch........................................................................................................3-7
3.3 Uplink Total Equivalent User Number...........................................................................................................3-8
3.4 Downlink Total Equivalent User Number......................................................................................................3-9
3.5 AMR Voice Uplink Threshold for Conversation Service.............................................................................3-10

iii
Contents
RAN
3.6 Non AMR Voice Uplink Threshold of Conversation Service......................................................................3-11

3.7 AMR-Voice Downlink Threshold of Conversational Services.....................................................................3-12
3.8 Non-AMR-Voice Downlink Threshold of Conversational Services............................................................3-13
3.9 Uplink Threshold for Other Services............................................................................................................3-14
3.10 Downlink Admission Threshold of Other Services....................................................................................3-15
3.11 Uplink Handover Admission Threshold.....................................................................................................3-15
3.12 Downlink Handover Admission Threshold.................................................................................................3-17
3.13 Uplink Total Power Threshold....................................................................................................................3-18
3.14 Downlink Total Power Threshold...............................................................................................................3-18
3.15 Reserved SF of the Uplink Credit Resource for Handovers.......................................................................3-19
3.16 Reserved SF of the Downlink Credit Resource and Channel Code Resource for Handovers....................3-20
3.17 Resources Reserved for Common Channel Load.......................................................................................3-21
4 Load Control Parameters..........................................................................................................4-1

4.1 Cell Load Reshuffling Algorithm Parameters.................................................................................................4-2
4.1.1 LDR Period Timer Length..................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.1.2 Uplink or Downlink LDR Trigger Threshold and Release Threshold...................................................4-7
4.1.3 Uplink or Downlink LDR Actions.........................................................................................................4-8
4.1.4 Number of Subscribers for Uplink or Downlink LDR Actions...........................................................4-10
4.1.5 Cell Load Space Threshold for Uplink or Downlink Inter-Frequency Handover................................4-13
4.1.6 Upper Threshold of Bandwidth for Uplink or Downlink Inter-frequency Cell Load Handover.........4-13
4.1.7 Cell SF Reserved Threshold.................................................................................................................4-14
4.1.8 Uplink or Downlink Credit SF Reserved Threshold............................................................................4-15
4.1.9 LDR Code Priority Indicator................................................................................................................4-16
4.1.10 Code Congestion Select Inter-Frequency Indication..........................................................................4-17
4.1.11 Inter-Frequency Handover Code used Ratio Space Threshold..........................................................4-17
4.1.12 Gold User Load Control Switch.........................................................................................................4-18
4.1.13 MBMS Power Control Service Priority Threshold............................................................................4-19
4.2 Cell Overload Congestion Control Parameters.............................................................................................4-19
4.2.1 OLC Period Timer Length...................................................................................................................4-22
4.2.2 Uplink or Downlink OLC Trigger Threshold and Release Threshold.................................................4-23
4.2.3 Uplink or Downlink OLC Fast TF Restriction Times..........................................................................4-24
4.2.4 Number of RABs Selected for the Uplink or Downlink OLC Fast TF Restriction.............................4-25
4.2.5 OLC Fast TF Data Rate Restriction Timer Length and Recover Timer Length..................................4-26
4.2.6 OLC Fast TF Data Rate Restriction Coefficient..................................................................................4-27
4.2.7 Number of RABs Released by the Uplink or Downlink Traffic Release............................................4-28
5 PS Service Rate Control Parameters.......................................................................................5-1

5.1 BE Service Related Threshold Parameters......................................................................................................5-2
5.1.1 BE Service Handover Rate Threshold................................................................................................... 5-4
5.1.2 Uplink/Downlink BE Service Insured Rate...........................................................................................5-5
5.1.3 Streaming Service HSUPA Transmission Mode................................................................................... 5-6
5.2 Dynamic Channel Configuration Parameters Based on Traffic......................................................................5-7
5.2.1 Traffic Upper Threshold.........................................................................................................................5-9
iv

RAN
Contents
5.2.2 Traffic Lower Threshold........................................................................................................................5-9

5.2.3 Time to Trigger Event 4A ...................................................................................................................5-10
5.2.4 Time to Trigger Event 4B ...................................................................................................................5-11
5.2.5 Uplink and Downlink Rate Adjust Levels...........................................................................................5-12
5.2.6 Uplink or Downlink DCCC Rate Threshold........................................................................................5-13
5.2.7 Uplink or Downlink Middle Rate Calculate Method...........................................................................5-13
5.2.8 Uplink or Downlink DCCC Middle Rate.............................................................................................5-14
5.2.9 Low Activity Rate Threshold...............................................................................................................5-15
5.3 Dynamic Channel Configuration Parameters Based on Throughput............................................................5-15
5.3.1 HSUPA DCCC Strategy.......................................................................................................................5-16
5.3.2 HSUPA UpLink Rate Adjust Set.........................................................................................................5-17
5.3.3 Initial Rate of HSUPA BE Rraffic.......................................................................................................5-18
5.4 Dynamic Channel Configuration Parameters Based on Link Quality..........................................................5-19
5.4.1 Uplink Quality Measurement Switches................................................................................................5-21
5.4.2 Uplink Quality Transmit Power Measurement Threshold...................................................................5-22
5.4.3 Uplink Quality Block Error Rate Measurement Threshold..................................................................5-22
5.4.4 Downlink Quality Measurement Swithes............................................................................................5-23
5.4.5 Downlink Quality Code Transmit Power Measurement Threshold.....................................................5-24
5.4.6 Downlink Quality Downlink RLC Measurement Threshold...............................................................5-25
5.4.7 Uplink Full Coverage Rate...................................................................................................................5-25
5.4.8 Downlink Full Coverage Rate..............................................................................................................5-26
5.5 State Transition Parameters...........................................................................................................................5-27
5.5.1 FACH to DCH Traffic Report Threshold............................................................................................5-30
5.5.2 FACH to DCH Traffic Time to trigger................................................................................................5-31
5.5.3 DCH to FACH State Transition Timer................................................................................................5-32
5.5.4 DCH to FACH Traffic Report Threshold............................................................................................5-32
5.5.5 DCH to FACH Traffic Time to trigger................................................................................................5-33
5.5.6 FACH to PCH State Transition Timer.................................................................................................5-34
5.5.7 Cell Reselection Timer.........................................................................................................................5-34
5.6 PS Inactive.....................................................................................................................................................5-35
5.6.1 PS Inactive Timer.................................................................................................................................5-36
6 Miscellaneous Topic Parameters.............................................................................................6-1

6.1 Cell Channel Power Distribution Parameters..................................................................................................6-2
6.1.1 Maximum Cell Transmit Power.............................................................................................................6-3
6.1.2 PCPICH Transmit Power.......................................................................................................................6-4
6.1.3 PSCH and SSCH Transmit Power.........................................................................................................6-5
6.1.4 BCH Transmit Power.............................................................................................................................6-6
6.1.5 Maximum FACH Transmit Power.........................................................................................................6-6
6.1.6 PCH Transmit Power.............................................................................................................................6-7
6.1.7 PICH Transmit Power............................................................................................................................6-8
6.1.8 AICH Transmit Power...........................................................................................................................6-9
6.2 Paging Parameters...........................................................................................................................................6-9

Contents
RAN
6.2.1 Paging Cycle Coefficient.....................................................................................................................6-10
6.2.2 Number of RNC Paging Repetitions....................................................................................................6-11
6.3 RRC Connection Setup Parameters...............................................................................................................6-12

6.3.1 T300 and N300.....................................................................................................................................6-13
6.4 Synchronization Parameters..........................................................................................................................6-13
6.4.1 Number of Successive In-Sync Indications.........................................................................................6-15
6.4.2 Number of Successive Out-of-Sync Indications..................................................................................6-16
6.4.3 Radio Link Failure Timer Duration.....................................................................................................6-16
6.4.4 T312 and N312.....................................................................................................................................6-17
6.4.5 N313, N315, and T313.........................................................................................................................6-18
6.5 Location Update Parameters.........................................................................................................................6-19
6.5.1 Periodical Location Update Timer.......................................................................................................6-19
6.6 User Priority Parameters...............................................................................................................................6-20
6.6.1 User Priorities Corresponding to Allocation or Retention Priority 1 to 14..........................................6-22
6.6.2 Intergated Priority Configuration Reference .......................................................................................6-23
6.6.3 Indication of Carrier Type Priority.......................................................................................................6-23
6.7 Bearer Channel Type Parameters..................................................................................................................6-24
6.7.1 Priority Type of the Bearer Channel for the VoIP...............................................................................6-26
6.7.2 Priority Type of the Bearer Channel for the IMS Signaling................................................................6-27
6.7.3 Priority Type of the Bearer Channel for the SRB................................................................................6-27
6.7.4 Flag of Effecting SrbChlType at the RRC Stage.................................................................................6-28
6.7.5 Downlink Streaming Traffic Threshold on HSDPA............................................................................6-28
6.7.6 Downlink BE Traffic Threshold on HSDPA.......................................................................................6-29
6.7.7 Uplink Streaming Traffic Threshold on HSUPA.................................................................................6-30
6.7.8 Uplink BE Traffic Threshold on HSUPA............................................................................................6-30
6.7.9 Uplink and Downlink BE Traffic Decision Threshold on DCH..........................................................6-31
6.7.10 Enhanced Switch of the IMS Signaling Bearer..................................................................................6-32
6.7.11 Initial Access Rate of the IMS Signalling..........................................................................................6-32
7 HSDPA Parameters....................................................................................................................7-1
7.1 HSDPA Power Resource Management Parameters........................................................................................7-2
7.1.1 HSPA Total Power and Measurement Power Offset Constant..............................................................7-2
7.1.2 F-DPCH Power Control Parameter........................................................................................................7-4
7.2 HSDPA Code Resource Management Parameters..........................................................................................7-6
7.2.1 HSDPA Code Resource Allocation Mode.............................................................................................7-8
7.2.2 Number of HS-PDSCH Codes...............................................................................................................7-8
7.2.3 Maximum Number of HS-PDSCH Codes............................................................................................. 7-9
7.2.4 Minimum Number of HS-PDSCH Codes..............................................................................................7-9
7.2.5 Number of HS-SCCH Codes................................................................................................................7-10
7.3 HSDPA Mobility Management Parameters..................................................................................................7-11
7.3.1 HSPA Handover Protection Length.....................................................................................................7-11
7.4 HSDPA Direct Retry and Channel Type Switch Parameters........................................................................7-13
7.4.1 D2H Retry Timer Length.....................................................................................................................7-14
vi

RAN
Contents
7.4.2 Intra-Frequency Handover D2H Timer Length....................................................................................7-15

7.4.3 Inter-Frequency Handover D2H Timer Length....................................................................................7-15
7.4.4 Multi-Carrier Handover Timer Length.................................................................................................7-16
7.4.5 Compress Mode Permission Indication on HSDPA............................................................................7-17
7.5 HSDPA Admission Control Parameters.......................................................................................................7-17
7.5.1 Maximum HSDPA Users Per NodeB..................................................................................................7-19
7.5.2 Uplink HS-DPCCH Reserve Factor.....................................................................................................7-19
7.5.3 HSDPA Streaming PBR Threshold......................................................................................................7-20
7.5.4 HSDPA BE Service PBR Threshold....................................................................................................7-21
7.5.5 Maximum HSDPA User Number........................................................................................................7-21
8 HSUPA Parameters....................................................................................................................8-1
8.1 HSUPA MAC-e Scheduling Algorithm Parameters.......................................................................................8-2
8.1.1 Maximum Target Uplink Load Factor...................................................................................................8-2
8.1.2 Rate Threshold for HSUPA 2 ms TTI ...................................................................................................8-3
8.1.3 Threshold of Non-Serving E-DCH to Total E-DCH Power Ratio.........................................................8-4
8.2 HSUPA Admission Control Parameters.........................................................................................................8-4
8.2.1 Maximum HSUPA User Number..........................................................................................................8-6
8.2.2 HSUPA Non-Serveice Cell Interfere Factor..........................................................................................8-6
8.2.3 PBR satisfaction for HSUPA different priority users............................................................................8-7
8.2.4 Downlink HSUPA Reserved Factor.......................................................................................................8-8
8.2.5 Maximum HSUPA User Number Per NodeB........................................................................................8-8
8.3 HSUPA Outer Loop Power Control Parameters.............................................................................................8-9
8.3.1 HSUPA Outer Loop Power Control Switch.........................................................................................8-10
8.3.2 Target Number of E-DCH PDU Retransmission.................................................................................8-11
8.3.3 Target Value of E-DCH Residual BLER.............................................................................................8-11
9 MBMS Parameters.....................................................................................................................9-1
9.1 MBMS Admission and Preemption Algorithm Parameters............................................................................9-2
9.1.1 Maximum FACH Transmit Power.........................................................................................................9-4
9.1.2 Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with the Highest Priority................................9-5
9.1.3 Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with the Lowest Priority.................................9-6
9.1.4 MTCH Budget Power Resources...........................................................................................................9-6
9.1.5 MTCH Budget Code Resource..............................................................................................................9-7
9.1.6 MTCH Maximum Power.......................................................................................................................9-8
9.1.7 MTCH Maximum Code Resource.........................................................................................................9-9
9.1.8 Service Priority Threshold for Decreasing Power..................................................................................9-9
9.1.9 MBMS Service Preemption Algorithm Switch....................................................................................9-10
9.1.10 MBMS PTM Preempt Switch............................................................................................................9-11
9.1.11 MBMS Streaming PTM Preempt Switch...........................................................................................9-11
9.1.12 MBMS Non-Streaming PTM Preempt Switch...................................................................................9-12
9.2 FLC/FLD Algorithm Parameters..................................................................................................................9-13
9.2.1 FLC Algorithm Switch.........................................................................................................................9-14
9.2.2 MBMS Transmission Mode.................................................................................................................9-15

vii
Contents
RAN
9.2.3 Counting Threshold..............................................................................................................................9-16
9.2.4 PTP To PTM Offset.............................................................................................................................9-16
9.2.5 MBMS PTP RB Uplink Rate...............................................................................................................9-17
9.2.6 MBMS Neighboring Cell Indicator......................................................................................................9-18
10 Algorithm Switches...............................................................................................................10-1
10.1 Connection-Oriented Algorithm Switches in the RNC...............................................................................10-2
10.1.1 Channel Class Algorithm Switches....................................................................................................10-2
10.1.2 Handover Algorithm Switch..............................................................................................................10-9
10.1.3 Power Control Algorithm Switches.................................................................................................10-15
10.1.4 HSPA Algorithm Switch..................................................................................................................10-17
10.1.5 DRD Algorithm Switches................................................................................................................10-18
10.1.6 SRNS Relocation Algorithm Switch................................................................................................10-19
10.1.7 Compressed Mode Algorithm Switch..............................................................................................10-21
10.2 Cell Algorithm Switches...........................................................................................................................10-22
10.2.1 Cell Class Algorithm Switches........................................................................................................10-23
10.2.2 Uplink Admission Control Algorithm Switch.................................................................................10-25
10.2.3 Downlink Admission Control Algorithm Switch.............................................................................10-26
10.3 Other Algorithm Switches.........................................................................................................................10-27
10.3.1 NodeB credit admission Algorithm Switch.....................................................................................10-27
10.3.2 Iub Bandwidth Congestion Control Algorithm Switch....................................................................10-28
10.3.3 Intra-Frequency Measurement Control Information Indication.......................................................10-28
10.3.4 Inter-Frequency or Inter-RAT Measurement Indication..................................................................10-29
10.3.5 FACH Measurement Indication.......................................................................................................10-30
11 Parameters Configured on NodeB LMT............................................................................11-1

11.1 HSDPA Flow Control Parameters...............................................................................................................11-2
11.1.1 HSDPA Flow Control Switch............................................................................................................11-2
11.1.2 Frame Discard Rate Threshold on Iub Interface................................................................................11-3
11.1.3 Time Delay Threshold on Iub Interface.............................................................................................11-4
11.2 HSDPA MAC-hs Scheduling Algorithm Parameters.................................................................................11-5
11.2.1 Scheduling Method............................................................................................................................11-7
11.2.2 Resource Allocation Method..............................................................................................................11-8
11.2.3 HS-SCCH Power Control Method.....................................................................................................11-9
11.2.4 HS-SCCH Fixed Power or Initial Transmit Power............................................................................11-9
11.2.5 Resource Limiting Switch................................................................................................................11-10
11.2.6 HSDPA Dynamic Code Allocation Switch......................................................................................11-11
11.2.7 Maximum Transmit Power of per HSDPA user..............................................................................11-11
11.2.8 Resource limiting for different GBR................................................................................................11-12
11.3 HSDPA Based on SPI Algorithm Parameters...........................................................................................11-13
11.3.1 SPI Initial Value...............................................................................................................................11-14
11.3.2 SPI End Value..................................................................................................................................11-15
11.3.3 Weight of SPI...................................................................................................................................11-15
11.3.4 EPF Schedule Algorithm Switch......................................................................................................11-17
viii

RAN
Contents
11.3.5 Flow Control Algorithm Switch.......................................................................................................11-17

11.3.6 CQI Adjust Algorithm Switch..........................................................................................................11-18
11.3.7 Residual BLER Target Value...........................................................................................................11-18
11.3.8 Maximum Number of Retransmission Attempts.............................................................................11-19
11.4 HSUPA MAC-e Scheduling Algorithm Parameters.................................................................................11-20
11.4.1 MAC-e Schedule Parameters Switch...............................................................................................11-20
11.4.2 GBR Scheduling Switch...................................................................................................................11-21
11.5 HSUPA Power Control Parameters...........................................................................................................11-21
11.5.1 Power Control Algorithm Switches for the Downlink Control Channel.........................................11-22
11.5.2 Fixed Power Control Mode Algorithm Parameters..........................................................................11-26
11.6 Local Cell Management Parameters..........................................................................................................11-31
11.6.1 Cell Radius.......................................................................................................................................11-31
11.6.2 Cell Handover Radius......................................................................................................................11-32

ix
RAN
Figures
Figures
Figure 7-1 Impact from over long HSPA protection length...............................................................................7-12

xi
RAN
Tables
Tables
Table 1-1 List of uplink power control parameters..............................................................................................1-2
Table 1-2 List of downlink power control parameters.......................................................................................1-11
Table 1-3 List of the maximum and minimum downlink transmit powers........................................................1-12
Table 2-1 List of intra-frequency handover parameters.......................................................................................2-2
Table 2-2 Typical values of HystFor1A.............................................................................................................2-11
Table 2-3 Typical values of the hysteresis for the 1B event...............................................................................2-11
Table 2-4 Typical values of the hysteresis for the 1C event...............................................................................2-11
Table 2-5 Typical values of TrigTime1B and TrigTime1F................................................................................2-13
Table 2-6 List of coverage-based inter-frequency handover parameters...........................................................2-18
Table 2-7 Typical values of hystereses related to inter-frequency handovers....................................................2-26
Table 2-8 Typical values of time-to-trigger parameters related to inter-frequency handovers..........................2-28
Table 2-9 Thresholds (RSCP) for starting inter-frequency measurement for UEs moving in different speeds
.............................................................................................................................................................................2-30
Table 2-10 Thresholds (EcIo) for starting inter-frequency measurement for UEs moving in different speeds
.............................................................................................................................................................................2-31
Table 2-11 List of non-coverage-based inter-Frequency handover management parameters............................2-41
Table 2-12 List of coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters............................................2-49
Table 2-13 List of time-to-trigger parameters related to inter-RAT hard handovers.........................................2-62
Table 2-14 List of non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters.....................................2-71
Table 2-15 List of blind handover management parameters..............................................................................2-87
Table 2-16 List of blind handover priority sets..................................................................................................2-89
Table 2-17 List of cell selection and reselection parameters..............................................................................2-91
Table 2-18 List of neighboring cell management parameters..........................................................................2-103
Table 3-1 List of admission control parameters...................................................................................................3-1
Table 4-1 List of cell load reshuffling (LDR) algorithm parameters...................................................................4-2
Table 4-2 List of overload congestion control parameters.................................................................................4-20
Table 5-1 List of BE service related threshold parameters...................................................................................5-2
Table 5-2 List of dynamic channel configuration parameters..............................................................................5-7
Table 5-3 List of DCCC parameters...................................................................................................................5-16
Table 5-4 List of DCCC parameters...................................................................................................................5-19
Table 5-5 List of state transition parameters......................................................................................................5-27
Table 5-6 List of PS inactive parameters............................................................................................................5-35
Table 6-1 List of cell channel power distribution parameters..............................................................................6-2
Table 6-2 List of paging parameters...................................................................................................................6-10

xiii
Tables
RAN
Table 6-3 List of RRC connection setup parameters..........................................................................................6-12
Table 6-4 List of synchronization parameters....................................................................................................6-14
Table 6-5 List of location update parameters.....................................................................................................6-19
Table 6-6 List of user priority parameters..........................................................................................................6-21
Table 6-7 List of bearer channel type parameters.............................................................................................. 6-24
Table 7-1 HSPA total power and measurement power offset constant................................................................7-2
Table 7-2 List of F-DPCH parameters.................................................................................................................7-4
Table 7-3 List of HSDPA code resource management parameters......................................................................7-7
Table 7-4 List of HSDPA mobility management parameters.............................................................................7-11
Table 7-5 List of HSDPA direct retry and channel type switch parameters...................................................... 7-13
Table 7-6 List of admission control parameters.................................................................................................7-18
Table 8-1 List of HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters..................................................................8-2
Table 8-2 List of HSUPA admission control parameters.....................................................................................8-5
Table 8-3 List of HSUPA outer loop power control parameters..........................................................................8-9
Table 9-1 List of MBMS admission and preempt algorithm parameters ............................................................9-2
Table 9-2 List of FLC/FLD algorithm parameters.............................................................................................9-13
Table 10-1 List of channel algorithm switches.................................................................................................. 10-3
Table 10-2 List of handover algorithm switches................................................................................................10-9
Table 10-3 List of power control switches.......................................................................................................10-15
Table 10-4 List of HSPA algorithm switches...................................................................................................10-17
Table 10-5 DRD algorithm switches................................................................................................................10-18
Table 10-6 List of SRNS relocation algorithm switches..................................................................................10-20
Table 10-7 List of compressed mode algorithm switches................................................................................10-22
Table 10-8 List of cell algorithm switches.......................................................................................................10-23
Table 10-9 NodeB credit admission algorithm switch.....................................................................................10-27
Table 11-1 List of HSDPA flow control parameters..........................................................................................11-2
Table 11-2 List of HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters.............................................................11-5
Table 11-3 List of HSDPA SPI scheduling algorithm parameters...................................................................11-13
Table 11-4 List of HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters............................................................11-20
Table 11-5 List of power control algorithm switches for the downlink control channel.................................11-22
Table 11-6 List of fixed power control mode algorithm parameters................................................................11-27
Table 11-7 List of local cell management parameters......................................................................................11-31
xiv

RAN
About This Document
About This Document
Purpose
This document describes the configurable parameters in network optimization and offers the
meaning, value range, impact, and configuration command of each parameter.
NOTE
This guide offers not all but some of the network parameters.
Related Versions
The following table lists the versions of the product described in the document.
Product Name
Version
RNC
V200R010
NodeB
V200R010
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l
Network planners
Field engineers
System engineers
Update History
Refer to Changes in RAN Network Optimization Parameter Reference.
Organization
1 Power Control Parameters
This describes power control parameters. Power control parameters are categorized into uplink
power control parameters and downlink power control parameters.
2 Handover Parameters

RAN
About This Document
This describes handover parameters. Handover aims to ensure the communication continuity
and quality. Handovers in WCDMA system are of the following types: soft handover, softer
handover, intra-frequency hard handover, inter-frequency hard handover, inter-RAT hard
handover, and so on. Handover emerges as an important factor affecting network performance,
and handover optimization is also significant in the network optimization. Handover parameters
are classified according to handover classifications.
3 Admission Control Parameters
This describes the admission control parameters that can be modified by network planners.
4 Load Control Parameters
This describes the load control parameters that can be modified by network planners.
5 PS Service Rate Control Parameters
This describes the PS service rate control parameters: the service-related thresholds, DCCC
parameters, link stability parameters, state transfer parameters, PS active parameters, and so on.
6 Miscellaneous Topic Parameters
This describes the special topic parameters, including parameters for cell channel power
distribution, paging, RRC connection setup, synchronization, and location updating.
7 HSDPA Parameters
This describes HSDPA parameters as follows: HSDPA power resource management parameters,
HSDPA code resource management algorithm parameters, HSDPA mobility management
parameters, HSDPA direct retry and switch of channel types parameters, and HSDPA call
admission control algorithm parameters.
8 HSUPA Parameters
This describes the HSUPA parameters: HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters,
HSUPA power control parameters, and HSUPA admission control parameters.
9 MBMS Parameters
This describes MBMS parameters. MBMS parameters are MBMS admission parameters,
MBMS preemption parameters, and FLC/FLD algorithm parameters.
10 Algorithm Switches
This describes the RNC algorithm Switches. In the RNC, algorithm switches are categorized
into connection-oriented algorithm switches and cell-oriented algorithm switches.
11 Parameters Configured on NodeB LMT
This describes the parameters that can be configured on the NodeB LMT: the HSDPA flow
control parameters, HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters, HSUPA MAC-e
scheduling algorithm parameters, HSUPA power control parameters, and local cell management
parameters.
Conventions
1. Symbol Conventions
The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows
2

RAN
Symbol
About This Document
Description
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk that, if not avoided,

will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which, if
not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided,
could cause equipment damage, data loss, and performance
degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save your
time.
TIP
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement

important points of the main text.
NOTE
2. General Conventions
Convention
Description
Times New Roman
Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface
Names of files,directories,folders,and users are in boldface. For

example,log in as user root .
Italic
Book titles are in italics.
Courier New
Terminal display is in Courier New.
3. Command Conventions
Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic
Command arguments are in italic.
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional.
{x | y | ...}
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical

bars.One is selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and

separated by vertical bars.One or none is selected.
{ x | y | ... } *

bars.A minimum of one or a maximum of all can be selected.

RAN
About This Document
Convention
Description
[ x | y | ... ] *

bars.A minimum of zero or a maximum of all can be selected.
4. GUI Conventions
Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons,menus,parameters,tabs,window,and dialog titles are in

boldface. For example,click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs.

For example,choose File > Create > Folder .
5. Keyboard Operation
Convention
Description
Key
Press the key.For example,press Enter and press Tab.
Key1+Key2
Press the keys concurrently.For example,pressing Ctrl+Alt+A

means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key1,Key2
Press the keys in turn.For example,pressing Alt,A means the two

keys should be pressed in turn.
6. Mouse Operation
Action
Description
Click
Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the
pointer.
Double-click
Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly

without moving the pointer.
Drag
Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer
to a certain position.

RAN
Power Control Parameters
About This Chapter

This describes power control parameters. Power control parameters are categorized into uplink
power control parameters and downlink power control parameters.
1.1 Uplink Power Control Parameters
This describes the uplink power control parameters that can be modified by network planners.
1.2 Downlink Power Control Parameters
This describes the downlink power control parameters that can be modified by network planners.

1-1
RAN
1.1 Uplink Power Control Parameters

This describes the uplink power control parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Table 1-1 List of uplink power control parameters
1-2
S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configurat
ion
MML Command
Le
vel
PowerOffsetPp
m
The parameter is the

offset between the
power of the last
access preamble and
power of the
message control
part (the power of
the message control
part equals the
power of the access
preamble plus the
value of
PowerOffsetPpm)
Signaling:
3 dB;
services: 2
dB
Set: ADD PRACHTFC
Cel
l
ConstantValue
Constant value used

by a UE to calculate
the initial transmit
power of the
PRACH on the basis
of the open loop
power
20, namely
20 dB
PowerRampSte
p
Step of the power

increase for the
preamble when a
UE does not receive
the acquisition
indication (AI) from
the NodeB
2, namely 2
dB
Set: ADD
PRACHBASIC
To modify
ConstantValue, delete
the PRACH, and then
reconfigure the transport
format information set
(TFCS) of the PRACH.
PreambleRetra
nsMax
Maximum number
of attempts of
retransmitting the
preamble in a
preamble ramp
period

To modify
PowerOffsetPpm,
delete the PRACH, and
then reconfigure the
transport format
information set (TFCS)
of the PRACH.
Cel
l
RAN
S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configurat
ion
MML Command
Le
vel
Maximum number
of preamble loops
Set: ADD RACH
Cel
l
Mmax
Query: LST RACH

Modify: MOD RACH
DefaultConstan
tValue
Constant value used

to calculate the
initial TX power of
the uplink DPCCH
22, namely
-22 dB
Set or modify: SET FRC
MaxAllowedUl
TxPower
Maximum uplink
TX power of a UE
The default
value is 24,
namely 24
dBm.
Use ADD
CELLSELRESEL to
set, LST
CELLSELRESEL to
query, and MOD
CELLSELRESEL to
modify
MaxAllowedUlTxPower.
MaxUlTxPowe
rForConv
MaxUlTxPowe
rForStr
MaxUlTxPowe
rForInt
MaxUlTxPowe
rForBac
Query: LST FRC
RN
C
Cel
l
Use ADD CELLCAC

to set, use LST
CELLCAC to query,
and use MOD
CELLCAC to modify
MaxULTxPowerForConv,
MaxUlTxPowerForStr
, MaxULTxPowerForInt, and
MaxULTxPowerForBac.
1.1.1 Power Offset Between Access Preamble and Message Control Part
This describes the power offset (PowerOffsetPpm) between the last access preamble and the
message control part. The power of the message control part equals the power of the access
preamble plus the value of PowerOffsetPpm.
1.1.2 Constant for Calculating the PRACH Initial Transmit Power
This describes the constant value used by a UE to calculate the initial transmit power of the
PRACH on the basis of the open loop power.
1.1.3 PRACH Power Ramp Step

1-3
RAN
This describes the step of the power increase for the preamble when a UE does not receive the
Acquisition Indication (AI) from the NodeB.
1.1.4 Maximum Number of Preamble Retransmission Attempts
This describes the maximum number of attempts of retransmitting the preamble in a preamble
ramp period.
1.1.5 Maximum Preamble Loop
This describes the maximum number of random access preamble loops. When the UE has
transmitted the access preamble and the number of retransmission times has reached
PreambleRetransMax, it repeats the access attempt after the specified waiting time, if the UE
still has not received the capture indication. The maximum number of cycles cannot exceed
Mmax.
1.1.6 Default Constant of DPCCH Transmit Power
This describes the default constant value (DefaultConstantValue) that is used by a UE in the
open loop power control process to calculate the power offset of the DPCCH
(DPCCH_Power_offset) and accordingly calculate the initial transmit power of the uplink
DPCCH.
1.1.7 Maximum Allowed Uplink Transmit Power
This describes the maximum transmit power of the PRACH when a UE is trying to access a
designated cell. The parameter (MaxAllowedUlTxPower) equals
UE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH in the cell selection rule. In addition, there are another four
parameters indicating the maximum transmit power of UEs, and the four parameters are intended
for different QoS services.
1.1.1 Power Offset Between Access Preamble and Message Control

Part
This describes the power offset (PowerOffsetPpm) between the last access preamble and the
message control part. The power of the message control part equals the power of the access
preamble plus the value of PowerOffsetPpm.
ID
PowerOffsetPpm
Value Range
5 to 10
Physical Scope
5 dB to 10 dB, with the step of 1 dB
Setting
In signaling transmission mode, set PowerOffsetPpm to 3; in service transmission mode, set
PowerOffsetPpm to 2.
1-4

RAN
Impact on the Network Performance

l
If PowerOffsetPpm is excessively high, the signaling messages and service messages that
the RACH bears may not be normally received by the UTRAN, and the uplink coverage
may be affected.
If PowerOffsetPpm is excessively low, the uplink interference may increase, and the
uplink capacity may be affected.
Related Commands
Use ADD PRACHTFC to set PowerOffsetPpm. To modify PowerOffsetPpm, use RMV
PRACHTFC to delete the TFC of the PRACH, and then reconfigure the TFC of the PRACH.
Before using RMV PRACHTFC, use DEA PRACH to deactivate the PRACH and DEA
CELL to deactivate the cells.
1.1.2 Constant for Calculating the PRACH Initial Transmit Power

This describes the constant value used by a UE to calculate the initial transmit power of the
PRACH on the basis of the open loop power.
ID
ConstantValue
Value Range
35 to 10
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value of ConstantValue is 20, namely 20 dB.
The constant value is used by a UE in the random access process to calculate the initial transmit
power of the PRACH on the basis of the open loop power. The formula for calculating the initial
transmit power is as follows: Preamble_Initial_Power = Primary CPICH DL TX powerCPICH_RSCP + UL interference + Constant Value.
Where,
l
Preamble_Initial_Power is the preamble initial transmit power;
Primary CPICH DL TX power is the downlink transmit power of the PCPICH;
CPICH_RSCP is the received signal code power of the PCPICH measured by UEs;
UL_interference is the uplink interference, which is received by UEs from the BCH;
Constant_Value is the constant value received by UEs from the BCH.

1-5
RAN

l
If ConstantValue is excessively high, the initial transmit power becomes excessively high,
and the period of the access process is shortened.
If ConstantValue is excessively low, the transmit power during the access process can
meet the requirement, but the preamble needs to ramp for many times, and thus the period
of the access process increases.
Because the RACH has short periods of preamble power ramp and retransmission, the value of
ConstantValue has a comparatively small impact on the system access performance.
Related Commands
Use ADD PRACHBASIC to set and MOD PRACHUUPARAS to modify ConstantValue.
1.1.3 PRACH Power Ramp Step

This describes the step of the power increase for the preamble when a UE does not receive the
Acquisition Indication (AI) from the NodeB.
ID
PowerRampStep
Value Range
1 to 8
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value of PowerRampStep is 2, namely 2 dBm.

l
If PowerRampStep is excessively high, the access process is shortened, whereas the power
cost may increase.
If PowerRampStep is excessively low, the access process becomes longer, but the power
cost is reduced.
In addition, the higher PowerRampStep is, the smaller impact ConstantValue has on the
network performance.
Related Commands
Use ADD PRACHBASIC to set, MOD PRACHUUPARAS to modify, and LST PRACH to
query PowerRampStep.
1-6

RAN
1.1.4 Maximum Number of Preamble Retransmission Attempts

This describes the maximum number of attempts of retransmitting the preamble in a preamble
ramp period.
ID
PreambleRetransMax
Value Range
1 to 64
Physical Scope
1 to 64 attempts, with the step of 1 attempt
Setting
The default value of PreambleRetransMax is 8.
The product of PreambleRetransMax and 1.1.3 PRACH Power Ramp Step determines the
maximum ramp power of the UE within a preamble ramp period.

l
If PreambleRetransMax is excessively low, the preamble power cannot ramp to the

required value, and UEs cannot successfully access the network.
If PreambleRetransMax is excessively high, some UEs may continuously increase the

power and repeatedly try to access the network, and thus other UEs are affected.
Related Commands
Use ADD PRACHBASIC to set, MOD PRACHUUPARAS to modify, and LST PRACH to
query PreambleRetransMax.
1.1.5 Maximum Preamble Loop

This describes the maximum number of random access preamble loops. When the UE has
transmitted the access preamble and the number of retransmission times has reached
PreambleRetransMax, it repeats the access attempt after the specified waiting time, if the UE
still has not received the capture indication. The maximum number of cycles cannot exceed
Mmax.
ID
Mmax
Value Range
1 to 32

1-7
RAN
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The default value is 8.

l
If Mmax is excessively low, the UE access success rate is affected.
If Mmax is excessively high, the UE probably tries the access attempt repeatedly within a
long time, which increases the uplink interference.
Related Commands
Use ADD RACH to set, LST RACH to query, and MOD RACH to modify Mmax.
1.1.6 Default Constant of DPCCH Transmit Power

This describes the default constant value (DefaultConstantValue) that is used by a UE in the
open loop power control process to calculate the power offset of the DPCCH
(DPCCH_Power_offset) and accordingly calculate the initial transmit power of the uplink
DPCCH.
ID
DefaultConstantValue
Value Range
-35 to -10
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value of DefaultConstantValue is 22, namely 22 dB.
In 3GPP 25.331, the formula for calculating the initial transmit power of the DPCCH is as
follows:
DPCCH_Initial_power = DPCCH_Power_offset CPICH_RSCP. Where, the value of
CPICH_RSCP is measured by UEs.
In 3GPP 25.331, the formula for calculating the initial transmit power of the PRACH or PCPCH
preamble is as follows:
Preamble_initial_Power = Primary CPICH DL TX Power CPICH RSCP + UL Interference +
Constant Value. Where, Primary CPICH DL TX Power (SIB5) and UL Interference (SIB7) are
broadcasted in system messages.
1-8

RAN
By comparison of the preceding formulas, you can find that DPCCH_Power_offset = Primary
CPICH DL TX Power + UL Interference + Constant Value. Where, Constant Value equals
DefaultConstantValue, namely the target of the DPCCH preamble (Ec/N0_Target).
Considering that the step of DPCCH_Power_offset is 2 dB, the accuracy of
DefaultConstantValue is not strictly required. The uplink synchronization, however, requires
a high value of DefaultConstantValue.

l
If DefaultConstantValue is excessively low, the uplink synchronization at cell verges may

fail in the initial link setup process, and the uplink coverage is affected.
If DefaultConstantValue is excessively high, instantaneous interference may be caused

for the uplink reception.
Related Commands
Use SET FRC to set and LST FRC to query DefaultConstantValue.
1.1.7 Maximum Allowed Uplink Transmit Power

This describes the maximum transmit power of the PRACH when a UE is trying to access a
designated cell. The parameter (MaxAllowedUlTxPower) equals
UE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH in the cell selection rule. In addition, there are another four
parameters indicating the maximum transmit power of UEs, and the four parameters are intended
for different QoS services.
ID
MaxAllowedUlTxPower
MaxUlTxPowerForConv (maximum transmit power of the conversational service)
MaxUlTxPowerForStr (maximum transmit power of the streaming service)
MaxUlTxPowerForInt (maximum transmit power of the interactive service)
MaxUlTxPowerForBac (maximum transmit power of the background service)
Value Range
50 to 33
Physical Scope
50 dBm to 33 dBm, with the step of 1 dBm
Setting
The default values of MaxAllowedUlTxPower, MaxUlTxPowerForConv,
MaxUlTxPowerForStr, MaxUlTxPowerForInt, and MaxUlTxPowerForBac are 24, namely
24 dBm.
If a cell is capacity-limited, the four parameters are not the factors that restrict the cell because
the transmit power of UEs can be timely adjusted. If a cell is coverage-limited whereas needs

1-9
RAN
to provide full coverage, the formula related to the cell is as follows:
. According to the formula, you can infer that:
and Noiserise = Itotal/PN.

Where,
l
PUE,max represents the maximum transmit power of a UE.
Lmax represents the maximum path loss.
V represents the activation factor of a service.
Gp represents the processing gain of a service. The formula is Gp = W/R (W represents the
signal bandwidth; R represents the data rate of a service.)
Ga represents the antenna gain, which is the sum of the actual antenna gain and the cable
loss gain.
Gd represents the sum of diversity gains, such as the multi-path diversity gain and receiver
antenna gain.
PN represents the background noise.
Eb/Io represents the target SIR value of a service.
For the services that do not require full cell coverage, you can also use the previous formula to
estimate the transmit power of the UE that meets the special requirement for coverage area. If
the transmit power of a UE has reached the maximum, you can use the previous formula to
estimate the uplink coverage scope.
Impact on Network Performance

If the coverage is restricted, the uplink coverage scope is affected if this parameter is set to an
excessively small value.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLSELRESEL to set, LST CELLSELRESEL to query, and MOD
CELLSELRESEL to modify MaxAllowedUlTxPower.
Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modify
MaxULTxPowerForConv, MaxUlTxPowerForStr, MaxULTxPowerForInt, and
MaxULTxPowerForBac.
1.2 Downlink Power Control Parameters

This describes the downlink power control parameters that can be modified by network planners.
1-10

RAN
Table 1-2 List of downlink power control parameters

S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configurati
on
MML Command
Lev
el
RlMaxDlPw
r
Maximum transmit
power of the
DPDCH. It relative
to the maximum
transmit power of
the CPICH.
Set: ADD
CELLRLPWR
Query: LST
CELLRLPWR
Modify: MOD
CELLRLPWR
Cell
RlMinDlPw
r
Minimum transmit
power of the
DPDCH. It is
relative to the
minimum transmit
power of the
CPICH.
Refer to List
of the
maximum
and
minimum
downlink
transmit
powers
PCPICHPo
wer
Power of the
primary CPICH of a
cell. The reference
point of the
parameter is the top
of the NodeB
cabinet.
330, namely
330 dBm.
Set: ADD PCPICH

Query: LST PCPICH
Modify: MOD CELL
MaxPCPIC
HPower
Maximum transmit
power of the
primary CPICH of a
cell
346, namely
34.6 dBm.
MinPCPIC
HPower
Minimum transmit
power of the
primary CPICH of a
cell
313, namely
31.3 dBm.
Set: ADD PCPICH

Query: LST PCPICH
Modify: MOD
PCPICHPWR
1.2.1 Maximum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio Link

This describes the maximum transmit power of the DPDCH, which is relative to the maximum
transmit power of the CPICH.
1.2.2 Minimum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio Link
This describes the minimum transmit power of the DPDCH, which is relative to the minimum
1.2.3 PCPICH Transmit Power

1-11
RAN
This describes the power of the primary CPICH of a cell. The reference point of the parameter
is the antenna connector of NodeB, and the value of the parameter is related to the downlink
coverage in the network planning.
1.2.4 Maximum PCPICH Transmit Power
This describes the maximum transmit power of the primary CPICH of a cell. The reference point
of the parameter is the antenna connector of NodeB, and the value of the parameter is related to
the downlink coverage in the network planning.
1.2.5 Minimum PCPICH Transmit Power
This describes the minimum transmit power of the primary CPICH of a cell. The reference point
of the parameter is the antenna connector of NodeB and the value of the parameter is related to
1.2.1 Maximum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio Link

This describes the maximum transmit power of the DPDCH, which is relative to the maximum
ID
RlMaxDlPwr
Value Range
350 to 150
Physical Scope
35 dB to 15 dB, with the step of 0.1 dB
Setting
The service type and service rate need to be considered for the configuration of RlMaxDlPwr.
The values configured for single services are listed in Table 1-3.
Table 1-3 List of the maximum and minimum downlink transmit powers
Service Type
Max. Downlink Transmit

Power (in the parentheses is
the dB value)
Min. Downlink Transmit

the dB value)
12.2K AMR
-30 (-3)
180 (18)
64K transparent data
30 (3)
150 (15)
0 (0)
150 (15)
20 (2)
170 (17)
28.8K transparent
data
20 (2)
170 (17)
CS
1-12

RAN
Service Type
Max. Downlink Transmit

the dB value)
Min. Downlink Transmit

the dB value)
57.6K controllable
stream
10 (1)
160 (16)
0 stream
(unidirectional)
20 (2)
170 (17)
384K
40 (4)
110 (11)
256K
20 (2)
130 (13)
144K
0 (0)
150 (15)
128K
0 (0)
150 (15)
64K
-20 (-2)
170 (17)
32K
40 (4)
190 (19)
16K
60 (6)
210 (21)
8K
80 (8)
230 (23)
PS
For combined services, the maximum and minimum transmit power is computed by the RNC
according to the configuration of individual services.

l
If RlMaxDlPwr is excessively high, downlink interference may occur.
If RlMaxDlPwr is excessively low, the downlink power control may be affected.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLRLPWR to set, LST CELLRLPWR to query, and MOD CELLRLPWR to
modify RlMaxDlPwr.
1.2.2 Minimum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio Link

This describes the minimum transmit power of the DPDCH, which is relative to the minimum
ID
RlMinDlPwr
Value Range
350 to 150

1-13
RAN
Physical Scope
Setting
Refer to List of the maximum and minimum downlink transmit powers.
The value of RlMinDlPwr varies according to the specific services and is related to the value
of Maxmum DL Tx Power and dynamic scope of power. Their relation is shown in the
following formula:
Minimum DL Tx Power = Maximum DL Tx Power - Dynamic scope of power control
Where, the dynamic scope of power control can be set to 15 dB.

l
If RlMinDlPwr is excessively low, the transmit power may become excessively low
because of incorrect estimation of SIR.
If RlMinDlPwr is excessively high, the downlink power control may be affected.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLRLPWR to set, LST CELLRLPWR to query, and MOD CELLRLPWR to
modify RlMinDlPwr.

ID
PCPICHPower
Value Range
100 to 500
Physical Scope
10 dBm to 50 dBm, with the step of 0.1 dBm
Setting
The default value of PCPICHPower is 330, namely 33 dBm.
For a cell with large coverage, PCPICHPower should be set to a comparatively high value; for
a cell with small coverage, PCPICHPower should be set to a comparatively low value. In a
planned multi-cell environment, the minimum value of PCPICHPower is definite. If the value
of PCPICHPower is lower than the allowed minimum value, coverage holes may occur when
the cells are under heavy load.
1-14

RAN

l
If PCPICHPower is excessively low, the downlink pilot coverage range is directly

affected.
If PCPICHPower is excessively high, the downlink interference increases and the transmit
power allocated to the service is reduced, and thus the downlink capacity is affected.
In addition, the configuration of PCPICHPower also has direct influence on the distribution of
handover areas.
Related Commands
Use ADD PCPICH to set, LST PCPICH to query, and MOD CELL to modify
PCPICHPower.
1.2.4 Maximum PCPICH Transmit Power

This describes the maximum transmit power of the primary CPICH of a cell. The reference point
of the parameter is the antenna connector of NodeB, and the value of the parameter is related to
ID
MaxPCPICHPower
Value Range
100 to 500
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value of MaxPCPICHPower is 346, namely 34.6 dBm.
When setting MaxPCPICHPower, consider some factors of the actual system environment,
such as the cell coverage scope (radius), geographic environment, and total power of the cell.
When the ratio of soft handover areas keeps the same, the downlink coverage cannot be promoted
by the increase of PCIPCH power.

MaxPCPICHPower is the upper limit for the transmit power of the PCPICH. When modifying
MaxPCPICHPower, ensure that MaxPCPICHPower is always higher than the actually needed
transmit power of the PCPICH.
Related Commands
Use ADD PCPICH to set, LST PCPICH to query, and MOD PCPICHPWR to modify
MaxPCPICHPower.

1-15
RAN
1.2.5 Minimum PCPICH Transmit Power

This describes the minimum transmit power of the primary CPICH of a cell. The reference point
of the parameter is the antenna connector of NodeB and the value of the parameter is related to
ID
MinPCPICHPower
Value Range
100 to 500
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value of MinPCPICHPower is 313, namely 31.3 dBm.
When setting MinPCPICHPower, consider some factors of the actual system environment,
such as the cell coverage scope (radius) and geographic environment. If MinPCPICHPower is
excessively small, the cell coverage is affected. Ensure that MinPCPICHPower is set under
the condition of a proper proportion of soft handover area, or under the condition that no coverage
hole exists.

MaxPCPICHPower is the lower limit for the transmit power of the PCPICH. When modifying
MinPCPICHPower, ensure that MinPCPICHPower is always lower than the actually needed
transmit power of the PCPICH.
Related Commands
Use ADD PCPICH to set, LST PCPICH to query, and MOD PCPICHPWR to modify
MinPCPICHPower.
1-16

RAN
Handover Parameters
About This Chapter

This describes handover parameters. Handover aims to ensure the communication continuity
and quality. Handovers in WCDMA system are of the following types: soft handover, softer
handover, intra-frequency hard handover, inter-frequency hard handover, inter-RAT hard
handover, and so on. Handover emerges as an important factor affecting network performance,
and handover optimization is also significant in the network optimization. Handover parameters
are classified according to handover classifications.
2.1 Intra-Frequency Handover Parameters
The common configurable intra-frequency handover parameters are listed here.
2.2 Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency Handover Parameters
The common configurable coverage-based inter-frequency handover parameters are listed here.
2.3 Non Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency Handover Management Parameters
The common configurable non-coverage-based inter-Frequency handover management
parameters are listed here.
2.4 Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management Parameters
This describes the coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters.
2.5 Non Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management Parameters
The common configurable non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters
are listed here.
2.6 Blind Handover Management Parameters
This describes the blink handover management parameters.
2.7 Cell Selection and Reselection Parameters
This describes the cell selection and reselection parameters.
2.8 Neighboring Cell Management Parameters
This describes the neighboring cell management parameters.

2-1
RAN
2.1 Intra-Frequency Handover Parameters

The common configurable intra-frequency handover parameters are listed here.
Table 2-1 List of intra-frequency handover parameters
No.
Parameter
ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
Leve
l
DivCtrlField
Softer handover
combination
indication switch
MAY
Set or modify: SET

HOCOMM
RNC
Soft handover
relative thresholds
for event 1A and
event 1B
1A: 6 (3
dB)
Soft handover
absolute thresholds
for event 1F
EcNo: -24
dB
IntraRelThdF
or1APS
IntraRelThdF
or1ACSVP
Query: LST
HOCOMM
1B: 12 (6
dB)
IntraRelThdF
or1ACSNVP
IntraRelThdF
or1BPS
IntraRelThdF
or1BCSVP
IntraRelThdF
or1BCSNVP
3
IntraAblThd
For1FEcNo
IntraAblThd
For1FRSCP
BlindHORS
CP1FThresh
old
1F event blind
handover trigger
condition
-115 dBm
HystFor1A
Hysteresis related to
soft handover for
events 1A, 1B, 1C,
1D, 1F and 1J
1A and
1B: 0 (0
dB)
HystFor1C
HystFor1D
HystFor1F
RNC/
Cell
RSCP:
-115 dBm
HystFor1B
For RNC
Set or modify: SET
INTRAFREQHO
Query: LST
INTRAFREQHO
For Cell
Set: ADD
CELLINTRAFRE
QHO
Query: LST
CELLINTRAFRE
QHO
Modify: MOD
CELLINTRAFRE
QHO
1C/1D/1F/
1J: 8 (4
dB)
HystFor1J
2-2

RAN
No.
Parameter
ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
TrigTime1A
Time-to-Trigger
parameters related to
soft handover for
events 1A, 1B, 1C,
1D, 1F and 1J
1A: D320
(320 ms)
TrigTime1B
TrigTime1C
TrigTime1D
TrigTime1F
Relevant
Command
Leve
l
Set or modify: SET

INTRAFREQHO
RNC
1B/1C/
1D/1F/1J:
D640 (640
ms)
TrigTime1J
7
SHOQualmin
Minimum quality
threshold of soft
handover
-24 dB
ShoFailPerio
d
Parameters related
to soft handover
failure
ShoFailPe
riod: 60
(60 s)
ShoFailNum
ForDwnGrd
ShoFailN
umForDw
nGrd: 3
RelThdForD
wnGrd
Query: LST
INTRAFREQHO
RelThdFo
rDwnGrd:
2 (1 dB)
DcccShoPena
ltyTime
DcccShoP
enaltyTim
e: 30 (30 s)
9
CellsForbidd
en1A
Affect 1A and 1B
threshold flag
AFFECT
CellsForbidd
en1B
10
11
CIOOffset
CIO
Neighboring cell
individual offset
Cell individual
offset
Set: ADD
INTRAFREQNCE
LL
NCell
Query: LST
INTRAFREQNCE
LL
Modify: MOD
INTRAFREQNCE
LL
Set:ADD
CELLSETUP
Cell
Modify: MOD
CELLSETUP
2.1.1 Switch of Softer Handover Combination Indication

This describes the indication that indicates whether the NodeB implements the softer
combination of radio links in soft handovers.
2.1.2 Soft Handover Relative Thresholds
These parameters define the difference between the quality of a cell (evaluated with the Ec/No
of PCPICH at present) and the comprehensive quality of the active set (the best cell quality in
case that W=0).

2-3
RAN
2.1.3 Soft Handover Absolute Thresholds

This describes the soft handover absolute thresholds. The soft handover absolute thresholds
correspond to the guarantee signal strength that satisfies the basic service QoS. The absolute
thresholds of soft handovers are IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo correspond to Ec/No and
IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP correspond to RSCP.
2.1.4 1F Event Blind Handover Trigger Condition
This describes the threshold of triggering blind handover by 1F event.
2.1.5 Hysteresis Related to Soft Handover
This describes the hysteresis values of the 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1F and 1J events.
2.1.6 Time to Trigger Related to Soft Handover
This describes the trigger delay time of the 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1F, and 1J events.
2.1.7 Minimum Quality Threshold of Soft Handover
This describes the minimum quality threshold of soft handover. When the RNC receives events
1A, 1C and 1D, the target cell can be added to the active set only when CPICH Ec/Io of the
target cell is higher than this absolute threshold.
2.1.8 Parameters Related to Soft Handover Failure
This describes the parameters related to soft handover failure including maximum evaluation
period of soft handover failure, threshold of soft handover failure times, relative threshold for
immediate slowdown upon soft handover failure, and penalty time for slowdown soft handover.
2.1.9 Affect 1A and 1B Event Threshold Flag
This describes the flags CellsForbidden1A and CellsForbidden1B. The flags determine
whether the relative thresholds of the 1A and 1B events are affected.
2.1.10 Neighboring Cell Individual Offset
This describes the neighboring cell offset for intra-frequency handovers.
2.1.11 Cell Individual Offset
This describes the cell offset for intra-frequency handovers.
2.1.1 Switch of Softer Handover Combination Indication

This describes the indication that indicates whether the NodeB implements the softer
combination of radio links in soft handovers.
ID
DivCtrlField
Value Range
MAY, MUST, MUST_NOT
Physical Scope
2-4
Softer combination may be implemented.
Softer combination must be implemented.
Softer combination must not be implemented.

RAN
Setting
The default value is MAY.
There are two combination methods for uplink combination of soft handover: one is the
maximum ratio combination at the NodeB Rake receiver, which gives the highest combination
gain; the other is the selective combination at the RNC, which gives a relatively smaller
combination gain.
The default value of the indication switch is MAY, which means that the NodeB decides whether
to implement maximum ratio combination according to its own physical conditions.
l
When MUST is selected, the NodeB is forced to carry out maximum ratio combination
which is usually used in tests.
When MUST_NOT is selected, the NodeB is forbidden to carry out maximum ratio
combination, and this method is adopted when maximum ratio combination performance
of softer handover is poor.
Consider the working status (test/normal operation) and the propagation environment when
deciding whether to implement softer combination and to adopt which kind of softer
combination.

None.
Related Commands
Use SET HOCOMM to set and LST HOCOMM to query DivCtrlField.
2.1.2 Soft Handover Relative Thresholds

These parameters define the difference between the quality of a cell (evaluated with the Ec/No
of PCPICH at present) and the comprehensive quality of the active set (the best cell quality in
case that W=0).
Parameter ID
IntraRelThdFor1APS
IntraRelThdFor1ACSVP
IntraRelThdFor1ACSNVP
IntraRelThdFor1BPS
IntraRelThdFor1BCSVP
IntraRelThdFor1BCSNVP
Value Range
0 to 29
Physical Value Range

0 to 14.5 dB, step 0.5 dB

2-5
RAN
Parameter Setting
l
The default values of IntraRelThdFor1APS, IntraRelThdFor1ACSVP and

IntraRelThdFor1ACSNVP are 6, namely 3 dB.
The default values of IntraRelThdFor1BPS, IntraRelThdFor1BCSVP and

IntraRelThdFor1BCSNVP are 12, namely 6 dB.
As specified in Protocol 25.331, when CPICH Ec/No value is adopted as the measurement
quantity, the following formula is adopted for the event 1A trigger decision:
Where,
l
MNew is the measurement quantity of the cell that enters the report range;
CIONew is the offset of this cell;
Mi is the measurement quantity of the cells in the active set;
NA is the number of cells in the current active set;
MBest is the measurement quantity of the best cell in the active set;
W is the weighting value which is used for weighting the comprehensive quality of the best
cell and the active set;
R1a is report range, namely the relative threshold for soft handover;
H1a is the hysteresis value of event 1A.
The following event is taken as the trigger condition of event 1B:
Where,
l
MOld is the measurement quantity of the cell that leaves the report range;
CIOOld is the offset of this cell;
Mi is the measurement quantity of the cells in the active set;
NA is the number of cells in the current active set;
MBest is the measurement quantity of the best cell in the active set;
W is the weighting value used for weighing the comprehensive quality of the best cell and
the active set;
R1b is report range, namely the relative threshold for soft handover;
H1b is the hysteresis value of event 1B.
The selection of a relative threshold for handover corresponds directly to the soft handover
proportion, and it should ensure the trouble-free implementation of smoothing handover.
2-6

RAN

The parameter setting determines the size of the soft handover area and the user proportion
involved in soft handover.
l
If the thresholds are high, the target cell joins the active set more easily, call drop occurs
more difficultly, and the UE proportion in the state of soft handover increases, but the
forward resources are seriously occupied.
If the thresholds are low, the target cell joins the active set more difficultly, the
communication quality cannot be guaranteed, and the implementation of smoothing
handover is affected.
Relevant Commands
For RNC-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameters: set them through SET
INTRAFREQHO, and query them through LST INTRAFREQHO.
For cell-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameters: add them through ADD
CELLINTRAFREQHO, query them through LST CELLINTRAFREQHO, and modify
them through MOD CELLINTRAFREQHO.
2.1.3 Soft Handover Absolute Thresholds

This describes the soft handover absolute thresholds. The soft handover absolute thresholds
correspond to the guarantee signal strength that satisfies the basic service QoS. The absolute
thresholds of soft handovers are IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo correspond to Ec/No and
IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP correspond to RSCP.
ID
IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo
IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP
Value Range
IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo: 24 to 0
IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP: 155 to 25
Physical Scope
IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo: 24 dB to 0 dB, with the step of 1 dB
IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP: 155 dBm to 25 dBm, with the step of 1 dBm
Setting
The default value of IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo is 24, namely 24 dB.
The default value of IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP is 115, namely 115 dBm.
Event 1F: The measurement quantity of the best cell's PCPICH is lower than the absolute
threshold.

2-7
RAN
These values are the absolute thresholds used for 1F reports in the soft handover algorithm,
corresponding to the guarantee signal strength that satisfies the basic service QoS and affecting
the triggering of event 1F.
The 1F event is used to trigger emergency blind handover. If the best cell of the active set reports
the 1F event, you can infer that the active set quality is rather poor, and a blind handover is
triggered at this moment to make the final attempt before call drops.
The emergency blind handover needs to be triggered on special occasions. The on-site
measurement needs to be implemented to know the range of the pilot strength of the best cell at
the areas where blind handovers need to be triggered. The emergency blind handover function
is usually not needed, so the absolute thresholds are set to the minimum value by default, namely
that emergency blind handovers are not triggered.

The higher the absolute thresholds are, the more easily blind handovers are triggered, and vice
versa. In practice, adjust the thresholds according to the handover policy and network coverage.
Related Commands
For the RNC-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameters:
Use SET INTRAFREQHO to set and LST INTRAFREQHO to query the soft handover
absolute thresholds.
For the cell-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameters:
Use ADD CELLINTRAFREQHO to add, LST CELLINTRAFREQHO to query, and MOD
CELLINTRAFREQHO to modify the soft handover absolute thresholds.
2.1.4 1F Event Blind Handover Trigger Condition

This describes the threshold of triggering blind handover by 1F event.
Parameter ID
BlindHORSCP1FThreshold
Value Range
-155 to 25

-155 dBm to 25 dBm, step 1 dBm
Parameter Setting
The default value is -115 dBm.
2-8

RAN

That parameter is used to judge whether to perform the blind handover. The smaller the value,
the greater the probability of the blind handover. An extremely small value, however, may lead
to handover failure due to very low quality requirements.
Relevant Commands
For RNC-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameters: set them through SET
INTRAFREQHO, and query them through LST INTRAFREQHO.
For cell-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameters: add them through ADD
CELLINTRAFREQHO, query them through LST CELLINTRAFREQHO, and modify
them through MOD CELLINTRAFREQHO.
2.1.5 Hysteresis Related to Soft Handover

This describes the hysteresis values of the 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1F and 1J events.
ID
HystFor1A
HystFor1B
HystFor1C
HystFor1D
HystFor1F
HystFor1J
Value Range
0 to 15
Physical Scope
0 dB to 7.5 dB, with the step of 0.5 dB
Setting
The default values of events 1A and 1B hysteresis parameters are 0 (0 dB). The default values
of other events are 8 (4 dB).
Event 1C: cell replacement in the active set.
Event 1D: For a cell in the active set, event 1D means that the best cell is modified; for a cell in
the monitored set, event 1D means that the cell is added into the active set and the best cell is
modified.
1.
Event 1A:
2-9
RAN
,
The first formula is used to trigger 1A, and the second one is used to cancel 1A. Therefore,
the hysteresis range is the signal fluctuation range under usual conditions, or the fluctuation
range of the slow fading under the same condition.
2.
Event 1B:
The first formula is used to trigger 1B, and the second one is used to cancel 1B.
3.
Event 1C:
MNew MInAS + H1c/2
MNew MInAS - H1c/2
The value of HystFor1C ranges from 3 dB to 5 dB. Because 1C is triggered when the active
set size reaches the maximum value, the delay of handover at this time does not lead to bad
result. The signaling interaction caused by the ping-pong effect should be minimized in the
parameter configuration, the parameter can be increased appropriately in the adjustment.
4.
Event 1D:
MNotBest MBest + H1d/2
The event cancellation formula has not been given in the protocol. According to the
cancellation definitions of other events, the 1D cancellation definition can be deduced as
follows:
MNotBest MBest - H1d/2
The value of HystFor1D ranges from 3 dB to 5 dB. Because all the handover policies are
based on the best cell and the change of the best cell usually leads to the update of the
measurement control, the ping-pong change and mis-decision should be minimized in
reports of event 1D. The parameter can be increased appropriately in the adjustment.
5.
Event 1F:
MNew T1f - H1f/2
MNew M1f + H1f/2
The value of HystFor1F ranges from 3 dB to 5 dB. The value of HystFor1F is usually the
same as HystFor1B.
Table 2-2 lists the recommended values of HystFor1A for different moving speeds of UE.
2-10

RAN
Table 2-2 Typical values of HystFor1A

Speed (km/h)
Range
Recommended Value
6 to 10 (3 dB to 5 dB)
10 (5 dB)
50
4 to 10 (2 dB to 5 dB)
6 (3 dB)
120
2 to 6 (1 dB to 3 dB)
2 (1 dB)
Typical
configuration
4 to 10 (2 dB to 5 dB)
6 (3 dB)
Table 2-3 lists the recommended values of HystFor1B for different moving speeds of UE.
Table 2-3 Typical values of the hysteresis for the 1B event
Speed (km/h)
Range
Recommended Value
6 to 10 (3 dB to 5 dB)
10 (5 dB)
50
4 to 10 (2 dB to 5 dB)
8 (4 dB)
120
2 to 6 (1 dB to 3 dB)
2 (1 dB)
Typical
configuration
4 to 10 (2 dB to 5 dB)
8 (4 dB)
Table 2-4 lists the recommended values of HystFor1C for different moving speeds of UE.
Table 2-4 Typical values of the hysteresis for the 1C event
Speed (km/h)
Range
Recommended Value
6 to 10 (3 dB to 5 dB)
10 (5 dB)
50
4 to 10 (2 dB to 5 dB)
8 (4 dB)
120
2 to 6 (1 dB to 3 dB)
4 (2 dB)
Typical
configuration
4 to 10 (2 dB to 5 dB)
8 (4 dB)
Table 2-4 lists the recommended values of HystFor1D for different moving speeds of UE.
Table 2-3 lists the recommended values of HystFor1F for different moving speeds of UE.
The value of HystFor1F ranges from 2 dB to 5 dB. Event 1A means that cells are added to the
active set, so it is a critical event. To guarantee timely handovers for 1A, the hysteresis for 1A
can be set to be smaller than the hystereses for 1B, 1C, 1D, and 1F. There cannot be a big
difference between hystereses for different events, or the proportion of soft handovers is affected.
When adjusting the hysteresis, consider the filtering factors and delay triggering.

2-11
RAN

If a hysteresis increases, the soft handover scope is reduced for the UEs in the soft handover
area while increased for the UEs outside the soft handover area. If the number of UEs in the soft
handover area equals that of UEs outside the soft handover area, the change of a hysteresis has
no impact on the actual proportion of soft handovers. The higher the hysteresis is, the stronger
the signal fluctuation resistance capability is, the more ping-pong effect is suppressed, however,
the more slowly the handover algorithm responds to signal changes.
Related Commands
Use SET INTRAFREQHO to set and LST INTRAFREQHO to query the hysteresis related
to soft handovers.
CELLINTRAFREQHO to modify the hysteresis related to soft handovers.
2.1.6 Time to Trigger Related to Soft Handover

This describes the trigger delay time of the 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1F, and 1J events.
ID
TrigTime1A
TrigTime1B
TrigTime1C
TrigTime1D
TrigTime1F
TrigTime1J
Value Range
Enum (D0, D10, D20, D40, D60, D80, D100, D120, D160, D200, D240, D320, D640, D1280,
D2560, D5000)
Working range: Enum (D0, D200, D240, D640, D1280, D2560, D5000)
Physical Scope
Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000) ms
Setting
The default value for 1A is D320 (320 ms), and the default values for other events are D640
(640 ms).
The time-to-trigger mechanism is mainly used:
2-12

RAN
To reduce the number of wrong event reports caused by burst signals.
To suppress ping-pong handover to some degree.
To reduce the influence of shadow fading on event decisions.
The hysteresis can effectively reduce the average number of handovers and mis-decisions and
avoid unnecessary handovers. 3GPP TS25.133 V3.6.0 prescribes that the intra-frequency
measurement physical layer updates the measurement result once every 200 ms, so the time to
trigger shorter than 200 ms is invalid. The time-to-trigger parameter should be close to a multiple
of 200 ms.
UEs with different moving speeds vary in their responses to the event delay trigger value. UEs
moving in a high speed are sensitive to the time-to-trigger value, while UEs moving in a slow
speed are slow to the time-to-trigger value and cause fewer ping-pong handovers and wrong
handovers. Therefore, the time-to-trigger parameter can be set to a comparatively low value for
the cells where most UEs are moving in a high speed, and can be set to a comparatively high
value for the cells where most UEs are moving in a slow speed.
Different events require different values of the time-to-trigger parameter:
l
The event (1A) of adding cells to the active set requires a comparatively short delay;
The events of replacing cells in the active set (1C and 1D) require relatively fewer pingpong handovers and wrong handovers and have no big impact on the call drop rate, and
therefore TrigTime1C and TrigTime1D can be set to comparatively high values;
The events of deleting cells in the active set (1B and 1F) require fewer ping-pong handovers,
so the initial settings of TrigTime1B can be the same as TrigTime1A and can be adjusted
according to the actual network statistics.
Table 2-5 lists the recommended value ranges of TrigTime1B and TrigTime1F for macro cells.
Table 2-5 Typical values of TrigTime1B and TrigTime1F
Speed (km/h)
Range (ms)
Recommended Value (ms)
640 to 1280
1280
50
240 to 640
640
120
240 to 640
640
Typical configuration
640 to 1280
640
The values listed in the preceding table should be reduced for micro cells.

The higher the time-to-trigger parameters are, the smaller the average number of handovers is.
The increase of the time to trigger causes a increase of call drops.
Related Commands
Use SET INTRAFREQHO to set and LST INTRAFREQHO to query the time-to-trigger
parameters.

2-13
RAN

CELLINTRAFREQHO to modify the time-to-trigger parameters.
2.1.7 Minimum Quality Threshold of Soft Handover

This describes the minimum quality threshold of soft handover. When the RNC receives events
1A, 1C and 1D, the target cell can be added to the active set only when CPICH Ec/Io of the
target cell is higher than this absolute threshold.
ID
SHOQualmin
Value Range
24 to 0
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value is 24, namely -24 dB.
The purpose for setting SHOQualmin is as follows:
The current events of soft handovers are defined on the basis of relative thresholds and have no
requirement about the absolute quality of cells. If the signals of added cells are too bad, the
comprehensive quality of the active set is not obviously improved and more downlink resources
are occupied and more TPC errors are caused, and the soft handover performance is worsened.
Therefore, there should be a baseline for the quality of the radio links to be added.
The setting of SHOQualmin depends on the power distribution rate of public channels and
demodulation capability of UEs.

Adjust SHOQualmin according to the Ec/Io that the cell soft handover area reaches as expected
at network planning.
l
The higher SHOQualmin is, the more difficult it is for the neighboring cells to join in the
active set, but the service quality of the joining cell can be ensured.
The lower SHOQualmin is, the easier it is for the neighboring cells to join in the active
set, but the service quality of the cell cannot be restricted if SHOQualmin is excessively
low.
Related Commands
Use SET INTRAFREQHO to set and LST INTRAFREQHO to query SHOQualmin.
2-14

RAN

CELLINTRAFREQHO to modify SHOQualmin.
2.1.8 Parameters Related to Soft Handover Failure

This describes the parameters related to soft handover failure including maximum evaluation
period of soft handover failure, threshold of soft handover failure times, relative threshold for
immediate slowdown upon soft handover failure, and penalty time for slowdown soft handover.
Parameter ID
ShoFailPeriod
ShoFailNumForDwnGrd
RelThdForDwnGrd
DcccShoPenaltyTime
Value Range
ShoFailPeriod: 0 to 120
ShoFailNumForDwnGrd: 0 to 63
RelThdForDwnGrd: -29 to 29
DcccShoPenaltyTime: 0 to 255

ShoFailPeriod: 0 to 120 s
ShoFailNumForDwnGrd: None
RelThdForDwnGrd: -14.5 dB to 14.5 dB, step is 0.5 dB
DcccShoPenaltyTime: 0 to 255 s
Parameter Setting
The default value of ShoFailPeriod is 60, namely 60 s.
The default value of ShoFailNumForDwnGrd is 3.
The default value of RelThdForDwnGrd is -24, namely -24 dB.
The default value of DcccShoPenaltyTime is 30 s.

l
ShoFailPeriod(Maximum evaluation period of soft handover failure) :

An extremely short period will affect the triggering of slowdown soft handover, thus
affecting the reduction of call drops. An extremely long period temporally does not have
any adverse effect.
ShoFailNumForDwnGrd(Threshold of soft handover failure times) :

2-15
RAN
The smaller the threshold, the greater probability of triggering slowdown before soft
handover, but the higher the success rate of handover. The greater the threshold, the greater
probability of handover attempt failures.
l
RelThdForDwnGrd(Relative threshold for immediate slowdown upon soft handover

failure) :
The greater the threshold, the greater the probability of meeting the slowdown conditions,
but the higher the successf rate of soft handover.
DcccShoPenaltyTime(Penalty time for slowdown soft handover) :

If the value is too small, it may lead to invalid penalty, that is, the speedup may be triggered
due to the DCCC cause and call drops may be increased. If the value is too large, the speedup
of subscribers may be delayed, and the user experience may be affected
Relevant Commands
Use SET INTRAFREQHO to set and LST INTRAFREQHO to query the parameters.
2.1.9 Affect 1A and 1B Event Threshold Flag

This describes the flags CellsForbidden1A and CellsForbidden1B. The flags determine
whether the relative thresholds of the 1A and 1B events are affected.
ID
CellsForbidden1A
CellsForbidden1B
Value Range
NOT_AFFECT, AFFECT
Physical Scope
Not affected, Affected
Setting
The default value is AFFECT.
In the following formulas for calculating relative thresholds of 1A and 1B,
CellsForbidden1A and CellsForbidden1B determine whether the measurement value Mi of
corresponding cell i is counted in
. If the value of CellsForbidden1A or
CellsForbidden1B is AFFECT, Mi is counted in
. If the value of
CellsForbidden1A or CellsForbidden1B is NOT_AFFECT, Mi is not counted in

2-16

RAN

When W in the preceding formulas is 0, the value of CellsForbidden1A or
CellsForbidden1B has no impact on the results of the formulas.
Related Commands
Use ADD INTRAFREQNCELL to add, LST INTRAFREQNCELL to query, and MOD
INTRAFREQNCELL to modify CellsForbidden1A and CellsForbidden1B.

This describes the neighboring cell offset for intra-frequency handovers.
ID
CIOOffset
Value Range
20 to 20
Physical Scope
Setting
The UE adds the CIOOffset and CIO to the original measured value of the cell, and uses the
sum as the measurement result for the UE intra-frequency handover decision. CIOOffset plays
the role of shifting the cell boarder in the handover algorithm.

l
The higher CIOOffset is, the easier it is for soft handovers to occur, and the more UEs
there are in the soft handover state, but the more forward resources are occupied.
The lower CIOOffset is, the more difficult it is for soft handovers to occur, which is likely
to affect the reception quality.
Related Commands
Use ADD INTRAFREQNCELL to add, LST INTRAFREQNCELL to query, and MOD
INTRAFREQNCELL to modify CIOOffset.

2-17
RAN

ID
CIO
Value Range
20 to 20
Physical Scope
Setting
sum as the measurement result for the UE intra-frequency handover decision. CIO plays the
role of shifting the cell boarder in the handover algorithm.

l
The higher CIO is, the easier it is for soft handovers to occur, and the more UEs there are
in the soft handover state, but the more forward resources are occupied.
The lower CIO is, the more difficult it is for soft handovers to occur, which is likely to
affect the reception quality.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLSETUP to add and MOD CELLSETUP to modify CIO.
2.2 Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency Handover Parameters

The common configurable coverage-based inter-frequency handover parameters are listed here.
Table 2-6 List of coverage-based inter-frequency handover parameters
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
Level
InterFreqReport
Mode
Inter-Frequency
measurement
report mode
Periodical_re
porting
RNC
PrdReportInterv
al
Inter-Frequency
measurement
periodic report
interval
500 ms
For RNC
Set or modify:
SET
INTERFREQH
OCOV
2-18

Cell
RAN
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
Hystfor2B
Hysteresis related
to inter-frequency
handover
Hystfor2B,
Hystfor2D,
Hystfor2F: 4
(2 dB)
Query: LST
INTERFREQH
OCOV
For Cell
Set: ADD
CELLINTERFR
EQHOCOV
Query: LST
CELLINTERFR
EQHOCOV
Modify: MOD
CELLINTERFR
EQHOCOV
Hystfor2D
Hystfor2F
HystforHHO
TIMETOTRIG2
B
TIMETOTRIG2
D
HystforHHO
: 0 (0 dB)
Time-to-Trigger
related to interfrequency hard
handover
TIMETOTRI
G2B: D0
TIMETOTRI
G2D: D320
TIMETOTRIG2
F
TIMETOTRI
G2F: D1280
TIMETOTRIG
FORPRDINTE
RFREQ
TIMETOTRI
GFORPRDI
NTERFREQ:
0
InterFreqCSThd
2FRSCP
INTERFREQR
99PSTHD2FRS
CP
RSCP-Based
inter-frequency
measurement
start/stop
thresholds
Level
2D: -95 dBm;

2F: -92 dBm
INTERFREQH
THD2FRSCP
InterFreqCSThd
2DRSCP
INTERFREQR
99PSTHD2DRS
CP
INTERFREQH
THD2DRSCP

2-19
RAN
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
InterFreqCSThd
2FEcNo
Ec/No-based
inter-frequency
measurement
start/stop
thresholds
2D: -14 dB
Target frequency
trigger threshold
of inter-frequency
coverage
RSCP: -92
dBm
Current used
frequency quality
threshold of interfrequency
handover
RSCP: -92
dBm
Retry period of 2B
event
500 ms
InterFreqCSThd
2FEcNo
INTERFREQR
99PSTHD2DE
CN0
Relevant
Command
Level
2F: -12 dB
INTERFREQH
THD2DECN0
INTERFREQR
99PSTHD2FEC
N0
INTERFREQH
THD2FECN0
7
TARGETFREQ
CSTHDRSCP
TARGETFREQ
R99PSTHDRS
CP
Ec/No: -12
dB
TARGETFREQ
HTHDRSCP
TARGETFREQ
CSTHDECN0
TARGETFREQ
R99PSTHDEC
N0
TARGETFREQ
HTHDECN0
8
USEDFREQCS
THDRSCP
USEDFREQR9
9PSTHDRSCP
USEDFREQHT
HDRSCP
Ec/No: -12
dB
USEDFREQCS
THDECN0
USEDFREQR9
9PSTHDECN0
USEDFREQHT
HDECN0
9
2-20
PeriodFor2B

RAN
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
10
AmntOfRpt2B
Maximum retry
times of 2B event
Infinity
11
CIOOffset
Neighboring cell
individual offset
0 dB
Relevant
Command
Level
Set: ADD
INTERFREQN
CELL
NCell
Query: LST
INTERFREQN
CELL
Modify: MOD
INTERFREQN
CELL
12
CIO
Cell individual
offset
0 dB
Set: ADD
CELLSETUP
Cell
Modify: MOD
CELLSETUP
13
INTERFREQR
ATSWITCH
Inter-Freq and
Inter-RAT coexist
switch
InterFreq
Set: ADD
CELLHOCOM
M
Cell
Query: LST
CELLHOCOM
M
Modify: MOD
CELLHOCOM
M
14
CoExistMeasTh
dChoice
InterFreq and
InterRAT coexist
measure threshold
choice
COEXIST_
MEAS_THD
_CHOICE_I
NTERFREQ
For RNC: SET

INTERFREQH
OCOV
RNC/
Cell
LST
INTERFREQH
OCOV
For Cell:ADD
CELLHOCOM
M
LST
CELLHOCOM
M
MOD
CELLHOCOM
M

2-21
RAN
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
Level
15
INTERFREQM
EASTIME
Inter-freq measure
timer length[s]
60 s
Set: ADD
CELLINTERFR
EQHOCOV
Cell
Query: LST
CELLINTERFR
EQHOCOV
Modify: MOD
CELLINTERFR
EQHOCOV
16
HOCovPrio
Coverage-Based
inter-frequency
handover priority
Set:ADD
INTERFREQN
CELL
Cell
Query: LST
INTERFREQN
CELL
2.2.1 Inter-Frequency Measurement Report Mode

This describes the inter-frequency measurement report mode: the periodical report mode or event
trigger mode.
2.2.2 Inter-Frequency Measurement Periodic Report Interval
This describes the interval for periodic report of inter-frequency measurement.
2.2.3 Hysteresis Related to Inter-Frequency Handover
This describes the trigger hystereses for the 2B, 2D, 2F events, and hard handovers (HHOs).
2.2.4 Time to Trigger Related to Inter-Frequency Hard Handover
This describes the trigger delay time for the 2B, 2D, 2F events, and hard handovers (HHOs) in
the coverage-oriented inter frequency handover.
2.2.5 Start or Stop Thresholds for the RSCP-Based Inter-Frequency Measurement
This describes the start or stop thresholds for the RSCP-based inter-frequency measurement. In
the coverage-based inter-frequency handover, when the periodical report mode is used for the
inter-frequency measurement, the start or stop thresholds for the RSCP-based inter-frequency
measurement correspond to the absolute thresholds of inter-frequency measurement events,
including the absolute thresholds of the 2D event and 2F event, when RSCP is used for
measurement.
2.2.6 EC/No-based Inter-Frequency Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds
In the coverage-based inter-frequency handover, this parameter corresponds to inter-frequency
measurement event absolute thresholds when Ec/No is used for measurement.
2.2.7 Target Frequency Trigger Threshold of Inter-Frequency Coverage
When the event reporting mode is adopted for inter-frequency handover in the coverage-based
inter-frequency handover, this parameter is used as the mandatory threshold requirement
satisfied by target frequency quality when event 2B is triggered, and it is one of the mandatory
conditions for triggering event 2B. If the periodical reporting mode is adopted, this parameter
is used as the absolute threshold of inter-frequency hard handover event.
2-22

RAN
2.2.8 Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of Inter-Frequency Handover

When the event reporting mode is adopted for inter-frequency handover, these parameters are
used for measurement control of event 2B. Only when the quality of used frequency is poorer
than this threshold, one of the mandatory conditions for triggering event 2B is satisfied.
2.2.9 Retry Period of 2B Event
This parameter specifies the 2B event retry period.
2.2.10 Maximum Retry Times of 2B Event
This parameter specifies the 2B event maximum retry times.
This describes the neighboring cell offset for inter-frequency handovers.
2.2.13 Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist Switch
This describes the inter-frequency and inter-RAT coexist switch. The switch indicates how to
perform neighboring cell measurement if a cell has both inter-frequency and inter-RAT
neighboring cells.
2.2.14 Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist Measurement Threshold Choice
This describes the inter-frequency and inter-RAT coexist measurement threshold switch. The
switch determines what configuration parameters for the 2D and 2F events should be chosen
based on measurement types when a cell has both inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighboring
cells.
2.2.15 Inter-Frequency Measurement Timer Length
This describes the inter-frequency measurement timer length. The inter-frequency measurement
timer is used to prevent a cell from keeping in the inter-frequency measurement state
(compressed mode) for a long time if the cell cannot find a target cell that meets the handover
condition.
2.2.16 Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency Handover Priority
This parameters specifies the priority of coverage-based inter-frequency handover.
2.2.1 Inter-Frequency Measurement Report Mode

This describes the inter-frequency measurement report mode: the periodical report mode or event
trigger mode.
ID
InterFreqReportMode
Value Range
Enum (Periodical_reporting, Event_trigger)
Physical Scope
Periodical_reporting indicates that the periodical reporting mode is used.
Event_trigger indicates that the event triggering mode is used.

2-23
RAN
Setting
The default value is Periodical_reporting.
There are two optional inter-frequency handover report modes in RNC: event report and
periodical report, which are selected through the inter-frequency report mode switch. This
algorithm switch is oriented to RNC configuration.
l
Event report:
To prevent ping-pong effect before and after inter-frequency handovers, the 2B event (the
quality of current in-use frequency is lower than the threshold of current frequency quality,
and the quality of frequencies that are not used currently is higher than the target frequency
trigger threshold) is used to trigger inter-frequency handovers. As the 2B event has no event
transfer period mechanism, the function of retrying after handover failures is not
implemented, unless this cell can trigger 2B events again.
Advantage:
The event report can save signaling transmission resources and reduce processing load. In
event report mode, the quality of intra-frequency signals and inter-frequency signals can
be compared to avoid ping-pong handovers in a degree.
Disadvantage:
The event report can be reported only once, because no event transfer period mechanism
is available. If a handover fails, the periodical retry can be triggered only by an internal
timer. If the algorithm parameters are oriented to the cell level, the inter-frequency
measurement parameters need to be updated every time after the optimal cell is updated.
Periodical report:
The 2D and 2F events are used to start and stop the compressed modes. In the period of the
compressed mode, the measurement result of inter-frequency neighboring cells is reported.
When the cell quality reported by the UE is higher than the sum of a absolute threshold and
its hysteresis, the system starts the delay triggering timer. If the cell quality meets the
requirement throughout the duration of the timer, the system starts an inter-frequency
handover after the timer times out.
If the handover fails, the system implements handover decision based on the periodical
report of inter-frequency measurement again.
Advantage:
After a handover fails, the system can use the periodical reports to retry for many times for
a cell. The algorithm of the periodical report can be flexibly extended. Parameters of the
periodical reports are oriented to cells, so the RNC updates the parameters when
implementing internal handover decision and the system needs not to use signaling
messages to inform UEs of the parameter change after handovers occur.
Disadvantage:
A large amount of signaling is needed. The air-interface load and signaling processing load
increases.

The periodical report and event report have both advantages and disadvantages. Currently, the
periodical report mode is most commonly used.
Related Commands
For the RNC-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters:
2-24

RAN
Use SET INTERFREQHOCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHOCOV to query

InterFreqReportMode.
For the cell-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters:
Use ADD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to query,
and MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to modify InterFreqReportMode.
2.2.2 Inter-Frequency Measurement Periodic Report Interval

This describes the interval for periodic report of inter-frequency measurement.
ID
PrdReportInterval
Value Range
NON_PERIODIC_REPORT, D250, D500, D1000, D2000, D3000, D4000, D6000, D8000,
D12000, D16000, D20000, D24000, D28000, D32000, D64000
Physical Scope
No periodic report, 250, 500, 1000, 2000,3000, 4000, 6000, 8000, 12000, 16000, 20000, 24000,
28000, 32000, 64000, step is ms.
Setting
The default value is D500, namely 500 ms.

Reporting once every such interval when periodic report is enabled. It is recommended that the
value should not be set to NON_PERIODIC_REPORT, otherwise the UE action is unknown.
The shorter the interval is, the more timely the measurement report is, but the load over the air
interface is increased.
Related Commands
PrdReportInterval.
and MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to modify PrdReportInterval.
2.2.3 Hysteresis Related to Inter-Frequency Handover

This describes the trigger hystereses for the 2B, 2D, 2F events, and hard handovers (HHOs).

2-25
RAN
ID
Hystfor2B
Hystfor2D
Hystfor2F
HystforHHO
Value Range
0 to 29
Physical Scope
Setting
The default values of Hystfor2B, Hystfor2D, and Hystfor2F are 4, namely 2 dB. The default
value of HystforHHO is 0, namely 0 dB.
In periodic report mode, the inter-frequency measurement hysteresis is mainly used to prevent
ping-pong handovers of the 2D event (the estimated quality of the current frequency is lower
than a threshold) and the 2F event (the estimated quality of the current frequency is higher than
a threshold). The 2D event is used to start the compressed mode, while the 2F event is used to
stop the compressed mode. Therefore, Hystfor2D can be higher than the recommended value
based on the statistics about the ping-pong effect of inter-frequency handovers, and
Hystfor2F can be higher than the recommended value. In this way, frequent actions of starting
and stopping the compressed mode are prevented and unnecessary updates of the active set are
reduced.
When setting hystereses related to inter-frequency handovers, consider the radio environment
(feature of slow fading), actual handover distance, and UEs' moving speed. The values of
hystereses related to inter-frequency handovers range from 2 dB to 5 dB. When adjusting the
hystereses, consider the filtering factors and delay triggering.
Table 2-7 lists the recommended value ranges of hystereses related to inter-frequency
handovers.
Table 2-7 Typical values of hystereses related to inter-frequency handovers
2-26
Speed
(km/h)
Scope (CPICH
RSCP)
Recommended
Value (CPICH
RSCP)
Scope (CPICH
Ec/No)
Recommended
Value (CPICH
Ec/No)
Low
speed (5)
8 to 12 (4 dBm to
6 dBm)
10 (5 dBm)
6 to 10 (3 dB to 5
dB)
10 (5 dB)
Middle
speed
(50)
6 to 8 (3 dBm to 4
dBm)
8 (4 dBm)
4 to 10 (2 dB to 5
dB)
6 (3 dB)

RAN
Speed
(km/h)
Scope (CPICH
RSCP)
Recommended
Value (CPICH
RSCP)
Scope (CPICH
Ec/No)
Recommended
Value (CPICH
Ec/No)
High
speed
(120)
4 to 8 (2 dBm to 4
dBm)
6 (3 dBm)
2 to 6 (1 dB to 3
dB)
4 (2 dB)
Typical
configura
tion
6 to 12 (3 dBm to
6 dBm)
8 (4 dBm)
4 to 10 (2 dB to 5
dB)
6 (3 dB)
In event report mode, the inter-frequency measurement hysteresis is mainly used to decrease the
frequent handovers triggered by event 2B because of radio channel changing. The 2B event
triggers inter-frequency coverage handovers. The frequent reports of 2B events can be used to
implement retry (for the same or different cells) for many times after handover failures. If the
2B event is triggered frequently in the same cell, and the handovers in the cell always fail, the
system may retry ineffectively for many times. In this case, signaling resources are wasted and
the system processing load increases. Hystfor2B is set to 0 currently and needs to be optimized
based on the actual situation.

The higher the hysteresis is, the stronger the signal fluctuation resistance capability is, and the
more ping-pong effect is suppressed. In this case, the handover algorithm responds to signal
changes more slowly.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERFREQHOCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHOCOV to query the
hystereses related to inter-frequency handovers.
and MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to modify the hystereses related to inter-frequency
handovers.
2.2.4 Time to Trigger Related to Inter-Frequency Hard Handover

This describes the trigger delay time for the 2B, 2D, 2F events, and hard handovers (HHOs) in
the coverage-oriented inter frequency handover.
ID
TIMETOTRIG2B
TIMETOTRIG2D
TIMETOTRIG2F
TIMETOTRIGFORPRDINTERFREQ

2-27
RAN
Value Range
The value ranges and working ranges of TIMETOTRIG2B, TIMETOTRIG2D, and
TIMETOTRIG2F are as follows:
l
Value range: Enum (D0, D10, D20, D40, D60, D80, D100, D120, D160, D200, D240,
D320, D640, D1280, D2560, D5000)
Working range: Enum (D0, D200, D240, D640, D1280, D2560, D5000)
TIMETOTRIGFORPRDINTERFREQ ranges 0 to 64000.
Physical Scope
Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000) ms
TIMETOTRIGFORPRDINTERFREQ ranges 0 to 64000 ms.
Setting
Default values
l
TIMETOTRIG2B: D0
TIMETOTRIG2D: D320
TIMETOTRIG2F: D1280
TIMETOTRIGFORPRDINTERFREQ: 0
The previous simulation results show that hystereses can effectively reduce the average number
of handovers and mis-decisions and avoid unnecessary handovers. Because the report period of
inter-frequency measurement is 480 ms, the trigger time shorter than 480 ms is invalid.
UEs with different moving speeds vary in their responses to the event delay trigger value. UEs
moving in a high speed are sensitive to the time-to-trigger value, while UEs moving in a slow
speed are slow to the time-to-trigger value. Therefore, the time-to-trigger parameter can be set
to a low value for the cells where most UEs are moving in a high speed, and can be set to a
comparatively high value for the cells where most UEs are moving in a slow speed. The timeto-trigger parameters need to be adjusted based on the actual network statistics.
Table 2-8 lists the value ranges and recommended values of time-to-trigger parameters related
to inter-frequency handovers.
Table 2-8 Typical values of time-to-trigger parameters related to inter-frequency handovers
2-28
Speed (km/h)
Range (ms)
640 to 1280
1280
50
240 to 640
640
120
240 to 640
640
640 to 1280
640

RAN

The higher the time-to-trigger parameters are, the more difficult it is for handovers to occur, and
the possibility of call drops increases.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERFREQHOCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHOCOV to query the timeto-trigger parameters related to inter-frequency handovers.
and MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to modify the time-to-trigger parameters related to
inter-frequency handovers.
2.2.5 Start or Stop Thresholds for the RSCP-Based Inter-Frequency

Measurement
This describes the start or stop thresholds for the RSCP-based inter-frequency measurement. In
the coverage-based inter-frequency handover, when the periodical report mode is used for the
inter-frequency measurement, the start or stop thresholds for the RSCP-based inter-frequency
measurement correspond to the absolute thresholds of inter-frequency measurement events,
including the absolute thresholds of the 2D event and 2F event, when RSCP is used for
measurement.
ID
InterFreqCSThd2DRSCP (Threshold to trigger inter-frequency measurement with measurement
quantity of RSCP for CS domain services)
InterFreqCSThd2FRSCP (Threshold to stop inter-frequency measurement with measurement
quantity of RSCP for CS domain services)
InterFreqR99PSThd2DRSCP (Threshold to trigger inter-frequency measurement with
measurement quantity of RSCP for PS domain R99 services)
InterFreqHThd2DRSCP (Threshold to trigger inter-frequency measurement with measurement
quantity of RSCP for PS domain HSPA services)
InterFreqR99PsThd2FRSCP (Threshold to stop inter-frequency measurement with
measurement quantity of RSCP for PS domain R99 services)
InterFreqHThd2FRSCP (Threshold to stop inter-frequency measurement with measurement
quantity of RSCP for PS domain HSPA services)
Value Range
115 to 25
Physical Scope

2-29
RAN
Setting
The default values of InterFreqCSThd2DRSCP, InterFreqR99PsThd2DRSCP and
InterFreqHThd2DRSCP are 95.
The default values of InterFreqCSThd2FRSCP, InterFreqR99PsThd2FRSCP and
InterFreqHThd2FRSCP are 92.
When the current measured value of frequency points is lower than the absolute threshold of the
2D event, UEs report 2D events, and the RNC delivers signaling messages to start the
compressed mode and inter-frequency measurement. When the current measured value of
frequency points is higher than the absolute threshold of the 2F event, UEs report 2F events, and
the RNC delivers signaling messages to stop the compressed mode and inter-frequency
measurement.
The threshold for starting the inter-frequency measurement (namely the threshold for starting
the compressed mode) is the most important parameter in the inter-frequency handover policy,
because the threshold affects the proportion of the UEs in compressed mode and the success rate
of hard handovers. When setting the threshold, consider the following factors:
l
Moving speed of UEs
Cell radius
Path loss
Table 2-9 list the inter-frequency measurement start thresholds, which are represented by RSCP,
of the cells on the edge of carrier coverage.
Table 2-9 Thresholds (RSCP) for starting inter-frequency measurement for UEs moving in
different speeds
Speed (km/h)
Inter-frequency measurement start threshold

(dBm)
-100
50
-97
120
-93
In actual situations, there may be UEs moving with different speeds in a cell, so the recommended
value of the inter-frequency measurement start threshold of all cells is 95 dBm. The emulation
result shows that the call drop rate is still low for UEs moving with the speed of 120 km/h when
the inter-frequency measurement start threshold is set to 95 dBm.
For the cells at the center of the coverage areas, the inter-frequency measurement start thresholds
represented by Ec/No are shown in the following table:
2-30

RAN
Table 2-10 Thresholds (EcIo) for starting inter-frequency measurement for UEs moving in
different speeds
Speed (km/h)
Inter-frequency measurement start threshold

(dB)
-17
50
-14
120
-12
In the cells at the center of the coverage areas, UEs preferentially implement intra-frequency
soft handovers, so inter-frequency hard handovers are unnecessary. In addition, the starting of
the compressed mode reduces the communication quality of UEs and increases network
interference, so the recommended value of the inter-frequency measurement start threshold for
the cells at the center of the coverage areas is 24 dB, namely that the compressed mode is not
started for the cells at the center of the coverage areas.
If a cell is a macro cell, there must be micro cells in the coverage of the cell. To enable the micro
cells to use the traffic absorption function, the inter-frequency measurement start or stop
threshold should be set to a comparatively high value, namely the thresholds for events 2D and
2F should be set to comparatively high values (represented by CPICH RSCP).
If a cell is a micro cell, the preceding default values should be modified according to the link
budget.

The 2D and 2F events are switches for starting and stopping the compressed mode. If a cell is
on the edge of coverage, the measured value of RSCP is used as the decision standard for the
2D and 2F events. Therefore, the threshold of the 2D event needs to be set to a high value to
start the compression mode early. To reduce the ping-pong effect of starting and stopping the
compressed mode, increase the difference between the thresholds for the 2D event and the 2F
event.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERFREQHOCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHOCOV to query the interfrequency measurement thresholds.
and MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to modify the inter-frequency measurement
thresholds.
2.2.6 EC/No-based Inter-Frequency Measurement Start/Stop

Thresholds
In the coverage-based inter-frequency handover, this parameter corresponds to inter-frequency
measurement event absolute thresholds when Ec/No is used for measurement.

2-31
RAN
Parameter ID
InterFreqCSThd2DEcN0 (Inter-freq CS measure start Ec/No THD)
InterFreqCSThd2FEcN0 (Inter-freq CS measure stop Ec/No THD)
INTERFREQR99PSTHD2DECN0 (Inter-freq R99 PS measure start Ec/No THD)
INTERFREQHTHD2DECN0 (Inter-freq H measure start Ec/No THD)
INTERFREQR99PSTHD2FECN0 (Inter-freq R99 PS measure stop Ec/No THD)
INTERFREQHTHD2FECN0 (Inter-freq H measure stop Ec/No THD)
Value Range
-24 to 0

-24 dB to 0 dB, step 1 dB
Parameter Setting
l
The default values of InterFreqCSThd2DecN0, INTERFREQR99PSTHD2DECN0 and

INTERFREQHTHD2DECN0 are -14, namely -14 dB
The default values for InterFreqCSThd2FEcN0, INTERFREQR99PSTHD2FECN0 and

INTERFREQHTHD2FECN0 are -12, namely -12 dB.
For the detailed descriptions, refer to 2.2.5 Start or Stop Thresholds for the RSCP-Based
Inter-Frequency Measurement.

Set the event 2D threshold to a relatively greater value if the compressed mode is expected to
start as early as possible; otherwise, set it to a relatively less value. To control the ping-pong
effect of the compressed mode start/stop, increase appropriately the difference between the
thresholds for events 2D and 2F.
Relevant Commands
For RNC-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters: set them through SET
INTERFREQHOCOV and query them through LST INTERFREQHOCOV.
For cell-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters: add them through ADD
CELLINTERFREQHOCOV, query them through LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV, and
modify them through MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV.
2.2.7 Target Frequency Trigger Threshold of Inter-Frequency

Coverage
When the event reporting mode is adopted for inter-frequency handover in the coverage-based
inter-frequency handover, this parameter is used as the mandatory threshold requirement
satisfied by target frequency quality when event 2B is triggered, and it is one of the mandatory
2-32

RAN
conditions for triggering event 2B. If the periodical reporting mode is adopted, this parameter
is used as the absolute threshold of inter-frequency hard handover event.
Parameter ID
TARGETFREQCSTHDECN0 (Inter-freq CS target frequency trigger Ec/No THD)
TARGETFREQCSTHDRSCP (Inter-freq CS target frequency trigger RSCP THD)
TARGETFREQR99PSTHDECN0 (Inter-freq R99 PS target frequency trigger Ec/No THD)
TARGETFREQHTHDECN0 (Inter-freq H target frequency trigger Ec/No THD)
TARGETFREQR99PSTHDRSCP (Inter-freq R99 PS target frequency trigger RSCP THD)
TARGETFREQHTHDRSCP (Inter-freq H target frequency trigger RSCP THD)
Value Range
TARGETFREQCSTHDECN0, TARGETFREQR99PSTHDECN0 and
TARGETFREQHTHDECN0: -24 to 0
TARGETFREQCSTHDRSCP, TARGETFREQR99PSTHDRSCP and
TARGETFREQHTHDRSCP: -115 to -25

TARGETFREQCSTHDECN0, TARGETFREQR99PSTHDECN0 and
TARGETFREQHTHDECN0: -24 dB to 0 dB
TARGETFREQCSTHDRSCP, TARGETFREQR99PSTHDRSCP and
TARGETFREQHTHDRSCP: -115 dBm to -25 dBm
Parameter Setting
The default values of TARGETFREQCSTHDECN0, TARGETFREQR99PSTHDECN0 and
TARGETFREQHTHDECN0 are -12 dB.
The default values of TARGETFREQCSTHDRSCP, TARGETFREQR99PSTHDRSCP and
TARGETFREQHTHDRSCP are -92 dBm.

The greater the parameters are, the more difficult hard handover occurs.
Relevant Commands
For parameters oriented to RNC inter-frequency handover algorithm: set them through SET
INTERFREQHOCOV, and query them through LST INTERFREQHOCOV.
For parameters oriented to cell inter-frequency handover algorithm: add them through ADD

2-33
RAN
2.2.8 Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of InterFrequency Handover

When the event reporting mode is adopted for inter-frequency handover, these parameters are
used for measurement control of event 2B. Only when the quality of used frequency is poorer
than this threshold, one of the mandatory conditions for triggering event 2B is satisfied.
Parameter ID
Based on different inter-frequency measurement quantities in use and different borne services,
it can be:
USEDFREQCSTHDECN0 (Inter-freq CS Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD)
USEDFREQR99PSTHDECN0 (Inter-freq R99 PS Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD)
USEDFREQHTHDECN0 (Inter-freq H Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD)
USEDFREQCSTHDRSCP (Inter-freq CS Used frequency trigger RSCP THD)
USEDFREQR99PSTHDRSCP (Inter-freq R99 PS Used frequency trigger RSCP THD)
USEDFREQHTHDRSCP (Inter-freq H Used frequency trigger RSCP THD)
Value Range
USEDFREQCSTHDECN0, USEDFREQR99PSTHDECN0 and USEDFREQHTHDECN0:
-24 to 0
USEDFREQCSTHDRSCP, USEDFREQR99PSTHDRSCP and USEDFREQHTHDRSCP:
-115 to -25

-115 dBm to -25 dBm, step 1 dBm
Parameter Setting
The default values of USEDFREQCSTHDECN0, USEDFREQR99PSTHDECN0 and
USEDFREQHTHDECN0 are -12 dB.
The default values of USEDFREQCSTHDRSCP, USEDFREQR99PSTHDRSCP and
USEDFREQHTHDRSCP are -92 dBm.
Factors to be considered while setting these parameters:
The cell signal quality of current frequency is poor and cannot better satisfy the coverage
requirement of current service. After handover is completed, it is hard to hand over to the current
used frequency cell again even inter-frequency measurement is started again. In other words,
these parameters should be set less than the trigger threshold of event 2F, or equal to the threshold
of event 2D.
2-34

RAN

Higher values of these parameters get event 2B to be more easily triggered.
Relevant Commands
For parameters oriented to RNC inter-frequency handover algorithm: set them through SET
INTERFREQHOCOV, and query them through LST INTERFREQHOCOV.
For parameters oriented to cell inter-frequency handover algorithm: add them through ADD
2.2.9 Retry Period of 2B Event

This parameter specifies the 2B event retry period.
ID
PeriodFor2B
Value Range
1 to 64
Physical Scope
500 ms to 32000 ms, step is 500 ms.
Setting
The default value is 1, namely 500 ms.

The lower the parameter isthe more easily handover to inter-frequency cellbut the system
processing resource will be a little increased.
Related Commands
PeriodFor2B.
and MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to modify PeriodFor2B.
2.2.10 Maximum Retry Times of 2B Event

This parameter specifies the 2B event maximum retry times.

2-35
RAN
ID
AmntOfRpt2B
Value Range
0 to 63
Physical Scope
0 to 63 times, 64 means Infinity.
Setting

The higher the parameter isthe more easily handover to inter-frequency cellbut the system
processing resource will be a little increased.
Related Commands
AmntOfRpt2B.
and MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to modify AmntOfRpt2B.

This describes the neighboring cell offset for inter-frequency handovers.
ID
CIOOffset
Value Range
20 to 20
Physical Scope
Setting
2-36

RAN
the role of shifting the cell boarder in the handover algorithm.

l
The higher CIOOffset is, the easier it is for soft handovers to occur, and the more UEs
there are in the soft handover state, but the more forward resources are occupied.
The lower CIOOffset is, the more difficult it is for soft handovers to occur, which is likely
to affect the reception quality.
Related Commands
Use ADD INTERFREQNCELL to add, LST INTERFREQNCELL to query, and MOD
INTERFREQNCELL to modify CIOOffset.

ID
CIO
Value Range
20 to 20
Physical Scope
Setting
role of shifting the cell boarder in the handover algorithm.

l
The higher CIO is, the easier it is for soft handovers to occur, and the more UEs there are
in the soft handover state, but the more forward resources are occupied.
The lower CIO is, the more difficult it is for soft handovers to occur, which is likely to
affect the reception quality.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLSETUP to add and MOD CELLSETUP to modify CIO.

2-37
RAN
2.2.13 Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist Switch

This describes the inter-frequency and inter-RAT coexist switch. The switch indicates how to
perform neighboring cell measurement if a cell has both inter-frequency and inter-RAT
neighboring cells.
ID
InterFreqRATSwitch
Value Range
Enum(InterFreq, InterRAT, SimInterFreqRAT)
Physical Scope
l
Only the inter-frequency neighboring cells are measured.
Only the inter-RAT neighboring cells are measured.
Both the inter-frequency neighboring cells and the inter-RAT neighboring cells are
measured.
Setting
The default setting is InterFreq.
For a cell having both inter-frequency neighboring cells and inter-RAT neighboring cells, set
InterFreqRATSwitch based on the actual handover policy.
InterFreq means that only the inter-frequency cells are measured and the inter-frequency
handover is implemented. InterRAT means that only the GSM cells are measured and only the
inter-RAT handover is implemented. SimInterFreqRAT means that both the inter-frequency
cells and inter-RAT cells are measured and the handover mode depends on which cell meets the
handover decision condition.
InterFreqRATSwitch is invalid when only inter-frequency cells or inter-RAT cells are
available.

This parameter determines the cell handover policy when inter-frequency neighboring cells coexist with inter-RAT neighboring cells. Configure this parameter for each cell.
Related Commands
For the cell-oriented handover parameters, use ADD CELLHOCOMM to set, use MOD
CELLHOCOMM to modify, and use LST CELLHOCOMM to query
InterFreqRATSwitch.
2.2.14 Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist Measurement

Threshold Choice
This describes the inter-frequency and inter-RAT coexist measurement threshold switch. The
switch determines what configuration parameters for the 2D and 2F events should be chosen
2-38

RAN
based on measurement types when a cell has both inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighboring
cells.
ID
CoExistMeasThdChoice
Value Range
COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ,
COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERRAT
Physical Scope
COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ indicates that the 2D and 2F
measurement threshold parameters oriented to inter-frequency are chosen as thresholds for cell
subscribers to enable or disable the compress mode.
COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERRAT indicates that the 2D and 2F measurement
threshold parameters oriented to inter-RAT are chosen as thresholds for cell subscribers to enable
or disable the compress mode.
Setting
The default setting is COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ.
During the setting, take into account the following items: Thresholds for 2D and 2F events in
inter-frequency and inter-RAT systems, thresholds for the inter-frequency or inter-RAT
handover, and current handover policies. For instance, if the threshold for an inter-RAT 2D event
is higher than that for an inter-frequency 2D event, you can choose the inter-frequency
measurement threshold parameters to have the system be able to choose inter-frequency
neighboring cells when the inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighboring cells coexist.

CoExistMeasThdChoice is set on the basis of the actual network handover policy.
Related Commands
For the RNC-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters: use SET HOCOMM to
set and LST HOCOMM to query CoExistMeasThdChoice.
For the cell-oriented handover common parameters, use ADD CELLHOCOMM to set, MOD
CELLHOCOMM to modify, and LST CELLHOCOMM to query
CoExistMeasThdChoice.

condition.

2-39
RAN
ID
INTERFREQMEASTIME
Value Range
Integer (0...512)
Physical Scope
Integer (0...512) second(s)
Setting
The default value is 60, namely 60 s.
The system stops inter-frequency measurement and disables the enabled compression mode, if
no inter-frequency handover occurs upon expiration of the inter-frequency measurement timer.
For the coverage-based inter-frequency measurement, it can use 2F event report to disable
compression mode. But for the non-coverage inter-frequency measurement, it can disable
compressed mode only by measurement timer. So it is recommended not set the timer to 0.

This parameter is used to reduce the impact on serving cells by shortening the time for
compression mode.
If the compress mode is closed in advance, the UE cannot initiate an inter-frequency handover.
If the coverage-based inter-frequency handover is not triggered when the timer expires, the
compress mode will be closed and the call may drops.
Related Commands
and MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to modify INTERFREQMEASTIME.
For the non-coverage-based inter-frequency handover:
Use SET INTERFREQHONCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHONCOV to query
INTERFREQMEASTIME.
2.2.16 Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency Handover Priority

This parameters specifies the priority of coverage-based inter-frequency handover.
ID
HOCovPrio
Value Range
0 to 3.
2-40

RAN
Physical Scope
0 means not supporting coverage-based inter-frequency handover. 1 means the highest priority
of coverage-based inter-frequency handover. 3 means the lowest priority of coverage-based
inter-frequency handover.
Setting

None.
Related Commands
Use ADD INTERFREQNCELL to add andLST INTERFREQNCELL to
queryHOCovPrio.
2.3 Non Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency Handover

Management Parameters
The common configurable non-coverage-based inter-Frequency handover management
parameters are listed here.
Table 2-11 List of non-coverage-based inter-Frequency handover management parameters
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Defaul
t Value
Relevant
Command
Level
Hystfor2C
Hysteresis for the

2C event
RNC
TrigTime2C
Time-to-Trigger
for the 2C event
D640
(640
ms)
Set: SET
INTERFREQH
ONCOV
Query: LST
INTERFREQH
ONCOV
InterFreqNCovH
OThdEcN0
Inter-Frequency
Measure Target
Frequency Trigger
Ec/No Threshold
-16 dB
PeriodFor2C
Retry period of 2C
event
2s
AmntOfRpt2C
Maximum retry
times of 2C event
InterFreqMeasTi
me
Inter-Frequency
measurement timer
length
60 s

2-41
RAN
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Defaul
t Value
Relevant
Command
DlRscpQosHyst
Hysteresis of
downlink RSCP
QoS frequency
4 dB
DLQosMcTimer
Len
DownLink Qos
measurement timer
length
20 s
Set: SET
QOSHO
Query: LST
QOSHO
ULQosMcTimer
Len
UpLink Qos
measurement timer
length
20 s
Level
2.3.1 Hysteresis of Event 2C

This describes the trigger hysteresis of the 2C event in inter-Frequency handovers that are not
based on coverage.
2.3.2 Time to Trigger for Event 2C
This describes the time to trigger the 2C event in inter-Frequency handovers that are not based
on coverage.
2.3.3 Inter-Frequency Measure Target Frequency Trigger Ec/No Threshold
This parameter specifies the threshold of Ec/No value on the target frequency for inter-frequency
handover.
2.3.4 Retry Period of 2C Event
This parameter specifies the 2C event retry period.
2.3.5 Maximum Retry Times of 2C Event
This parameter specifies the 2C event maximum retry times.
condition.
2.3.7 Hysteresis of Downlink RSCP QoS Frequency
This parameter is used in both inter-rat handover and inter-frequency handover.
2.3.8 DownLink Qos Measurement Timer Length
2.3.9 UpLink Qos Measurement Timer Length

This describes the trigger hysteresis of the 2C event in inter-Frequency handovers that are not
based on coverage.
2-42

RAN
ID
Hystfor2C
Value Range
0 to 29
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value is 6, namely 3 dB.
The event 2C is applied to non-coverage-based inter-frequency hard handover scenarios where
inter-frequency measurement needs to be started.

The value is related to the slow fading feature. The higher the parameter is, the less the pingpong effect and the fewer the decision mistakes. In this case, however, the event 2C might not
be triggered in time.
Related Commands
Hystfor2C.

This describes the time to trigger the 2C event in inter-Frequency handovers that are not based
on coverage.
ID
TrigTime2C
Value Range
D2560, D5000)
Physical Scope
Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000) ms
Setting

2-43
RAN

The value is related to the slow fading feature. The higher the parameter is, the fewer the decision
mistakes. In this case, however, the event 2C might not be triggered in time.
Related Commands
TrigTime2C.
2.3.3 Inter-Frequency Measure Target Frequency Trigger Ec/No

Threshold
This parameter specifies the threshold of Ec/No value on the target frequency for inter-frequency
handover.
Parameter ID
InterFreqNCovHOThdEcN0
Value Range
-24 to 0

-24 dB to 0 dB
Parameter Setting
The default values is -16, namely -16 dB.

The greater the parameters are, the more difficult hard handover occurs.
Relevant Commands
InterFreqNCovHOThdEcN0.

ID
PeriodFor2C
Value Range
1 to 64
2-44

RAN
Physical Scope
Setting

The lower the parameter isthe more easily handover to inter-frequency cellbut the system
processing resource will be increased.
Related Commands
PeriodFor2C.

ID
AmntOfRpt2C
Value Range
0 to 63
Physical Scope
Setting

The higher the parameter isthe more easily handover to inter-frequency cellbut the system
processing resource will be increased.
Related Commands
AmntOfRpt2C.


2-45
RAN
condition.
ID
INTERFREQMEASTIME
Value Range
Integer (0...512)
Physical Scope
Integer (0...512) second(s)
Setting
The system stops inter-frequency measurement and disables the enabled compression mode, if
no inter-frequency handover occurs upon expiration of the inter-frequency measurement timer.
For the coverage-based inter-frequency measurement, it can use 2F event report to disable
compression mode. But for the non-coverage inter-frequency measurement, it can disable
compressed mode only by measurement timer. So it is recommended not set the timer to 0.

compression mode.
If the compress mode is closed in advance, the UE cannot initiate an inter-frequency handover.
If the coverage-based inter-frequency handover is not triggered when the timer expires, the
compress mode will be closed and the call may drops.
Related Commands
and MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to modify INTERFREQMEASTIME.
For the non-coverage-based inter-frequency handover:
INTERFREQMEASTIME.

ID
DlRscpQosHyst
2-46

RAN
Value Range
-15 to 15
Physical Scope
-15 dB to 15 dB.
Setting
In event-trigger mode, the frequency threshold for the inter-frequency, inter-rat measurement
triggered due to downlink QoS causes, and RSCP measurement quantity adopts the frequency
threshold of coverage measurement configured on the daemon minus this parameter.

The greater the delay, the more likely to trigger the 2B/3A eventmore easily handover to the
target cell.
Related Commands
Use SET QOSHO to set and LST QOSHO to query DlRscpQosHyst.

ID
DLQosMcTimerLen
Value Range
0 to 512
Physical Scope
0 s to 512 s.
Setting
After DownLink Qos measurement starts, if no handover is performed, when this timer expires,
the Qos measurement is stopped.
If there is no coverage-based measurement on, the inter-frequency or inter-system measurement
is stopped. In addition, the compressed mode is deactivated, if any. The value 0 indicates the
timer is not to be enabled.

2-47
RAN

compression mode.
If the compress mode is closed in advance, the UE cannot initiate an inter-frequency handover,
that may lead to call drops.
Related Commands
Use SET QOSHO to set and LST QOSHO to query DLQosMcTimerLen.

ID
ULQosMcTimerLen
Value Range
0 to 512
Physical Scope
0 s to 512 s.
Setting
After UpLink Qos measurement starts, if no handover is performed, when this timer expires, the
Qos measurement is stopped.

compression mode.
Related Commands
Use SET QOSHO to set and LST QOSHO to query ULQosMcTimerLen.
2-48

RAN
2.4 Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management

Parameters
This describes the coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters.
Table 2-12 List of coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters
S ID
e
ri
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configuration
MML Command
Lev
el
InterRATRe
portMode
Inter-RAT
measurement
report mode
Periodical_reporting
RN
C/
Cell
InterPeriodR
eportInterval
Inter-RAT
period report
interval
D1000 (1000 ms)
BSICVerify
BSIC verify
selection
switch
Require
MEASQUA
NTITYOF3
A
Inter-RAT
measurement
quantity
MEASQUANTITYOF3
A: AUTO
InterRATCS
Thd2DRSC
P
RSCP-Based
inter-RAT
measurement
start/stop
thresholds
InterRATCSThd2DRSC
P: 100 (dBm)
For the RNC

Set or modify: SET
INTERRATHOC
OV
Query: LST
INTERRATHOC
OV
For the cell
Set: ADD
CELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
Query: LST
CELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
Modify: MOD
CELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
InterRATR9
9PSThd2DR
SCP
InterRATH
Thd2DRSC
P
InterRATCS
Thd2FRSCP
InterRATR9
9PSThd2FR
SCP
InterRATR99PSThd2D
RSCP and
InterRATHThd2DRSC
P: 110 (dBm)
InterRATCSThd2FRSC
P: 97 (dBm)
InterRATR99PSThd2F
RSCP and
InterRATHThd2FRSCP
: 107 (dBm)
InterRATH
Thd2FRSCP

2-49
RAN
S ID
e
ri
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configuration
Ec/No-based
inter-RAT
measurement
start/stop
thresholds
INTERRATCSTHD2D
ECN0: 14 (dB)
INTERRAT
CSTHD2DE
CN0
InterRATR9
9PSThd2DE
cN0
Lev
el
InterRATR99PSThd2D
EcN0 and
InterRATHThd2DEcN
O: 15 (dB)
InterRATH
Thd2DEcN0
INTERRATCSTHD2F
ECN0: 12 (dB)
INTERRAT
CSTHD2FE
CN0
InterRATR99PSThd2F
EcN0 and
InterRATHThd2FEcNO
: 13 (dB)
InterRATR9
9PSThd2FE
cN0
MML Command
InterRATH
Thd2FEcNO
7
InterRATCo
vHOCSThd
TARGETR
ATR99PST
HD
Inter-RAT
handover
decision
thresholds
16, namely 95 dBm
Time-toTrigger
related to
inter-RAT
handover
event
TRIGTIME2D: D320
Hysteresis
related to
inter-RAT
handover
2D/2F/3A: 4 (2 dB)
TARGETR
ATHTHD
8
TrigTime2D
TrigTime2F
TrigTime3A
Hystfor3A
Hystfor2D
Hystfor2F
TRIGTIME2F: D1280
TRIGTIME3A: D0
HystforInterRAT: 0 (0
dB)
HystforInter
RAT
2-50

RAN
S ID
e
ri
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configuration
1
0
TimeToTrig
ForVerify
Time-toTrigger for
verified GSM
cells
0 ms, namely that the

handover is
implemented
immediately
1
1
TimeToTrig
ForNonVeri
fy
Time-toTrigger for
non-verified
GSM cells
0 ms
1
2
UsedFreqCs
ThdEcN0
Inter-RAT CS
Used
frequency
trigger Ec/No
THD
UsedFreqCsThdEcN0:
12 (dB)
UsedFreqR9
9PsThdEcN
0
UsedFreqH
ThdEcN0
USEDFREQ
CSTHDRSC
P
UsedFreqR9
9PsThdRSC
P
UsedFreqH
ThdRSCP
Inter-RAT
R99 PS Used
frequency
trigger Ec/No
THD
Inter-RAT H
Used
frequency
trigger Ec/No
THD
MML Command
Lev
el
UsedFreqR99PsThdEc
N0 and
UsedFreqHThdEcN0:
13 (dB)
USEDFREQCSTHDRS
CP: 97 (dBm)
UsedFreqR99PsThdRS
CP and
UsedFreqHThdRSCP:
107 (dBm)
Inter-RAT CS
Used
frequency
trigger RSCP
THD
Inter-RAT
R99 PS Used
frequency
trigger RSCP
THD
Inter-RAT H
Used
frequency
trigger RSCP
THD

2-51
RAN
S ID
e
ri
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configuration
1
3
InterRATM
easTime
Time length of
the inter-RAT
measurement
timer
60 s
1
4
PeriodFor3
A
Retry period
of 3A event
1, namely 500 ms
1
5
AmntOfRpt
3A
Maximum
retry times of
3A event
63, namely Infinity
1
6
CIOOffset
Neighboring
cell individual
offset
0 dB
MML Command
Lev
el
Set: ADD
GSMNCELL
NCe
ll
Query: LST
GSMNCELL
Modify: MOD
GSMNCELL
1
7
CIO
Cell
individual
offset
0 dB
Set: ADD
GSMCELL
Cell
Query: LST
GSMCELL
Modify: MOD
GSMCELL
2.4.1 Inter-RAT Measurement Report Mode

This describes the inter-RAT measurement report mode: the periodical report more or the event
trigger mode.
2.4.2 Inter-RAT Periodical Report Interval
This describes the measurement report interval when the periodical reporting mode is selected
for the inter-RAT measurement.
2.4.3 BSIC Verify Selection Switch
This describes the BSIC verify selection switch. The parameter is used to control the inter-RAT
measurement report. If it is set to Require, report is allowed only after the measured GSM cell
identity code (BSIC) is correctly decoded. If it is set to Not_Require, all the measured cells can
be reported so long as the report conditions are available, no matter whether their BSICs are
correctly decoded or not.
2.4.4 Event 3A Measurement Quantity
Parameter MEASQUANTITYOF3A is used to configure event 3A measurement quantity for
inter-RAT measurement, including EcNo and RSCP.
2-52

RAN
2.4.5 RSCP-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds

This set of parameters correspond to the absolute thresholds of the inter-RAT measurement
events when RSCP is used for measurement.
2.4.6 Ec/No-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds
This set of parameters correspond to the absolute thresholds of the inter-RAT measurement event
when Ec/No is used for measurement.
2.4.7 Inter-RAT Handover Judging Thresholds
Inter-RAT handover judging thresholds involve the inter-RAT CS service handover judging
threshold TARGETRATCSTHD and the inter-RAT PS service handover judging threshold
TARGETRATR99PSTHD, TARGETRATHTHD.
2.4.8 Time to Trigger Related to Inter-RAT Handover
This describes the time to trigger related to inter-RAT handovers. In coverage-oriented interRAT handovers, the time-to-trigger parameters include time-to-trigger for 2D (TrigTime2D),
time-to-trigger for 2F (TrigTime2F) and time-to-trigger for 3A (TrigTime3A).
2.4.9 Hysteresis Related to the Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover
This describes the trigger hystereses for the 3A, 2D, 2F events, and inter-RAT handovers.
2.4.10 Time to Trigger for Verified GSM Cells
This describes the delay trigger time of the GSM cells of which the BSIC is already verified
when the periodical report mode is used for the inter-RAT measurement. If the signal quality of
a GSM neighboring cell always satisfies the conditions for the inter-RAT handover decision and
is in the verified state in the time length stipulated by this parameter value, the system starts the
inter-RAT handover to the GSM neighboring cell.
2.4.11 Time to Trigger for Non-Verified GSM Cells
This describes the delay trigger time of the GSM cell of which the BSIC is not verified when
the periodical report mode is used for the inter-RAT measurement. If the signal quality of a GSM
neighboring cell always satisfies the conditions for the inter-RAT handover decision and is in
the non-verified state in the time length specified by this parameter, the system starts the interRAT handover to the GSM neighboring cell.
2.4.12 Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of Inter-RAT Handover
This parameter is used for measurement control of event 3A when the event reporting mode is
adopted for the inter-RAT measurement. Only when the quality of used frequency is poorer than
this threshold, one of the mandatory conditions for triggering event 3A is satisfied.
2.4.13 Inter-RAT Measurement Timer Length
This describes the effective time length of the inter-RAT measurement. If no proper inter-RAT
cell is found (for example no 3A event report is received or no periodic report meets the trigger
conditions of inter-RAT handovers) till the timer expires, the system will stop the inter-RAT
measurement, disables the compressed mode, and waits for the triggering of another inter-RAT
measurement.
2.4.14 Retry Period of 3A Event
This parameter specifies the 3A event retry period.
2.4.15 Maximum Retry Times of 3A Event
This parameter specifies the 3A event maximum retry times.
This describes the neighboring cell individual offset for inter-RAT handovers.
This describes the cell individual offset for inter-RAT handovers.

2-53
RAN
2.4.1 Inter-RAT Measurement Report Mode

This describes the inter-RAT measurement report mode: the periodical report more or the event
trigger mode.
ID
InterRATReportMode
Value Range
Enum (Periodical_reporting, Event_trigger)
Physical Scope
Periodical_reporting indicates that the periodical reporting mode is used.
Event_trigger indicates that the event triggering mode is used.
Setting
The default value is Periodical_reporting.
There are two optional inter-RAT handover report modes in the RNC: event report and periodical
report, which are selected through the switch of inter-RAT measurement report mode.
l
Event report:
To prevent ping-pong effect before and after inter-RAT handover, event 3A (the current
used frequency quality is lower than the absolute threshold, and the GSM cell level is higher
than the other absolute threshold) is used as the trigger event for the decision on the
origination of inter-RAT handovers. To improve the handover success rate, the BSIC of
the GSM cell where the 3A event is triggered must be decoded correctly by the UE. As the
3A event has no event transfer period, the function of retrying after handover failures is
not implemented, unless this cell can trigger 3A events again.
Advantage: The event report can save signaling transmission resources and reduce
processing load. In event report mode, the signal quality of the current frequency and the
signal quality of frequencies of other systems can be compared to avoid ping-pong
handovers in a degree.
Disadvantage: The event report can be reported only once, because no event transfer period
mechanism is available. If a handover fails, the periodical retry can be triggered only by
an internal timer. If the algorithm parameters are oriented to the cell level, the interfrequency measurement parameters need to be updated every time after the optimal cell is
updated.
Periodical report:
When the quality of the GSM cell reported by UE is satisfied the requirement to trigger the
inter-RAT handover, it starts the delay trigger timer. If the quality of the GSM cell satisfies
the requirement throughout the duration of the timer, the system starts the inter-RAT
handover after the time-out.
If the handover fails, the system implements the handover again according to the periodical
report of inter-RAT measurement.
Advantage: After a handover fails, the system can use the periodical reports to implement
the handover for many times for a cell. The algorithm of the periodical report can be flexibly
2-54

RAN
extended. Parameters of the periodical reports are oriented to cells, so the RNC updates the
parameters when implementing internal handover decision and the system needs not to use
signaling messages to inform UEs of the parameter change after handovers occur.
Disadvantage: A large amount of signaling is needed. The air-interface load and signaling
processing load increases.

The periodical report and event report have both advantages and disadvantages. Currently, the
periodical report mode is most commonly used.
Related Commands
For the RNC-oriented inter-RAT handover algorithm parameters:
Use SET INTERRATHOCOV to set and LST INTERRATHOCOV to query the inter-RAT
measurement report mode.
For the cell-oriented inter-RAT handover algorithm parameters:
Use ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV to query, and
MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to modify the inter-RAT measurement report mode.
2.4.2 Inter-RAT Periodical Report Interval

This describes the measurement report interval when the periodical reporting mode is selected
for the inter-RAT measurement.
ID
InterPeriodReportInterval
Value Range
Enum (NON_PERIODIC_REPORT, D250, D500, D1000, D2000, D3000, D4000, D6000,
D8000, D12000, D16000, D20000, D24000, D28000, D32000, D64000)
Physical Scope
Enum (NON_PERIODIC_REPORT, 250 ms, 500 ms, 1000 ms, 2000 ms, 3000 ms, 4000 ms,
6000 ms, 8000 ms, 12000 ms, 16000 ms, 20000 ms, 24000 ms, 28000 ms, 32000 ms, 64000 ms)
Setting
The default value is D1000, namely 1 s.
Because the GSM RSSI measurement period is 480 ms, the inter-RAT periodical report interval
shall be longer than 480 ms. If InterPeriodReportInterval is excessively high, the handover
judging time shall be long, and handovers will become slower.
InterPeriodReportInterval is adjusted according to the configured GSM RSSI measurement
compressed mode sequence. According to the current configured GSM RSSI measurement
compressed mode sequence, the RSSI measurement of eight GSM cells can be finished in 480
ms, so the RSSI measurement of 16 GSM cells can be finished in 1000 ms. According to the

2-55
RAN
protocol, there should be not more than 32 inter-RAT neighboring cells, so the
InterPeriodReportInterval can be set to 2000 ms if there are more than 16 neighboring GSM
cells.

The higher InterPeriodReportInterval is, the fewer measurement reports are sent; but the
increase of InterPeriodReportInterval will increase the risk of call drop.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERRATHOCOV to set and LST INTERRATHOCOV to query
InterPeriodReportInterval.
For the cell-oriented inter-RAT handover algorithm parameter:
MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to modify InterPeriodReportInterval.

This describes the BSIC verify selection switch. The parameter is used to control the inter-RAT
measurement report. If it is set to Require, report is allowed only after the measured GSM cell
identity code (BSIC) is correctly decoded. If it is set to Not_Require, all the measured cells can
be reported so long as the report conditions are available, no matter whether their BSICs are
correctly decoded or not.
ID
BSICVerify
Value Range
Enum (REQUIRED, NOT_REQUIRE)
Physical Scope
Required, not required
Setting
The default value is REQUIRED.
BSICVerify is valid for both periodical report mode and event report mode. To ensure the
reliability of handovers, the system reports only the cells of which the BSIC is correctly decoded,
namely, the recommended value of BSICVerify is REQUIRED.

If BSICVerify is set to NOT_REQUIRE, handovers occur more easily. If BSICVerify is set
to REQUIRED, handovers occur with higher reliability.
2-56

RAN
Related Commands
Use SET INTERRATHOCOV to set and LST INTERRATHOCOV to query BSICVerify.
MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to modify BSICVerify.
2.4.4 Event 3A Measurement Quantity

Parameter MEASQUANTITYOF3A is used to configure event 3A measurement quantity for
inter-RAT measurement, including EcNo and RSCP.
ID
MEASQUANTITYOF3A
Value Range
MEASQUANTITYOF3A: Enum (CPICH_EcNo, CPICH_RSCP, AUTO)

None.
Parameter Setting
The default value for MEASQUANTITYOF3A is AUTO.
l
If select CPICH_Ec/No then use the Ec/No measurement quantity for event 3A
measurement. The physical unit is dB.
If select CPICH_RSCP then use the RSCP measurement quantity for event 3A
measurement. The physical unit is dBm.
If select AUTO then use the Ec/N0 measurement quantity for event 3A measurement if
RNC receives the Ec/No 2D firstly, or use the RSCP measurement quantity for event 3A
measurement if RNC receives the RSCP 2D firstly.

Set it based on the cell location in the network.
Relevant Commands
For parameters oriented to RNC inter-RAT handover algorithm: set them through SET
INTERRATHOCOV, and query them through LST INTERRATHOCOV.
For parameters oriented to cell inter-RAT handover algorithm: add them through ADD
CELLINTERRATHOCOV, query them through LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV, and
modify them through MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV.

2-57
RAN
2.4.5 RSCP-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds

This set of parameters correspond to the absolute thresholds of the inter-RAT measurement
events when RSCP is used for measurement.
Parameter ID
InterRATCSThd2DRSCP (Inter-RAT CS measure start RSCP THD)
INTERRATR99PSTHD2DRSCP (Inter-RAT R99 PS measure start RSCP THD)
INTERRATHTHD2DRSCP (Inter-RAT H measure start RSCP THD)
InterRATCSThd2FRSCP (Inter-RAT CS measure stop RSCP THD)
INTERRATR99PSTHD2FRSCP (Inter-RAT R99 PS measure stop RSCP THD)
INTERRATHTHD2FRSCP (Inter-RAT H measure stop RSCP THD)
Value Range
-115 to -25

-115 dBm to -25 dBm, step 1 dBm
Parameter Setting
The default values are as follows:
l
InterRatCSThd2DRSCP is -100 dBm;
InterRatCSThd2FRSCP is -97 dBm;
INTERRATR99PSTHD2DRSCP and INTERRATHTHD2DRSCP is -110 dBm;
INTERRATR99PSTHD2FRSCP and INTERRATHTHD2FRSCP is -107dBm.
Inter-Frequency Measurement. For multiRAB services, use the configuration of CS service
if there exits CS service.

Events 2D and 2F are the compressed mode start/stop switches. Because different service types
may have different requirements on the signal quality and different inter-RAT handover policies
to be adopted, the inter-RAT measurement start/stop thresholds are classified here according to
CS, PS.
Set the event 2D thresholds to a greater value if the compressed mode is expected to start as
early as possible; otherwise set it to a lower value. To reduce ping-pong start/stop of the
compressed mode, increase appropriately the difference between the 2D and 2F thresholds.
Relevant Commands
2-58

RAN
2.4.6 Ec/No-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds

This set of parameters correspond to the absolute thresholds of the inter-RAT measurement event
when Ec/No is used for measurement.
Parameter ID
INTERRATCSTHD2DECN0 (Inter-RAT CS measure start Ec/No THD)
InterRATR99PsThd2DEcN0 (Inter-RAT R99 PS measure start Ec/No THD)
InterRATHThd2DEcN0 (Inter-RAT H measure start Ec/No THD)
INTERRATCSTHD2FECN0 (Inter-RAT CS measure stop Ec/No THD)
InterRATR99PsThd2FEcN0 (Inter-RAT R99 PS measure stop Ec/No THD)
InterRATHThd2FEcN0 (Inter-RAT H measure stop Ec/No THD)
Value Range
-24 to 0

Parameter Setting
The default values are as follows:
l
INTERRATCSTHD2DECN0 is -14dB;
INTERRATCSTHD2FECN0 is -12dB;
InterRATR99PsThd2DEcN0 and InterRATHThd2DEcN0 is -15dB;
InterRATR99PsThd2FEcN0 and InterRATHThd2FEcN0 is -13dB.
Inter-Frequency Measurement. For multiRAB service, use the configuration of CS service if
there exists CS service.

Events 2D and 2F are the compressed mode start/stop switches. Because different service types
may require different signal qualities and different inter-RAT handover policies, the inter-RAT
measurement start/stop thresholds are classified here according to CS, PS and signaling.
Set the event 2D threshold to a greater value if the compressed mode is expected to start as early
as possible; otherwise set it to a lower value. To eliminate ping-pong start/stop of the compressed
mode, increase appropriately the difference between the 2D and 2F thresholds.

2-59
RAN
Relevant Commands
For parameter oriented to cell inter-RAT handover algorithm: add them through ADD
2.4.7 Inter-RAT Handover Judging Thresholds

Inter-RAT handover judging thresholds involve the inter-RAT CS service handover judging
threshold TARGETRATCSTHD and the inter-RAT PS service handover judging threshold
TARGETRATR99PSTHD, TARGETRATHTHD.
Parameter ID
TARGETRATCSTHD
TARGETRATR99PSTHD
TARGETRATHTHD
Value Range
0 to 63

-110 dBmto -48 dBm
(0 corresponds to the value lower than -110 dBm; 1 corresponds to -110 dBm; 2 corresponds to
-109 dBm; ...; 63 corresponds to -48 dBm)
Parameter Setting
The default values are 16, namely, -95 dBm.
This set of parameters are used for inter-RAT coverage handover evaluation at the RNC side,
that is, Tother_RATin the formula introduced below. It is the absolute threshold of inter-RAT cell
quality (RSSI) at the time of inter-RAT handover judging.
If the inter-RATquality in the inter-RAT measurement report obtained at a moment satisfies the
following condition:
Mother_RAT + CIO Tother_RAT + H/2
Then start the delay trigger timer Trigger-Timer, and handover judgment is made after the timer
expires. If the inter-RAT quality satisfies the following condition before the timer gets expired:
Mother_RAT + CIO < Tother_RAT - H/2
Then the timer stops timing, and the RNC goes on waiting for receiving of the inter-RAT
measurement report.
2-60

RAN

Configure these parameters differently according to different policies. If the MS can be handed
over only after the GSM cell quality is good enough, this parameter can be increased properly,
-85 dBm for example.
Relevant Commands
For parameter oriented to cell inter-RAT handover algorithm: add them through ADD
2.4.8 Time to Trigger Related to Inter-RAT Handover

This describes the time to trigger related to inter-RAT handovers. In coverage-oriented interRAT handovers, the time-to-trigger parameters include time-to-trigger for 2D (TrigTime2D),
time-to-trigger for 2F (TrigTime2F) and time-to-trigger for 3A (TrigTime3A).
ID
TrigTime2D
TrigTime2F
TrigTime3A
Value Range
D2560, D5000)
Physical Scope
Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000) ms
Setting
The default values of TrigTime3A, TrigTime2D, and TrigTime2F are D0, D320, and
D1280 respectively.
The previous simulation results show that the hysteresis can effectively reduce the average
number of handovers and mis-decisions and avoid unnecessary handovers. UEs with different
moving speeds vary in their responses to the event delay trigger value. UEs moving in a high
speed are sensitive to the time-to-trigger value, while UEs moving in a slow speed are slow to
the time-to-trigger value and cause fewer ping-pong handovers and wrong handovers. Therefore,
the time-to-trigger value can be set to a comparatively high value for the cells where most UEs
move in a high speed and can be set to a comparatively low value for the cells where most UEs
move in a low speed. The time-to-trigger parameters need to be adjusted based on the actual
network statistics.
Table 2-13 lists the value ranges and recommended values of time-to-trigger parameters related
to inter-RAT handovers.

2-61
RAN
Table 2-13 List of time-to-trigger parameters related to inter-RAT hard handovers

Speed (km/h)
Range (ms)
640 to 1280
1280
50
240 to 640
640
120
240 to 640
640
640 to 1280
640

The higher the time-to-trigger values are, the lower the average handover frequency is; but the
increase of the time-to-trigger setting increases the risk of call drop.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERRATHOCOV to set and LST INTERRATHOCOV to query the time-totrigger values related to inter-RAT handovers.
MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to modify the time-to-trigger values related to inter-RAT
handovers.
2.4.9 Hysteresis Related to the Coverage-Based Inter-RAT

Handover
This describes the trigger hystereses for the 3A, 2D, 2F events, and inter-RAT handovers.
ID
Hystfor3A
Hystfor2D
Hystfor2F
HystforInterRAT
Value Range
Hystfor2D and Hystfor2F: 0 to 29
Hystfor3A and HystforInterRAT: 0 to 15
Physical Scope
Hystfor2D and Hystfor2F: 0 dB to 14.5 dB, with the step of 0.5 dB
2-62

RAN
Hystfor3A and HystforInterRAT: 0 dB to 7.5 dB, with the step of 0.5 dB
Setting
l
The default values of Hystfor3A, Hystfor2D, and Hystfor2F are 4, namely 2 dB.
The default value of HystforInterRAT is 0, namely 0 dB.
HystforInterRAT aims to prevent the mis-decision caused by unexpected jitters of signals

during inter-RAT handover decisions. HystforInterRAT and the inter-RAT handover decision
threshold determine whether to trigger inter-RAT handovers.
The simulation result shows that in a cell where the average moving speed of UEs is high, for
example a cell that covers highways, HystforInterRAT can be set to 1.5, because in the cell
the hypsography is flat and there are few barriers, which causes a small shadow fading variation.
In a cell where the average moving speed of UEs is low, there are usually many tall buildings,
so the shadow fading variation is comparatively big, and HystforInterRAT can be set to 3.0.
The settings of the hystereses related to coverage-based inter-RAT handover are similar to that
of the hestereses related to coverage-based inter-frequency handover. For details, refer to 2.2.3
Hysteresis Related to Inter-Frequency Handover.

The higher the hysteresis is, the stronger the signal fluctuation resistance capability is, the more
ping-pong effect is suppressed, and the more slowly the handover algorithm responds to signal
changes. If the inter-RAT handover hysteresis is set to an excessively high value, the GSM cell
to which the UE hands over must have a good quality. Therefore, the conditions for triggering
the inter-RAT handover decision are hard to be satisfied, and the call drop rate increases.
Related Commands
For the RNC-oriented inter-RAT handover algorithm parameters: use SET
INTERRATHOCOV to set and LST INTERRATHOCOV to query the inter-RAT handover
hysteresis.
For the cell-oriented inter-RAT handover algorithm parameters: use ADD
CELLINTERRATHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV to query, and MOD
CELLINTERRATHOCOV to modify the inter-RAT handover hysteresis.
2.4.10 Time to Trigger for Verified GSM Cells

This describes the delay trigger time of the GSM cells of which the BSIC is already verified
when the periodical report mode is used for the inter-RAT measurement. If the signal quality of
a GSM neighboring cell always satisfies the conditions for the inter-RAT handover decision and
is in the verified state in the time length stipulated by this parameter value, the system starts the
inter-RAT handover to the GSM neighboring cell.
ID
TimeToTrigForVerify
Value Range
0 to 64000

2-63
RAN
Physical Scope
0 ms to 64000 ms
Setting
The default value is 0, namely that the handover is implemented immediately.
As described in the section about the inter-RAT handover decision threshold, the trigger
condition for inter-RAT handover decision is as follows:
Mother_RAT + CIO Tother_RAT + H/2
If the quality of the GSM neighboring cell meets the preceding condition, the system starts the
trigger timer. The system then implements the handover decision after timeout if the quality of
the GSM neighboring cell always meets the preceding condition throughout the time length of
the timer. The time length of the trigger timer is called the delay trigger time.
The delay trigger time and hysteresis are used to prevent mis-decisions caused by signal jitters
during inter-RAT handover decisions.
Considering that the UE is on the edge of the system, TimeToTrigForVerify should be set to
a comparatively low value. Because the GSM cells of which the BSIC is already verified usually
have good performance, TimeToTrigForVerify should be set to 0, namely that the handover
is implemented immediately.

The higher the time-to-trigger parameters are, the smaller the average number of handovers is,
and the possibility of call drops increases.
Related Commands
TimeToTrigForVerify.
MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to modify TimeToTrigForVerify.
2.4.11 Time to Trigger for Non-Verified GSM Cells

This describes the delay trigger time of the GSM cell of which the BSIC is not verified when
the periodical report mode is used for the inter-RAT measurement. If the signal quality of a GSM
neighboring cell always satisfies the conditions for the inter-RAT handover decision and is in
the non-verified state in the time length specified by this parameter, the system starts the interRAT handover to the GSM neighboring cell.
ID
TimeToTrigForNonVerify
2-64

RAN
Value Range
0 to 64000, 65535
Physical Scope
The physical scope of TimeToTrigForNonVerify is 0 ms to 64000 ms or 65535 ms. If
TimeToTrigForNonVerify is set to 65535, the RNC does not allow handovers to the GSM
cells that are not verified.
Setting
The default value of TimeToTrigForNonVerify is 0, namely that the handovers to the nonverified GSM cells are not allowed.

Related Commands
TimeToTrigForVerify.
MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to modify TimeToTrigForVerify.
2.4.12 Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of Inter-RAT

Handover
This parameter is used for measurement control of event 3A when the event reporting mode is
adopted for the inter-RAT measurement. Only when the quality of used frequency is poorer than
this threshold, one of the mandatory conditions for triggering event 3A is satisfied.
Parameter ID
Based on different inter-RAT measurement quantities in use and different borne services, this
parameter can be categorized as follows:
l
USEDFREQCSTHDECN0 (Inter-RAT CS Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD)
USEDFREQR99PSTHDECN0 (Inter-RAT R99 PS Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD)
USEDFREQHTHDECN0 (Inter-RAT H Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD)
USEDFREQCSTHDRSCP (Inter-RAT CS Used frequency trigger RSCP THD)
USEDFREQR99PSTHDRSCP (Inter-RAT R99 PS Used frequency trigger RSCP THD)
USEDFREQHTHDRSCP (Inter-RAT R99 PS Used frequency trigger RSCP THD)

2-65
RAN
Value Range
-24 to 0
-115 to -25

-24 dB to 0 dB
-115 dBm to -25 dBm
Parameter Setting
The default values for each parameter are as follows:
l
USEDFREQCSTHDECN0: -12 dB
USEDFREQR99PSTHDECN0: -13 dB
USEDFREQHTHDECN0: -13 dB
USEDFREQCSTHDRSCP: -97 dB
USEDFREQR99PSTHDRSCP: -107 dB
USEDFREQHTHDRSCP: -107 dB
Factors to be considered while setting these parameters:

Only when the quality of the current used frequency satisfies QUsed TUsed - H3a/2 and the
quality of target frequency satisfies Mother_RAT + CIO Tother_RAT + H/2, delay the time for
triggering the timer when the event reporting mode is adopted for inter-RAT measurement. A
3A event is report upon expiry of the timer.
where,
l
QUsed: estimated quality of the UTRAN frequency currently used.
Tused: indicates the quality threshold for the inter-RAT frequency currently used.
Mother_RAT: indicates the inter-RAT (GSM RSSI) measurement results.
Tother_RAT: indicates the threshold for judging the inter-RAT handover.
Cell individual offset (CIO): indicates the offset set by inter-RAT cells.
H: indicates the hysteresis. The setting on the hysteresis reduces incorrect judgement caused
by jitter signals.
When the cell signal quality of current frequency is poor and is lower than the threshold defined
by this parameter, infer that the current frequency cannot better satisfy the coverage requirement
of current service. The event 2F indicates that the current frequency quality is restored.
Therefore, this parameter should be set less than the trigger threshold of event 2F or equal to the
threshold of event 2D.
For composite services, use the parameters configured for CS services.
2-66

RAN

Higher values of these parameters get event 3A to be more easily triggered. When the value of
this parameter is too high, the UE may perform handover even when the signal quality is good
in current system.
Relevant Commands
Parameter oriented to RNC inter-RAT handover algorithm: set it through SET
INTERRATHOCOV and query it through LST INTERRATHOCOV.
Parameter oriented to the cell inter-RAT handover algorithm, add it through ADD
CELLINTERRATHOCOV, query it through LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV, and modify
it through MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV.

cell is found (for example no 3A event report is received or no periodic report meets the trigger
conditions of inter-RAT handovers) till the timer expires, the system will stop the inter-RAT
measurement, disables the compressed mode, and waits for the triggering of another inter-RAT
measurement.
ID
InterRATMeasTime
Value Range
0 to 512
Physical Scope
0 means that the system does not start the inter-RAT measurement timer.
1 to 512 means 1 s to 512 s.
Setting
The default value is 60, namely 60 s. When setting the thresholds, consider the following factors:
InterRATMeasTime aims to prevent that the handover conditions are not available and the
compressed mode is kept for a long time when the UE does not move or is moving in a low
speed. The service quality is adversely affected and the total available capacity decreases if the
compressed mode is kept for a long time.
Most inter-RAT handovers can be finished in 60 s.

l
If InterRATMeasTime is excessively low, the UE cannot finish inter-RAT handovers.
If InterRATMeasTime is excessively high, it cannot help improve the service quality.
For the acutal network, statistics can be made to obtain the delay for a successful inter-RAT
handover to get a proper value of InterRATMeasTime that satisfies most UEs.

2-67
RAN
Related Commands
For the RNC-oriented inter-RAT handover algorithm parameter:
Use SET INTERRATHOCOV to set and use LST INTERRATHOCOV to query
InterRATMeasTime.
Use ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to add, use LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV to query,
and use MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to modify InterRATMeasTime.
2.4.14 Retry Period of 3A Event

This parameter specifies the 3A event retry period.
ID
PeriodFor3A
Value Range
1 to 64
Physical Scope
If the RNC fails to handover to all the target cells of the 3A event, the RNC periodically retries
to launch handover to the target cells failed by load cause.
Setting

The lower the parameter isthe more easily handover to GSM cellbut the processing resource
of WCDMA cell will be increased.
Related Commands
2.4.15 Maximum Retry Times of 3A Event

This parameter specifies the 3A event maximum retry times.
2-68

RAN
ID
AmntOfRpt3A
Value Range
0 to 63
Physical Scope
Setting
If the RNC fails to handover to all the target cells of the 3A event, the RNC periodically retries
to launch handover to the target cells failed by load cause for the 3A event maximum retry times.
If the handover succeeds or the new 3A event report is received, the periodically retry process
is stopped.

The higher the parameter isthe more easily handover to GSM cellbut the processing resource
Related Commands

This describes the neighboring cell individual offset for inter-RAT handovers.
ID
CIOOffset
Value Range
50 to 50
Physical Scope
50 dB to 50 dB
Setting

2-69
RAN
the role of shifting the cell boarder in the handover algorithm..

The higher the sum is, the more easily inter-RAT handovers occur.
Related Commands
Use ADD GSMNCELL to set, LST GSMNCELL to query, and MOD GSMNCELL to modify
CIOOffset.

This describes the cell individual offset for inter-RAT handovers.
ID
CIO
Value Range
50 to 50
Physical Scope
50 dB to 50 dB
Setting
role of shifting the cell boarder in the handover algorithm..

The higher the sum is, the more easily inter-RAT handovers occur.
Related Commands
CIO.
2.5 Non Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management

Parameters
The common configurable non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters
are listed here.
2-70

RAN
Table 2-14 List of non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters

No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Defaul
t Value
Relevant
Command
Level
CSServiceHOSw
itch
Inter-RAT service
handover switch
OFF
Set: ADD
CELLHOCOM
M
Cell
PSServiceHOSw
itch
Query: LST
CELLHOCOM
M
Modify: MOD
CELLHOCOM
M
Hystfor3C
Hysteresis of event
3C
0 dB
TrigTime3C
Time-to-Trigger
for event 3C
D640
(640
ms)
BSICVerify
BSIC verify
selection switch
Require
d
TARGETRATC
STHD
Non-CoverageBased inter-RAT
handover judging
thresholds
21, that
is, -90
dBm
InterRATNCovH
OPSThd
6
InterRATHOAtte
mpts
Inter-RAT
handover max
attempt times
16
times
InterRATMeasTi
me
Inter-RAT measure
timer length
60 s
SNDLDINFO2G
SMIND
Switch used to send

load information to
2G
ON
NCOVHOON2G
LDIND
Switch for noncoverage based

handover
according to 2G
load information.
ON
10
CSHOOUT2GL
OADTHD
2G load threshold
by inter-rat
handover in CSdomain
80 %

For RNC
Set or modify:
SET
INTERRATH
ONCOV
Query: LST
INTERRATH
ONCOV
For Cell
Set: ADD
CELLINTERR
ATHONCOV
Query: LST
CELLINTERR
ATHONCOV
Modify: MOD
CELLINTERR
ATHONCOV
RNC/
Cell
2-71
RAN
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Defaul
t Value
11
PSHOOut2Gload
Thd
2G load threshold
by inter-rat
handover in PSdomain
60 %
12
PeriodFor3C
Retry period of 3C
event
2000
ms
13
AmntOfRpt3C
Maximum retry
times of 3C event
14
UsedFreqMeasQ
uantityForQos3A
Measurement
quantity of 3A
frequency in QoS
handover
CPICH
_RSCP
15
DlRscpQosHyst
Frequency delay of
downlink RSCP
QoS
4 dB
16
DLQosMcTimer
Len
DownLink Qos
measurement timer
length
20 s
17
ULQosMcTimer
Len
UpLink Qos
measurement timer
length
20 s
Relevant
Command
Level
Set: SET
QOSHO
Query: LST
QOSHO
RNC
2.5.1 Inter-RAT Service Handover Switch

This describes the inter-RAT service handover switches. The parameters indicate whether the
cell allows the triggering of CS and PS service handovers.
This describes the trigger hysteresis of the 3C event in inter-RAT handovers that are not based
on coverage.
This describes the time to trigger the 3C event in inter-RAT handovers that are not based on
coverage.
This describes the BSIC verify selection switch, which is used to control the non-coverage-based
inter-RAT measurement report. If it is set to Require, the reporting is allowed only after the
measured GSM cell identity code (BSIC) is correctly decoded. If it is set to Not_Require, all
the measured cells can be reported so long as the report conditions are available, no matter
whether their BSICs are correctly decoded or not.
2.5.5 Non-Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Decision Thresholds
This describes the non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover decision thresholds:
InterRATNCovHOCSThd and InterRATNCovHOPSThd.
2.5.6 Maximum Number of Inter-RAT Handover Attempts
2-72

RAN
This describes the maximum number of non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover attempts.

cell is found, for example no 3C event report is received, till the timer expires, the system will
stop inter-RAT measurement, disables the compressed mode, and waits for the triggering of
another inter-RAT measurement.
2.5.8 Switch used to Send Load Information to 2G
This is a switch used to send load information to 2G, without direct impact on network
performance. When it is set to ON, the RNC sends UMTS cell load information to the GSM
during the non-coverage based system relocation in or out process. When it is set to OFF, the
RNC does not send UMTS cell load information to the GSM during the system relocation in or
out process.
2.5.9 Switch for Non-Coverage Based Handover according to 2G Load Information
This describes the switch for non-coverage based handover according to 2G load information.
When it is set to ON, the RNC stops the non-coverage based system relocation out process if
the GSM cell load exceeds the CS/PS dormain relocate GSM load Threshold.
2.5.10 2G Load Threshold by Inter-Rat Handover in CS-Domain
This parameter specifies the GSM load threshold by inter-RAT handover in CS-domain.
2.5.11 2G Load Threshold by Inter-RAT Handover in PS-domain
This parameter specifies the GSM load threshold by inter-RAT handover in PS-domain.
2.5.14 Measurement Quantity of 3A Frequency in QoS Handover
This parameter is used to configure the used frequency measurement quantity for the 3A event.
2.5.1 Inter-RAT Service Handover Switch

This describes the inter-RAT service handover switches. The parameters indicate whether the
cell allows the triggering of CS and PS service handovers.
ID
CSServiceHOSwitch
PSServiceHOSwitch
Value Range
Enum (ON, OFF)

2-73
RAN
Physical Scope
Open, close
Setting
The default value is OFF.
The service handover is configured refers to the service handover attribute of each service and
related parameters at network side. Once the service is set up, the related measurement is
immediately triggered and inter-RAT handover is performed.
The two switches need to be opened only when the service handover function is necessary. By
default, they are closed.

The inter-RAT service handover switches are set on the basis of the actual network handover
strategy.
Related Commands
For the cell-oriented handover parameters:
Use ADD CELLHOCOMM to set, MOD CELLHOCOMM to modify, and LST
CELLHOCOMM to query the inter-RAT service handover switches.

This describes the trigger hysteresis of the 3C event in inter-RAT handovers that are not based
on coverage.
ID
Hystfor3C
Value Range
0 to 15
Physical Scope
Setting
The 3C event means that the quality of a GSM cell is higher than an absolute threshold.
The 3C event is used for the inter-RAT load handovers and service handovers. When a GSM
cell satisfies the following condition, the system triggers the 3C event and records the GSM cell
in the 3C event trigger list. The 3C event is not repeatedly reported for the cells in the 3C event
trigger list.
2-74

RAN
MotherRAT + CIOotherRAT TotherRAT + H3C/2

(prescribed in the TS25.331 protocol)
Where,
l
H3C represents the hysteresis for the 3C event, namely Hystfor3C.
TotherRAT represents the threshold for triggering the reporting of the 3C event of inter-RAT
cells, namely InterRATNCovHOCSThd or InterRATNCovHOPSThd.
When a cell in the 3C event trigger list satisfies the following condition:
MotherRAT + CIOotherRAT TotherRAT - H3C/2
(prescribed in 3GPP TS25.331)
the cell is deleted from the 3C event trigger list.
The hysteresis aims to avoid mis-decisions that are caused by transient fluctuations of signals.
For details, refer to 2.2.3 Hysteresis Related to Inter-Frequency Handover.

The higher the hysteresis is, the stronger the signal fluctuation resistance capability is, and the
more ping-pong effect is suppressed. In this case, the handover algorithm responds to signal
changes more slowly. If Hystfor3C is set to an excessively high value, the GSM cell to which
the UE hands over must have a good quality. Therefore, the conditions for triggering the interRAT handover decision are hard to be satisfied, and the call drop rate increases.
Related Commands
For the RNC-oriented non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover algorithm parameters:
Use SET INTERRATHONCOV to set and LST INTERRATHONCOV to query
Hystfor3C.
For the cell-oriented non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover algorithm parameters:
Use ADD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHONCOV to query,
and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify Hystfor3C.

This describes the time to trigger the 3C event in inter-RAT handovers that are not based on
coverage.
ID
TrigTime3C
Value Range
D2560, D5000)

2-75
RAN
Physical Scope
Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000) ms
Setting
The delay trigger time aims to avoid the occasional triggering of excessive event reports for a
measurement result. Considering that the period of the physical layer of UE reporting to Layer
3 is 480 ms, TrigTime3C is set to 640, namely that the system reports the 3C event only when
at least two continuous measurement reports satisfy the condition for triggering the 3C event.
The value of TrigTime3C can be optimized based on the actual radio environment.

Related Commands
TrigTime3C.
and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify TrigTime3C.

This describes the BSIC verify selection switch, which is used to control the non-coverage-based
inter-RAT measurement report. If it is set to Require, the reporting is allowed only after the
measured GSM cell identity code (BSIC) is correctly decoded. If it is set to Not_Require, all
the measured cells can be reported so long as the report conditions are available, no matter
whether their BSICs are correctly decoded or not.
ID
BSICVerify
Value Range
REQUIRED, NOT_REQUIRE
Physical Scope
Required, not required
Setting
The default value is REQUIRED.
2-76

RAN
The non-coverage-based handovers require a lower timeliness but a higher handover success
rate of handovers, so the recommended value of BSICVerify is REQUIRED to ensure the
reliability of handovers.

If BSICVerify is set to NOT_REQUIRE, handovers occur more easily. If BSICVerify is set
to REQUIRED, handovers occur with higher reliability.
Related Commands
BSICVerify.
and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify BSICVerify.
2.5.5 Non-Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Decision

Thresholds
This describes the non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover decision thresholds:
ID
InterRATNCovHOCSThd
InterRATNCovHOPSThd
Value Range
0 to 63
Physical Scope
110 dBm to 48 dBm
(0 represents a value lower than 110 dBm; 1 represents 110 dBm; 2 represents 109 dBm; ...
63 represents 48 dBm.)
Setting
The default value is 21, namely 90 dBm.
For the decision formula, refer to 2.5.2 Hysteresis of Event 3C.
The thresholds for coverage-based handovers and non-coverage-based handovers are
distinguished to flexibly control handovers with different aims. The non-coverage-based
handovers do not require a high timeliness but require a high success rate and good link quality
before and after the handovers, so the non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover decision
threshold needs to be set to a high value.

2-77
RAN
For multi-RAB services, use the parameter configuration of CS service if CS services exist.

The values of inter-RAT handover decision thresholds vary according to the handover policy.
To have UEs hand over only to the GSM cells with high quality, you can set the inter-RAT
handover decision threshold to a comparatively high value, for example 85.
Related Commands
and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify InterRATNCovHOCSThd and
InterRATNCovHOPSThd.
2.5.6 Maximum Number of Inter-RAT Handover Attempts

This describes the maximum number of non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover attempts.
ID
InterRATHoAttempts
Value Range
1 to 16
Physical Scope
1 to 16 attempts
Setting
An inter-RAT handover involves many network nodes and is a complicated process, so the delay
of the inter-RAT handover is long and the failure rate is comparatively high. Too many handover
failures affect the call quality and increase the processing load of the network, so
InterRATHoAttempts can be set to a proper value to limit handover failures.
InterRATHoAttempts and InterRATMeasTime help reduce unnecessary inter-RAT
measurement (compressed mode) by limiting the number of handovers and time of inter-RAT
measurement respectively.
The number of inter-RAT handovers includes the number of attempts to hand over to the same
cell and the number of attempts to hand over to different cells. If the penalty is introduced to the
inter-RAT handovers, namely that the system prohibits handovers to the cells to which handovers
have failed for a period. The penalty does not prohibit the UE from hand over to other cells.
InterRATHoAttempts can be set to 16 at the test stage and set to 1 to 3 in the actual application.
2-78

RAN

l
The higher InterRATHoAttempts is, the higher the probability is for the UE performs
inter-RAT handovers.
The lower InterRATHoAttempts is, the smaller influence is on the network quality.
Unless in the test process, InterRATHoAttempts needs to be set to a comparatively low
value.
Related Commands
InterRATHoAttempts.
and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify InterRATHoAttempts.

cell is found, for example no 3C event report is received, till the timer expires, the system will
stop inter-RAT measurement, disables the compressed mode, and waits for the triggering of
another inter-RAT measurement.
ID
InterRATMeasTime
Value Range
0 to 512
Physical Scope
0 means that the system does not start the inter-RAT measurement timer. 1 to 512 means 1 s to
512 s.
Setting
InterRATMeasTime aims to prevent that the compressed mode is kept for a long time due to
the handover conditions are not available when the UE does not move or is moving in a low
speed. The service quality is adversely affected and the total available capacity decreases if the
compressed mode is kept for a long time.
Most inter-RAT handovers can be finished in 60 s.
The compressed mode of coverage-based inter-RAT measurement can be closed by the 2F event,
while the compressed mode of non-coverage-based inter-RAT measurement cannot be closed
by the 2F event but by the measurement timer. Therefore, do not set the timer of the noncoverage-based inter-RAT measurement to 0 if possible.

2-79
RAN

l
If InterRATMeasTime is excessively low, the UE cannot implement inter-RAT

handovers.
If InterRATMeasTime is excessively high, it has no effect on improvement of the service

quality.
For the actual network, statistics can be made to obtain the delay for a successful inter-RAT
handover to get a proper value of InterRATMeasTime that satisfies most UEs.
Related Commands
InterRATMeasTime.
and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify InterRATMeasTime.
2.5.8 Switch used to Send Load Information to 2G

This is a switch used to send load information to 2G, without direct impact on network
performance. When it is set to ON, the RNC sends UMTS cell load information to the GSM
during the non-coverage based system relocation in or out process. When it is set to OFF, the
RNC does not send UMTS cell load information to the GSM during the system relocation in or
out process.
ID
SNDLDINFO2GSMIND
Value Range
OFF, ON
Physical Scope
OFF, ON
Setting
The default value is ON.

This parameter should be used with the WCDMA and GSM load balancing function.
Related Commands
2-80

RAN

SNDLDINFO2GSMIND.
and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify SNDLDINFO2GSMIND.
2.5.9 Switch for Non-Coverage Based Handover according to 2G

Load Information
This describes the switch for non-coverage based handover according to 2G load information.
When it is set to ON, the RNC stops the non-coverage based system relocation out process if
the GSM cell load exceeds the CS/PS dormain relocate GSM load Threshold.
ID
NCOVHOON2GLDIND
Value Range
OFF, ON
Physical Scope
OFF, ON
Setting

When the switch is enabled, the loading of GSM network is taken into account in the WCDMA
and GSM load balancing function, thus avoiding too much impact on the GSM network.
Related Commands
NCOVHOON2GLDIND.
and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify NCOVHOON2GLDIND.
2.5.10 2G Load Threshold by Inter-Rat Handover in CS-Domain

This parameter specifies the GSM load threshold by inter-RAT handover in CS-domain.
ID
CSHOOUT2GLOADTHD

2-81
RAN
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0% to 100%
Setting
The default value is 80, namely 80%.
This parameter defines the GSM load threshold by inter-RAT handover in CS-domain.

The higher the parameter is, more easily to handover, but take much impact on the GSM cell
load.
Related Commands
CSHOOUT2GLOADTHD.
and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify CSHOOUT2GLOADTHD.
2.5.11 2G Load Threshold by Inter-RAT Handover in PS-domain

This parameter specifies the GSM load threshold by inter-RAT handover in PS-domain.
ID
PSHOOut2GloadThd
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0% to 100%
Setting
This parameter defines the GSM load threshold by inter-RAT handover in PS-domain.
2-82

RAN

The higher the parameter is, more easily to handover, but take much impact on the GSM cell
load.
Related Commands
PSHOOut2GloadThd.
and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify PSHOOut2GloadThd.

ID
PeriodFor3C
Value Range
1 to 64
Physical Scope
If the RNC fails to handover to all the target cells of the 3C event, the RNC periodically retries
to launch handover to the target cells failed by load cause.
Setting

The lower the parameter isthe more easily handover to GSM cellbut the processing resource
Related Commands
PeriodFor3C.
and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify PeriodFor3C.

2-83
RAN

ID
AmntOfRpt3C
Value Range
0 to 63
Physical Scope
Setting
If the RNC fails to handover to all the target cells of the 3C event, the RNC periodically retries
to launch handover to the target cells failed by load cause for the 3C event maximum retry times.
If the handover succeeds or the new 3C event report is received, the periodically retry process
is stopped.

The higher the parameter isthe more easily handover to GSM cellbut the processing resource
Related Commands
AmntOfRpt3C.
and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify AmntOfRpt3C.
2.5.14 Measurement Quantity of 3A Frequency in QoS Handover

This parameter is used to configure the used frequency measurement quantity for the 3A event.
ID
UsedFreqMeasQuantityForQos3A
Value Range
CPICH_Ec/No, CPICH_RSCP
2-84

RAN
Physical Scope
CPICH_Ec/No, CPICH_RSCP
Setting
The default value is CPICH_RSCP.

The precondition is that the UE is moving to the edge of the cell. If there is intra-frequency cell,
the Ec/No changes faster than RSCP, so the quality of the cell should be measured by Ec/No. If
there is no intra-frequency cell, the RSCP changes faster than Ec/No, the quality of the cell
should be measured by RSCP. If the measurement quantity is improper, handovers may not be
delayed, and thus call drop occurs.
Related Commands
Use SET QOSHO to set and LST QOSHO to query UsedFreqMeasQuantityForQos3A.

ID
DlRscpQosHyst
Value Range
-15 to 15
Physical Scope
-15 dB to 15 dB.
Setting
In event-trigger mode, the frequency threshold for the inter-frequency, inter-rat measurement
triggered due to downlink QoS causes, and RSCP measurement quantity adopts the frequency
threshold of coverage measurement configured on the daemon minus this parameter.

The greater the delay, the more likely to trigger the 2B/3A eventmore easily handover to the
target cell.
Related Commands
Use SET QOSHO to set and LST QOSHO to query DlRscpQosHyst.

2-85
RAN

ID
DLQosMcTimerLen
Value Range
0 to 512
Physical Scope
0 s to 512 s.
Setting
After DownLink Qos measurement starts, if no handover is performed, when this timer expires,
the Qos measurement is stopped.

compression mode.
Related Commands
Use SET QOSHO to set and LST QOSHO to query DLQosMcTimerLen.

ID
ULQosMcTimerLen
Value Range
0 to 512
Physical Scope
0 s to 512 s.
2-86

RAN
Setting
After UpLink Qos measurement starts, if no handover is performed, when this timer expires, the
Qos measurement is stopped.

compression mode.
Related Commands
Use SET QOSHO to set and LST QOSHO to query ULQosMcTimerLen.
2.6 Blind Handover Management Parameters

This describes the blink handover management parameters.
Table 2-15 List of blind handover management parameters
S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configu
ration
MML Command
Level
BlindHoFla
g
Blind
handover flag
OFF
NCell
BlindHOPr
io
Blind
handover
priority
DRDEcN0
Threshhold
Ec/N0
threshold for
direct retry
-9 dB
For inter-frequency handovers:

Set: ADD INTERFREQNCELL
Query: LST
INTERFREQNCELL
Modify: MOD
INTERFREQNCELL
For inter-RAT handovers:
Set: ADD GSMNCELL
Query: LST GSMNCELL
Modify: MOD GSMNCELL

2-87
RAN
2.6.1 Blind Handover Flag

This describes the blind handover flag, which indicates whether the blind handover is performed.
In a blind handover, the UE can directly hands over to the neighboring cell without any
measurement.
2.6.2 Blind Handover Priority
This describes the blind handover priority. If BlindHOFlag is TRUE, BlindHOPrio can be
used to appoint the blind handover priority for the neighboring cell.
2.6.3 Ec/N0 Threshold for Direct Retry
In DRD, this parameter is used to judge whether the quality condition of blind handover is met.
2.6.1 Blind Handover Flag

This describes the blind handover flag, which indicates whether the blind handover is performed.
In a blind handover, the UE can directly hands over to the neighboring cell without any
measurement.
ID
BlindHoFlag
Value Range
FALSE, TRUE
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The default value is FALSE.
For the concentric cells with different frequencies, BlindHoFlag can be set to TRUE.

Set the parameter according to actual network handover strategies. It may affect KPI
performance concerning the cells if the blind handover is allowed in related cells. Especially the
emergency blind handovers have more impact.
Related Commands
For the inter-frequency handovers:
Use ADD INTERFREQNCELL to set, LST INTERFREQNCELL to query, and MOD
INTERFREQNCELL to modify BlindHoFlag.
For the inter-RAT handovers:
BlindHoFlag.
2-88

RAN
2.6.2 Blind Handover Priority

This describes the blind handover priority. If BlindHOFlag is TRUE, BlindHOPrio can be
used to appoint the blind handover priority for the neighboring cell.
ID
BlindHOPrio
Value Range
0 to 30
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
Table 2-16 lists the meanings of different blind handover priorities.
Table 2-16 List of blind handover priority sets
Bind Handover Priority Set
Priority
Cell Type
Inter-frequency emergency
blind handover
0 to 30
Inter-frequency cell
Inter-frequency nonemergency blind handover
0 to 15
Inter-frequency cell
Inter-RAT emergency blind

handover
0 to 30
Inter-RAT cell
Inter-RAT non-emergency
blind handover
0 to 15
Inter-RAT cell
The configuration of the non-emergency blind handover priority (015) of cells must guarantee
a reasonable handover success rate and avoid the high call drop rate. The scenarios of the nonemergency blind handover priority are concentric cells with different frequencies and macro
cells that act as the neighboring cells of micro cells.
The cells with priority 1630 have a lower requirement on the blind handover success rate,
because the customer satisfaction is not directly affected. The scenarios of the cells with priority
1630 are the cells in the UE's moving direction and the inter-frequency cells with a high
handover probability.
The specific value in the value ranges is not strictly required, because it is used to flexibly control
the preferable target cells of blind handovers. For the inter-frequency blind handover cells, you
can randomly select a value for the handover priority between 0 and 10, while you must carefully
select a value range (either 015 or 1630, which indicates non-emergency inter-frequency blind
handovers or emergency inter-frequency blind handovers) at first.

2-89
RAN

If the blind handovers are enabled, the traffic statistics indexes, such as the inter-frequency or
inter-RAT handover success rate and call drop rate, are affected to a certain degree. Especially
the emergency blind handovers have more impact.
Related Commands
INTERFREQNCELL to modify BlindHOPrio.
BlindHOPrio.
2.6.3 Ec/N0 Threshold for Direct Retry

In DRD, this parameter is used to judge whether the quality condition of blind handover is met.
ID
DRDEcN0Threshhold
Value Range
24 to 0
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value is -18, namely -9 dB.
This threshold is the minimum Ec/N0 value required for normal communications of UE. In
selecting the candidate cell of DRD, the cell whose Ec/N0 value is smaller than this threshold
of inter-frequency cells is filtered out.

This parameter specifies the domain for inter-frequency blind handover. The higher the
parameter, more easily to blind handover.
Related Commands
INTERFREQNCELL to modify DRDEcN0Threshhold.
2-90

RAN
DRDEcN0Threshhold.
2.7 Cell Selection and Reselection Parameters

This describes the cell selection and reselection parameters.
Table 2-17 List of cell selection and reselection parameters
S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configurati
on
MML Command
Leve
l
Measureme
nt hysteresis
parameters
Qhyst1s: 2 (4
dB)
Set: ADD CELLSELRESEL
Cell
IdleQhyst1s
IdleQhyst2s
ConnQhyst1s
ConnQhyst2s
IdleQoffset1s
n
Load level
offsets
Qhyst2s: 1 (2
dB)
0 dB
Query: LST
CELLSELRESEL
Modify: MOD
CELLSELRESEL
For intra-frequency cells:
Set: ADD
INTRAFREQNCELL
IdleQoffset2s
n
Query: LST
INTRAFREQNCELL
ConnQoffset1
sn
Modify: MOD
INTRAFREQNCELL
ConnQoffset2
sn
For inter-frequency cells:
Qoffset1sn
Set: ADD
INTERFREQNCELL
Query: LST
INTERFREQNCELL
Modify: MOD
INTERFREQNCELL
For inter-RAT cells:
Set: ADD GSMNCELL
Query: LST GSMNCELL
Qqualmin
Minimum
quality
criterion
18 dB
Set: ADD CELLSELRESEL

Query: LST
CELLSELRESEL

2-91
RAN
S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configurati
on
Qrxlevmin
Minimum
access level
58, namely
115 dBm
IdleSintrasear
ch
Cell
reselection
start
thresholds
IdleSintrasear
ch and
ConnSintrase
arch: 5,
namely 10 dB
ConnSintrase
arch
IdleSintersear
ch
IdleSintersear
ch and
ConnSinterse
arch: 4,
namely 8 dB
ConnSinterse
arch
SsearchRat
MML Command
Leve
l
Modify: MOD
CELLSELRESEL
SsearchRat: 2,
namely 4 dB
6
Treselections
Reselection
hysteresis
time
1s
Qrxlevmin
Minimum
access level
for GSM
cells
58, namely
115 dBm
Set: ADD GSMNCELL

Query: LST GSMNCELL
NCel
l
Qsearch_I
Level
threshold for
2G MS in
idle mode to
search for
3G cells
7, namely
always
FDD_Qoffset
3G cell
reselection
signal level
offset
0 dB
1
0
FDD_Qmin
3G cell
reselection
signal level
threshold
10 dB
N/A
GSM
2.7.1 Measurement Hysteresis Parameters

2-92

RAN
This describes the measurement hysteresis parameters: measurement hysteresis 1 (Qhyst1s) and
measurement hysteresis 2 (Qhyst2s). The measurement hysteresis 1 (Qhyst1s) and measurement
hysteresis 2 (Qhyst2s) are used for the UE to measure the service cell CPICH RSCP (Qhyst1s)
and CPICH Ec/No (Qhyst2s) respectively. IdleQhyst1s and IdleQhyst2s are used in the idle
state, ConnQhyst1s and ConnQhyst2s are used in the connecting state.
2.7.2 Cell Reselection Offset
This describes the cell offset used for cell selection and reselection. In the processes of cell
selection and cell reselection, the offset of the cells that use the CPICH Ec/No measurement
value is QOffset2sn, the offset of the cells that use the CPICH RSCP measurement value is
QOffset1sn.
2.7.3 Minimum Quality Criterion
This describes the minimum access threshold of PCPICH Ec/N0. The UE can reside in the cell
only when CPICH Ec/N0 measured by the UE is higher than this threshold.
2.7.4 Minimum Access Level
This describes the minimum access threshold of PCPICH RSCP. The UE can reside in the cell
only when CPICH RSCP measured by the UE is higher than this threshold.
2.7.5 Cell Reselection Start Thresholds
This describes the cell reselection start thresholds: intra-frequency cell reselection start threshold
(Sintrasearch), inter-frequency cell reselection start threshold (Sintersearch), and inter-RAT
cell reselection start threshold (SsearchRat). IdleSintrasearch and IdleSintersearch are used
in idle state. ConnSintrasearch and ConnSintersearch are used in connecting state.
2.7.6 Reselection Hysteresis Time
This describes reselection hysteresis time. If the quality of signals of a cell (CPICH Ec/No
measured by the UE) is better than that of the current cell where the UE is residing throughout
the reselection hysteresis time, the UE reselects the cell as the next residing cell.
2.7.7 Minimum Access Level of Inter-RAT Cells
This describes the minimum access level threshold of inter-RAT cells, such as the GSM, DCS,
or PCS cells. A UE can reside in a cell only when the signal strength measured by the UE is
higher than the threshold.
2.7.8 Signal Level Threshold for MS in 2G Idle Mode to Search for 3G Cells
This describes the signal level threshold for which a GSM MS in idle mode starts to search for
3G cells.
2.7.9 Signal Level Offset for 3G Cell Reselection
This describes the signal level offset for 3G cell reselection. A 3G cell can be reselected when
the average signal level of the target 3G cell is higher than that of the current serving cell by at
least the amount defined by FDD_Qosffset.
2.7.10 Signal Level Threshold for 3G Cell Reselection
This describes the signal level threshold for 3G cell reselection. Only when the signal level in
the target 3G cell is higher than the serving cell by at least the amount defined by
FDD_Qmin, the target 3G cell may become a candidate cell for reselection.
2.7.1 Measurement Hysteresis Parameters

This describes the measurement hysteresis parameters: measurement hysteresis 1 (Qhyst1s) and
measurement hysteresis 2 (Qhyst2s). The measurement hysteresis 1 (Qhyst1s) and measurement
hysteresis 2 (Qhyst2s) are used for the UE to measure the service cell CPICH RSCP (Qhyst1s)
and CPICH Ec/No (Qhyst2s) respectively. IdleQhyst1s and IdleQhyst2s are used in the idle
state, ConnQhyst1s and ConnQhyst2s are used in the connecting state.

2-93
RAN
ID
IdleQhyst1s
IdleQhyst2s
ConnQhyst1s
ConnQhyst2s
Value Range
0 to 20, 255
Physical Scope
When the value of measurement hysteresis is 255, the measurement hysteresis is invalid.
Setting
The default value of Qhyst1s is 2, namely 4 dB. The default value of Qhyst2s is 1, namely 2
dB.
Qhyst2s is an optional configuration. If Qhyst2s is not configured, the value of the measurement
hysteresis is that of Qhyst1s.
According to the R rule, the measurement value of the current serving cell plus the hysteresis is
used in the cell reselection sequencing. The value of the measurement hysteresis is related to
the slow fading feature of the area where the cell is.
The measurement hysteresis aims to prevent the ping-pong effect of the cell reselection, which
is caused by the slow fading when the UE is on the edge of the cell. The ping-pong effect may
trigger frequent location updates (idle mode), URA updates (URA_PCH), or cell updates
(CELL_FACH, CELL_PCH), and thus increase the load of network signaling and the
consumption of UE batteries.
Set a proper measurement hysteresis to reduce as much as possible effect of the slow fading as
well as ensuring timely cell updates of the UE. According to the CPICH RSCP emulation report
of inter-frequency hard handovers, the measurement hysteresis ranges 4 dBm to 5 dBm and is
set to 4 dBm by default when the slow fading variance is 8 dB and the relative distance is 20 m.
In the cells the slow fading variance is big and the average moving speed of UEs is low, increase
the measurement hysteresis to reduce the ping-pong effect of the cell reselection.
In the cells where the slow fading variance is low and the average moving speed of UEs is high,
for example the suburbs and countryside, reduce the measurement hysteresis to guarantee timely
location updates of UEs.

The higher the measurement hysteresis is, the less likely it is for various types of cell reselections
to occur, and the better the slow fading resistance capability is, but the slower the system reacts
to the environment changes.
2-94

RAN
Related Commands
CELLSELRESEL to modify the measurement hysteresis.
2.7.2 Cell Reselection Offset

This describes the cell offset used for cell selection and reselection. In the processes of cell
selection and cell reselection, the offset of the cells that use the CPICH Ec/No measurement
value is QOffset2sn, the offset of the cells that use the CPICH RSCP measurement value is
QOffset1sn.
ID
IdleQoffset1sn
IdleQoffset2sn
ConnQoffset1sn
ConnQoffset2sn
Value Range
50 to 50
Physical Scope
50 dB to 50 dB
Setting
IdleQoffset1sn and IdleQoffset2sn are used in idle state. ConnQoffset1sn and
ConnQoffset2sn are used in connecting state. ConnQoffset1sn and ConnQoffset2sn are valid
only when SIB12Ind is TRUE, namely that there are SIB12 system messages. In addition, in
the inter-RAT cell selection and reselection processes, there is no QOffset2sn but only
QOffset1sn, and there is no difference as to Idle and Conn.
It is the offset for the CPICH measurement value of neighboring cells. QOffset1sn is used for
the RSCP measurement. The measurement value of neighboring cells minus the offset is used
in the cell reselection sequencing. QOffset2sn is used for the Ec/No measurement. The
measurement value of neighboring cells minus the offset is used in the cell reselection
sequencing.
The cell reselection offset plays the role of shifting the cell boarder in the cell selection and
reselection algorithm. It is configured by network planners according to the actual situation.

l
The higher the cell reselection offset is, the lower probability that nearby cells are selected.
The lower the cell reselection offset is, the higher probability that nearby cells are selected.

2-95
RAN
Related Commands
For the intra-frequency cell selection and reselection:
Use ADD INTRAFREQNCELL to set, LST INTRAFREQNCELL to query, and MOD
INTRAFREQNCELL to modify the cell reselection offset.
For the inter-frequency cell selection and reselection:
INTERFREQNCELL to modify the cell reselection offset.
For the inter-RAT cell selection and reselection:
the cell reselection offset.
2.7.3 Minimum Quality Criterion

This describes the minimum access threshold of PCPICH Ec/N0. The UE can reside in the cell
only when CPICH Ec/N0 measured by the UE is higher than this threshold.
ID
Qqualmin
Value Range
24 to 0
Physical Scope
Setting
For the FDD mode, the definition of cell selection S rule in 3GPP 25.304 is as follows:
Srxlev > 0 and Squal > 0
Where,
Squal = Qqualmeas Qqualmin
Srxlev = Qrxlevmeas Qrxlevmin Pcompensation
2-96
Qqualmeas is the quality measured for the cell and is represented by CPICH Ec/NO.
Qrxlevmeas is RSCP of CPICH.
Qrxlevmin is the minimum pilot signal reception power of the current cell.
Pcompensation = max (UE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH P_MAX, 0)
UE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH is the maximum uplink transmit power when the UE

accesses the cell, namely MaxAllowedULTxPower.
P_MAX is the maximum radio frequency output power of a UE.

RAN

l
The higher Qqualmin is, the more difficult it is for the UE to reside in the cell.
The lower Qqualmin is, the easier it is for the UE to reside in the cell, but it is possible
that the UE cannot receive the system messages that are sent through the PCCPCH.
Related Commands
CELLSELRESEL to modify Qqualmin.
2.7.4 Minimum Access Level

This describes the minimum access threshold of PCPICH RSCP. The UE can reside in the cell
only when CPICH RSCP measured by the UE is higher than this threshold.
ID
Qrxlevmin
Value Range
58 to 13
Physical Scope
58 means 115 dBm; 57 means 113 dBm; ; 13 means 25 dBm.
Setting
For the definition of Qrxlevmin, refer to 2.7.3 Minimum Quality Criterion.
The settings of Qrxlevmin and Qqualmin need to be considered comprehensively.

l
The higher Qrxlevmin is, the more difficult it is for the UE to reside in the cell.
The lower Qrxlevmin is, the easier it is for the UE to reside in the cell. But if
Qrxlevmin is excessively low, it is possible that the UE cannot receive the system messages
that are sent through the PCCPCH.
Related Commands
CELLSELRESEL to modify Qrxlevmin.
2.7.5 Cell Reselection Start Thresholds

This describes the cell reselection start thresholds: intra-frequency cell reselection start threshold
(Sintrasearch), inter-frequency cell reselection start threshold (Sintersearch), and inter-RAT

2-97
RAN
cell reselection start threshold (SsearchRat). IdleSintrasearch and IdleSintersearch are used
in idle state. ConnSintrasearch and ConnSintersearch are used in connecting state.
ID
IdleSintrasearch
IdleSintersearch
ConnSintrasearch
ConnSintersearch
SsearchRat
Value Range
16 to 10
Physical Scope
Setting
l
The default values of IdleSintrasearch and ConnSintrasearch are 5, namely 10 dB.
The default values of IdleSintersearch and ConnSintersearch are 4, namely 8 dB.
The default value of Ssearchrat is 2, namely 4 dB.
In 3GPP 25.304, the cell reselection start threshold is defined as follows:

1.
If Sx <= Sintrasearch, the UE implements the intra-frequency measurement and starts the
intra-frequency cell reselection.
2.
If Sx <= Sintersearch, the UE implements the inter-frequency measurement and starts the
inter-frequency cell reselection.
3.
If Sx <= SserachRAT, the UE implements the inter-RAT measurement and starts the interRAT cell reselection.
Where, Sx = UE measurement value Qqualmin.

When the UE detects that the quality of serving cell (CPICH Ec/No measured by the UE) is
lower than the minimum quality standard (Qqualmin) plus the cell reselection start threshold,
the UE starts the cell reselection process.
The intra-frequency cell reselection has a priority higher than the inter-frequency cell reselection
and inter-RAT cell reselection, the intra-frequency cell reselection start threshold should be
higher than the inter-frequency cell reselection start threshold and inter-RAT cell reselection
start threshold.

l
2-98
If the cell reselection threshold is set to a comparatively high value, the UE may frequently
start cell reselections, and the battery of the UE may be largely consumed.
RAN
l
If the cell reselection threshold is set to a comparatively low value, it is difficult for cell
reselections to be started, and the UE may not timely reside in the cells with good quality,
affecting the quality of communication between the UTRAN and the UE.
Related Commands
CELLSELRESEL to modify the cell reselection thresholds.
2.7.6 Reselection Hysteresis Time

This describes reselection hysteresis time. If the quality of signals of a cell (CPICH Ec/No
measured by the UE) is better than that of the current cell where the UE is residing throughout
the reselection hysteresis time, the UE reselects the cell as the next residing cell.
ID
Treselections
Value Range
0 to 31
Physical Scope
0 s to 31 s
Setting
Treselections prevents ping-pong reselections between cells.
NOTE
0 corresponds to the default value that is prescribed in the protocol, and does not mean 0 s.
When setting Treselections, comply with the following principles:

1.
Ensure that the UE can reselect a cell when crossing the non-soft-switch area of the cell
and that the UE timely performs location updates, cell updates, or URA updates when
necessary.
2.
Ensure that the UE does not reselect a cell when it is in the soft-switch area of the cell. In
this way, the unnecessary location updates, cell updates, and URA updates are avoided.
3.
When setting Treselections, consider the difference between cells that cover different
areas, for example the cells covering highways and cells covering densely populated areas.
Treselections in densely populated areas can be set to a high value and Treselections in
the areas where the average moving speed of UEs is high can be set to a low value.

l
If Treselections is set to a comparatively low value, the ping-pong reselections may be

caused.
2-99
RAN
l
If Treselections is set to a comparatively high value, the cell reselection delay may become
excessively high, and thus cell reselections may be affected.
Related Commands
CELLSELRESEL to modify Treselections.
2.7.7 Minimum Access Level of Inter-RAT Cells

This describes the minimum access level threshold of inter-RAT cells, such as the GSM, DCS,
or PCS cells. A UE can reside in a cell only when the signal strength measured by the UE is
higher than the threshold.
ID
Qrxlevmin
Value Range
58 to 13
Physical Scope
58 means 115 dBm; 57 means 113 dBm; ; 13 means 25 dBm.
Setting
Similar to the S rule, mobile stations in the GSM, DCS, or PCS system also need to meet a path
loss standard to reside in a GSM, DCS, or PCS cell. The standard requires that the factor (C1)
of the path loss rule should be higher than 0. C1 is defined as follows:
C1 = (A Max (B, 0))
Where,
l
A = RLA_C RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN;
B = MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH P
For the DCS 1800 system
2-100
B = MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH + POWER OFFSET P;
RLA_C: The measured value of average received signal strength
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN: The minimum signal strength needed by the access system,

namely Qrxlevmin
MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH: The maximum allowed transmit power when the UE accesses

the system
POWER OFFSET: The power offset parameter of UEs in the DCS 1800 system; and is
used with MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH
RAN
l
P: The maximum radio frequency output power of a UE

l
The higher Qrxlevmin is, the more difficult it is for the UE to reside in the cell.
The lower Qrxlevmin is, the easier it is for the UE to reside in the cell.
But if Qrxlevmin is excessively low, it is possible that the UE cannot receive the system
messages and paging messages of the cell.
Related Commands
Qrxlevmin.
2.7.8 Signal Level Threshold for MS in 2G Idle Mode to Search for

3G Cells
This describes the signal level threshold for which a GSM MS in idle mode starts to search for
3G cells.
ID
Qsearch_I
Value Range
0 to 15
Physical Scope
l
If the threshold ranges 0 to 6, the GSM MS starts searching for 3G cells when the signal
level is lower than the threshold.
If the threshold ranges 8 to 14, the GSM MS starts searching for 3G cells when the signal
level is higher than the threshold.
If the threshold is 7, the GSM MS is always searching for 3G cells.
If the threshold is 15, the GSM MS never searches for the 3G cells.
0 = 98 dBm, 1 = 94 dBm, ..., 6 = 74 dBm, 7 = (always), 8 = 78 dBm, 9 = 74 dBm, ...,

14 = 54 dBm, 15 = (never)
Setting
The default value is 7, which indicates that the GSM MS in idle mode always searches for 3G
cells.

The setting of this parameter depends on the customer policy. The 3G cell is preferable during
the interoperation of 3G and 2G.

2-101
RAN
Related Commands
The parameter is invalid in the 3G network.
2.7.9 Signal Level Offset for 3G Cell Reselection

This describes the signal level offset for 3G cell reselection. A 3G cell can be reselected when
the average signal level of the target 3G cell is higher than that of the current serving cell by at
least the amount defined by FDD_Qosffset.
ID
FDD_Qoffset
Value Range
0 to 15
Physical Scope
0 = (always select a cell if acceptable), 1 = 28 dB, 2 = 24 dB, ..., 15 = 28 dB
Setting

Related Commands
2.7.10 Signal Level Threshold for 3G Cell Reselection

This describes the signal level threshold for 3G cell reselection. Only when the signal level in
the target 3G cell is higher than the serving cell by at least the amount defined by
FDD_Qmin, the target 3G cell may become a candidate cell for reselection.
ID
FDD_Qmin
Value Range
0 to 7
Physical Scope
0 = 20 dB, 1 = 6dB, 2 = 18 dB, 3 = 8 dB, 4 = 16 dB, 5 = 10 dB, 6 = 14 dB, 7 = 12 dB
2-102

RAN
Setting

Related Commands
2.8 Neighboring Cell Management Parameters

This describes the neighboring cell management parameters.
Table 2-18 List of neighboring cell management parameters
S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
o
.
Meani
ng
Defaul
t
Config
uratio
n
MML Command
Level
NPrioF
lag
Neighb
oring
cell
priority
flag
FALSE
NCell
NPRI
O
Neighb
oring
cell
priority

Set: ADD INTRAFREQNCELL
Modify: MOD INTRAFREQNCELL
Set: ADD INTERFREQNCELL
Modify: MOD INTERFREQNCELL
Set: ADD GSMNCELL
2.8.1 Neighboring Cell Priority Flag

This describes the neighboring cell priority flag.
2.8.2 Neighboring Cell Priority
This describes the neighboring cell priority.
2.8.1 Neighboring Cell Priority Flag

This describes the neighboring cell priority flag.

2-103
RAN
ID
NPrioFlag
Value Range
FALSE, TRUE
Physical Scope
False, true
Setting
The default value of is FALSE.
This parameter is unnecessary for a new network.
To swap the network that is configured with neighboring cell priority, use the neighboring cell
priority of the existing network and set NPrioFlag to TRUE.

An improper neighboring cell priority may result in missed configuration of neighboring cells.
Related Commands
Use ADD INTRAFREQNCELL to set and MOD INTRAFREQNCELL to modify
NPrioFlag.
Use ADD INTERFREQNCELL to set and use MOD INTERFREQNCELL to modify
NPrioFlag.
Use ADD GSMNCELL to set and MOD GSMNCELL to modify NPrioFlag.
2.8.2 Neighboring Cell Priority

This describes the neighboring cell priority.
ID
NPrio
Value Range
0 to 30 (for intra-frequency neighboring cells)
0 to 63 (for inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighboring cells)
2-104

RAN
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The lower NPrio is, the higher the neighboring cell priority is.

An improper neighbor priority may result in missed configuration of neighboring cells.
Related Commands
Use ADD INTRAFREQNCELL to set and MOD INTRAFREQNCELL to modify
NPrioFlag.
Use ADD INTERFREQNCELL to set and use MOD INTERFREQNCELL to modify
NPrioFlag.
Use ADD GSMNCELL to set and MOD GSMNCELL to modify NPrioFlag.

2-105
RAN
Admission Control Parameters
About This Chapter

This describes the admission control parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Table 3-1 List of admission control parameters
S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configuratio
n
MML Command
Le
ve
l
Initial uplink
and downlink
access rates of
BE services
64, namely 64
Kbit/s
Set or modify: SET FRC
R
N
C
ULBETraf
fInitBitRat
e
DLBETraf
fInitBitRat
e
Query: LST FRC

3-1
RAN
S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configuratio
n
Intelligent
admission
algorithm
switch
IU_Qos_N
eg_Switch
RAB_Do
wnsizing_
Switch
QueueAlg
oSwitch
MML Command
Le
ve
l
IU_QOS_N
EG_SWITC
H: 0
IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH and
RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWIT
CH
R
N
C
RAB_DOW
NSIZING_
SWITCH: 1
Set or modify: SET

CORRMALGOSWITCH
QUEUEAL
GOSWITC
H: OFF
PeemptAl
goSwitch
l
3-2
UlTotalEq
UserNum
Total number
of uplink
equivalent
subscribers
80
PREEMPT
ALGOSWI
TC: OFF
Query: LST
CORRMALGOSWITCH
QUEUEALGOSWITCH and
PREEMPTALGOSWITC
Set or modify: SET
QUEUEPREEMPT
Query: LST
QUEUEPREEMPT
Set: ADD CELLCAC
Query: LST CELLCAC
Ce
ll
Modify: MOD CELLCAC
DlTotalEq
UserNum
Total number
of downlink
equivalent
subscribers
80
UlNonCtrl
ThdForA
MR
AMR voice
uplink
threshold of
conversational
services
75, namely
75%
UlNonCtrl
ThdForNo
nAMR
Non-AMR
voice uplink
threshold of
conversational
services
75, namely
75%
DlConvA
MRThd
AMR voice
downlink
threshold of
conversational
services
80, namely
80%
Set: ADD CELLCAC

Query: LST CELLCAC
Ce
ll
Modify: MOD CELLCAC

RAN
S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configuratio
n
DlConvNo
nAMRThd
Non-AMR
voice downlink
threshold of
conversational
services
80, namely
80%
UlNonCtrl
ThdForOt
her
Uplink
admission
threshold of
other services
60, namely
60%
1
0
DlOtherTh
d
Downlink
admission
threshold of
other services
75, namely
75%
1
1
UlNonCtrl
ThdForHo
Uplink
threshold of
handovers,
used for the
uplink
admission of
handover UEs
80, namely
80%
1
2
DlHOThd
Downlink
threshold of
handovers,
used for the
downlink
admission of
handover UEs
85, namely
85%
1
3
UlCellTot
alThd
Total uplink
power
threshold of the
cell
83, namely
83%
1
4
DLCELLT
OTALTH
D
Total downlink
power
threshold of the
cell
90, namely
90%
MML Command

Le
ve
l
3-3
RAN
S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configuratio
n
MML Command
Le
ve
l
1
5
Reserved SF of
the uplink
credit resources
for handovers
SF16
Set: ADD CELLCAC
Ce
ll
UlHoCeRe
svSf
Query: LST CELLCAC

Modify: MOD CELLCAC
1
6
DlHoCeC
odeResvSf
Reserved SF of
the downlink
credit resources
for handovers
SF32
1
7
ULCCHL
OADFAC
TOR
Load factor (%)

of uplink
common
channels
DLCCHL
OADRSR
VCOEFF
Reserved load
coefficient (%)
of downlink
common
channels
3.1 Uplink and Downlink Initial Access Rates of BE Services

This describes the uplink and downlink initial access rates when BE services are set up.
3.2 Intelligent Admission Algorithm Switch
This describes the intelligent admission algorithm switch. The intelligent admission algorithm
switch consists of four subordinate algorithm switches: the maximum rate negotiation switch
(IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH), the initial rate selecting switch
(RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH), the queuing algorithm (QUEUEALGOSWITCH), and
the preemption algorithm (PREEMPTALGOSWITCH).
3.3 Uplink Total Equivalent User Number
This describes the uplink total equivalent user number. When algorithm 2 is used, this parameter
defines the total equivalent user number corresponding to the 100% uplink load.
3.4 Downlink Total Equivalent User Number
This describes the downlink total equivalent user number. When algorithm 2 is used, this
parameter defines the total equivalent user number corresponding to the 100% downlink load.
3.5 AMR Voice Uplink Threshold for Conversation Service
The uplink threshold for the conversation service is used for the uplink admission of conversation
service users.
3.6 Non AMR Voice Uplink Threshold of Conversation Service
3-4

RAN
This parameter is the uplink threshold of non AMR voice service in the conversation service
and used for uplink admission for non AMR voice user in the conversation service.
3.7 AMR-Voice Downlink Threshold of Conversational Services
This describes the AMR-voice downlink thresholds of conversational services, based on which
the downlink admission of AMR-voice subscribers of conversational services is implemented.
3.8 Non-AMR-Voice Downlink Threshold of Conversational Services
This describes the non-AMR-voice downlink thresholds of conversational services, based on
which the downlink admission of non-AMR-voice subscribers of conversational services is
implemented.
3.9 Uplink Threshold for Other Services
This parameter is the uplink threshold for services other than the conversation service. It is used
for uplink admission of other services.
3.10 Downlink Admission Threshold of Other Services
This describes the downlink admission threshold of other services, based on which the downlink
admission of subscribers of non conversational services is implemented.
3.11 Uplink Handover Admission Threshold
The uplink handover threshold is used for uplink admission of handover users. The parameter
is only useful for uplink inter-frequency handover. Do not do the admission judgment in the
uplink soft handover.
3.12 Downlink Handover Admission Threshold
This describes the downlink handover admission threshold, based on which the downlink
admission of handover subscribers is implemented.
3.13 Uplink Total Power Threshold
The total uplink power threshold of the cell is used for admission of HSPA uplink power
resource.
3.14 Downlink Total Power Threshold
This describes the total downlink power threshold of the cell (PR99 + GBP), which is used for
the admission of HSPA downlink power resource.
3.15 Reserved SF of the Uplink Credit Resource for Handovers
This describes the reserved threshold for the uplink credit handover. The threshold is used for
the admission of uplink credit for new subscribers.
3.16 Reserved SF of the Downlink Credit Resource and Channel Code Resource for Handovers
This describes the spreading factor (SF) threshold of the downlink code resources and CE
resources reserved for the handover. This parameter is used for the admission of downlink code
resources and credit for new subscribers.
3.17 Resources Reserved for Common Channel Load
This describes the uplink common channel load factor and the downlink common channel load
factor. ULCCHLOADFACTOR is used to reserve the resource for the uplink common channel,
and DLCCHLOADRSRVCOEFF is used to reserve the resource for the downlink common
channel.

3-5
RAN
3.1 Uplink and Downlink Initial Access Rates of BE Services

This describes the uplink and downlink initial access rates when BE services are set up.
ID
ULBeTraffInitBitrate
DLBeTraffInitBitrate
Value Range
ULBeTraffInitBitrate: Enum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384, D608, D1024,
D1450, D2048)
DLBeTraffInitBitrate: Enum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384, D768, D1024,
D1536, D1800, D2048)
Physical Scope
ULBeTraffInitBitrate: Enum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384, 608, 1024, 1450, 2048) kbit/s
DLBeTraffInitBitrate: Enum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384, 768, 1024, 1536, 1800, 2048)
kbit/s
Setting
The default value is D64.
To save the system resources and promote the admission success rate, the UE needs not to access
with the maximum expected rate but implement the initial access with a comparatively low rate
when the BE services are being set up. After the access, the rate can be increased when the traffic
requires a higher rate and the system resources meet the demand.
When the DCCC function is enabled, the values are the uplink and downlink initial access rates
when the BE services are set up if the value is lower than the maximum bit rate. If the initial
access rates do not meet the demand of the current load, the actual initial access rate is obtained
through negotiation on the basis of the uplink and downlink initial access rates when the BE
services are set up.
NOTE
When the uplink and downlink load is in initial congestion state, or the Iub transmission resources is in
congestion state, the current intelligent admission algorithm uses the minimum rate (generally 8 kbit/s) in
the set of optional rates for the BE service as the access rate instead of gradually decreasing the initial
access rate through negotiation. When either the uplink load or the downlink load is in congestion, the UE
access is rejected without any process of decreasing the rate.

l
3-6
If ULBeTraffInitBitrate and DLBeTraffInitBitrate are set to comparatively higher

values, the access rate of the BE services needs a shorter time to reach the maximum value,
but the rate is more easily to be decreased through negotiation when the system is in
congestion, so it is improper to set the access rate to an excessively high value.
RAN
l
If ULBeTraffInitBitrate and DLBeTraffInitBitrate are set to comparatively lower

values, the BE services can access with the rate more easily, but it takes a long time for the
rate to increase to the rate required by some services.
Related Commands
Use SET FRC to set and LST FRC to query ULBeTraffInitBitrate and
DLBeTraffInitBitrate.
3.2 Intelligent Admission Algorithm Switch

This describes the intelligent admission algorithm switch. The intelligent admission algorithm
switch consists of four subordinate algorithm switches: the maximum rate negotiation switch
(IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH), the initial rate selecting switch
(RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH), the queuing algorithm (QUEUEALGOSWITCH), and
the preemption algorithm (PREEMPTALGOSWITCH).
ID
IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH
RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH
QUEUEALGOSWITCH
PREEMPTALGOSWITCH
Value Range
IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH and RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH: Enum (0, 1)
QUEUEALGOSWITCH and PREEMPTALGOSWITC: ON, OFF
Physical Scope
IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH and RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH: 0 means disabled, 1 means
enabled.
QUEUEALGOSWITCH and PREEMPTALGOSWITC: ON means enabled, OFF means
disabled.
Setting
The default value of IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH is 0, and the default value of
RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH is 1.
The default values of QUEUEALGOSWITCH and PREEMPTALGOSWITC are OFF.
The descriptions of the sub algorithms are as follows:
l
Maximum rate negotiation: At the RAB assignment setup, RAB assignment modification,
and RAB transition, the real-time services or non-real-time services (BE) at the PS domain
requires rate negotiation based on the UE supported capability to get the maximum expected
rate of a proper service QoS request. This negotiation result should be sent to the CN. For
the BE service, it is the maximum rate that can be reached through adjustment by its DCCC.
3-7
RAN

l
RAB downsizing: At the RAB assignment setup, RAB assignment modification, and RAB
transition, the real-time or non-real-time (BE) service of PS domain requires selection of
a proper initial rate from the typical rates that are smaller than or equal to the maximum
expected rate after negotiation and bigger than or equal to the lowest guaranteed rate
according to the cell load information before application for cell resources. The bandwidth
is configured on the basis of the selected initial rate.
Preemption: At the service setup, modification, hard handover, and transition-in, if service
request supports preemption capability (configured in CN) when an application for cell
resources fails, the system implements preemption and releases the resources of lowerpriority users that can be preempted to have the service request be set up.
Queuing: At the service setup, modification, hard handover and transition-in, if service
requests do not support preemption capability but supports the queuing capability or the
preemption switch is closed when an application for cell resources fails, a queuing process
is implemented. When the heartbeat timer of queuing is in the timeout state, the system
attempts to allocate resources to the service request with the minimum metric in the queue.

IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH and RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH are set based on the actual
demand and the supporting capacity of the core network.
Preemption may increase the admission success rate of subscribers with high priority, but the
preemption also may make the preempted subscriber be released. Queuing may increase the
admission success rate of RAB, but the queuing also may increase the admission time delay of
queuing subscribers.
Related Commands
Use SET CORRMALGOSWITCH to set or modify and LST CORRMALGOSWITCH to
query IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH and RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH.
Use SET QUEUEPREEMPT to set or modify and LST QUEUEPREEMPT to query
QUEUEALGOSWITCH and PREEMPTALGOSWITCH.
3.3 Uplink Total Equivalent User Number

This describes the uplink total equivalent user number. When algorithm 2 is used, this parameter
defines the total equivalent user number corresponding to the 100% uplink load.
ID
UlTotalEqUserNum
Value Range
0 to 200
Physical Scope
0 to 200, with the step of 1
3-8

RAN
Setting
When algorithm 2 is used, the actual admission equivalent user number is equal to the admission
threshold multiplied by the equivalent user number corresponding to the 100% load. This
parameter defines the equivalent user number corresponding to the 100% load.

This parameter should be considered with the admission threshold. It should be set according to
the actual network condition.
l
If UlTotalEqUserNum is excessively high, the system load after admission probably

becomes excessively high, which affects the system stability and results in system
congestion.
If UlTotalEqUserNum is excessively low, the subscribers are more likely to be rejected,

and some resources are idled and wasted.
Related Commands
UlTotalEqUserNum.
3.4 Downlink Total Equivalent User Number

This describes the downlink total equivalent user number. When algorithm 2 is used, this
parameter defines the total equivalent user number corresponding to the 100% downlink load.
ID
DlTotalEqUserNum
Value Range
0 to 200
Physical Scope
0 to 200, with the step of 1
Setting
When the algorithm 2 is used, the actual admission equivalent user number is equal to the
admission threshold multiplied by the equivalent user number corresponding to the 100% load.
This parameter defines the equivalent user number corresponding to the 100% load.

This parameter should be considered with the admission threshold. It should be set according to
the actual network condition.

3-9
RAN

l
If DlTotalEqUserNum is excessively high, the system load after admission probably

becomes excessively high, which affects the system stability and results in system
congestion.
If DlTotalEqUserNum is excessively low, the subscribers are more likely to be rejected,

and some resources are idled and wasted.
Related Commands
DlTotalEqUserNum.
3.5 AMR Voice Uplink Threshold for Conversation Service

The uplink threshold for the conversation service is used for the uplink admission of conversation
service users.
Parameter ID
UlNonCtrlThdForAMR
Value Range
0 to 100

0 to 100%, step 1%
Parameter Setting
The default value is 75, that is 75%.
Based on the current load factor of the system and the service properties of the call requesting
for admission, the uplink admission control algorithm predicts the load factor of the system after
the new call is admitted, uses the sum of the predicted load factor value and the common channel
uplink load factor as the predicted value of the new load factor, and then compares the predicted
value of the load factor with the load factor threshold. If the predicted load factor value is not
bigger than the load factor threshold, the call will be admitted; otherwise it is rejected.
The uplink load thresholds include this parameter and uplink threshold for conversation nonAMR service, uplink threshold for other services and uplink handover admission
threshold. According to the relations among these four parameters, the proportions of the
conversation service and other services in the cell can be limited. These parameters can be also
used to ensure the priorities of handover users and the conversation service access.

If this parameter is too high, the system load after admission probably is too high, which affects
the system stability and results in system congestion; if it is too low, the users are more likely
to be rejected, and some resources are idled and wasted.
3-10

RAN
This parameter, uplink threshold for conversation non-AMR service, uplink threshold for
other services and uplink handover admission threshold should be considered together with
the network planning results.
l
If this parameter is too high, the target coverage in the network planning is influenced.
If it is too low, the target capacity cannot be satisfied.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD CELLCAC, query it through LST CELLCAC, and modify
it through MOD CELLCAC.
3.6 Non AMR Voice Uplink Threshold of Conversation

Service
This parameter is the uplink threshold of non AMR voice service in the conversation service
and used for uplink admission for non AMR voice user in the conversation service.
Parameter ID
UlNonCtrlThdForNonAMR
Value Range
0 to 100

0 to 100%, step 1%
Parameter Setting
The uplink admission control algorithm predicts the system load factor after admission of new
call according to the load factor of current system and service feature of admission request call.
It uses the sum of the load factor predicted value and the uplink load factor of public channel as
the new load factor predicted value, and then compares the load factor predicted value with the
load factor threshold. If the load factor predicted value is not bigger than the load factor threshold,
this call is admitted, or else it is refused.
Uplink load thresholds include this parameter, AMR voice uplink threshold of conversation
service, Uplink thresholds of other services and Uplink handover admission threshold. You
can restrict the proportion of conversation to other services in cell based on relations of the four
parameters or use them to ensure the priority of handover user and conversation service access.

If this parameter is set too high, the system load after admission may be overly heavy to affect
the system stability, resulting in system congestion. If this parameter is too low, the users are
more likely to be rejected, and some resources may be left idle.

3-11
RAN
This parameter, AMR voice uplink threshold of conversation service, Uplink thresholds of
other services and Uplink handover admission threshold should be considered together with
the planning result of network optimization to avoid over-big set target coverage affecting
network optimization, or too-small coverage that can not reach the target capacity.
Relevant Commands
3.7 AMR-Voice Downlink Threshold of Conversational

Services
This describes the AMR-voice downlink thresholds of conversational services, based on which
the downlink admission of AMR-voice subscribers of conversational services is implemented.
ID
DlConvAMRThd
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0% to 100%, with the step of 1%
Setting
The default value of DlConvAMRThd is 80, namely 80%.
According to the load factor of current system and service feature of admission request call, the
downlink admission control algorithm predicts the system load factor after admission of new
calls. It uses the sum of the load factor predicted value and the downlink load factor of public
channel as the new load factor predicted value, and then compares the load factor predicted value
with the load factor threshold. If the load factor predicted value is not bigger than the load factor
threshold, this call is admitted, or else it is rejected.
The downlink load thresholds are the AMR-voice downlink threshold of conversational services,
non-AMR-voice downlink threshold of conversational services, and downlink threshold for
other services. You can restrict the proportion of voice services to other services in the cell based
on relations of the four parameters or use them to guarantee the access priority of voice services.

The setting of DlConvAMRThd is related to the settings of cell radius and the maximum cell
transmit power.
l
3-12
If DlConvAMRThd is set to an excessively high value, the downlink coverage of the cell
is reduced, the neighboring cells are interfered seriously, and the system stability is affected
when the cell coverage is very small.
RAN
l
If DlConvAMRThd is set to an excessively low value, the system resources may be idled,
and the target capacity of the network planning cannot be reached.
The AMR-voice downlink threshold of conversational services, non-AMR-voice downlink

threshold of conversational services, downlink threshold for other services, and downlink
handover admission threshold are set on the basis of the network planning result.
Related Commands
DlConvAMRThd.
3.8 Non-AMR-Voice Downlink Threshold of

Conversational Services
This describes the non-AMR-voice downlink thresholds of conversational services, based on
which the downlink admission of non-AMR-voice subscribers of conversational services is
implemented.
ID
DlConvNonAMRThd
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value of DlConvNonAMRThd is 80, namely 80%.
calls. It uses the sum of the load factor predicted value and the downlink load factor of public
The downlink load thresholds are the AMR-voice downlink threshold of conversational services,
non-AMR-voice downlink threshold conversational services, and downlink threshold for other
services. You can restrict the proportion of voice services to other services in the cell based on
relations of the four parameters or use them to guarantee the access priority of voice services.

The setting of DlConvNonAMRThd is related to the settings of cell radius and the maximum
cell transmit power.

3-13
RAN

l
If DlConvNonAMRThd is set to an excessively high value, the downlink coverage of the

cell is reduced, the neighboring cells are interfered seriously, and the system stability is
affected when the cell coverage is very small.
If DlConvNonAMRThd is set to an excessively low value, the system resources may be

idled, and the target capacity of the network planning cannot be reached.
The AMR-voice downlink threshold of conversational services, non-AMR-voice downlink

threshold of conversational services, downlink threshold for other services, and downlink
handover admission threshold are set on the basis of the network planning result.
Related Commands
DlConvNonAMRThd.
3.9 Uplink Threshold for Other Services

This parameter is the uplink threshold for services other than the conversation service. It is used
for uplink admission of other services.
Parameter ID
UlNonCtrlThdForOther
Value Range
0 to 100

0 to 100%, step 1%
Parameter Setting
For the descriptions of this parameter, refer to 3.6 Non AMR Voice Uplink Threshold of
Conversation Service.

l
If this parameter is too high, the system load after admission is probably too high, which
affects the system stability and results in system congestion.
If it is too low, the users are more likely to be rejected, and some resources may be idled
and wasted.
This parameter, with uplink threshold for conversation service and uplink handover
admission threshold should be considered together with the network planning results.
3-14
If it is too high, the object coverage in the network planning is influenced.
If it is too low, the target capacity cannot be satisfied.

RAN
Relevant Commands
3.10 Downlink Admission Threshold of Other Services

This describes the downlink admission threshold of other services, based on which the downlink
admission of subscribers of non conversational services is implemented.
ID
DlOtherThd
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value of DlOtherThd is 75, namely 75%.
For the description of DlOtherThd, refer to 3.9 Uplink Threshold for Other Services.

l
If DlOtherThd is set to an excessively high value, the downlink coverage of the cell is
reduced, the neighboring cells are interfered seriously, and the system stability is affected
If DlOtherThd is set to an excessively low value, the system resources may be idled, and
the target capacity of the network planning cannot be reached.
The downlink admission threshold for other services, AMR voice downlink threshold of
conversational services, non-AMR-voice downlink threshold of conversational services, and
downlink handover admission threshold are set on the basis of the network planning result.
Related Commands
DlOtherThd.
3.11 Uplink Handover Admission Threshold

The uplink handover threshold is used for uplink admission of handover users. The parameter
is only useful for uplink inter-frequency handover. Do not do the admission judgment in the
uplink soft handover.

3-15
RAN
Parameter ID
UlNonCtrlThdForHo
Value Range
0 to 100

0 to 100%, step 1%
Parameter Setting
Based on the current load factor of the system and the service properties of the call requesting
for admission, the uplink admission control algorithm predicts the system load factor after the
new service is admitted, uses the sum of the predicted value of the load factor and the uplink
load factor of the common channel as the predicted value of the new load factor, and compares
the predicted load factor value with the load factor threshold. If the predicted load factor value
is not greater than the load factor threshold, the call is admitted; otherwise it is rejected.
The uplink load thresholds include this parameter, uplink threshold for other services and
uplink threshold for conversation services. According to the relations among these three
parameters, the proportions of the conversation service and other services in the cell can be
limited. These parameters can also be used to guarantee the priority of the handover users and
the conversation service access. Uplink handover admission threshold must be smaller than
uplink OLC trigger threshold for smart load control.
This parameter is to reserve resources for handover and to ensure the handover performance;
the value of this parameter must be greater than uplink threshold for conversation services.
This parameter has effects only on inter-frequency handover; it has no influence on intrafrequency handover.

l
If this parameter is too high, the system load after admission probably is too heavy, which
influences the system stability and results in the system congestion.
If it is too low, the probability that users are rejected is high, and some resources may be
idle and wasted.
This parameter should be considered together with the uplink threshold for the conversation
service and the uplink thresholds for other services. The restriction is described as following:
3-16
ULOLCTRIGTHD ULCELLTOTALTHD ULNONCTRLTHDFORHO >

ULNONCTRLTHDFORAMR, ULNONCTRLTHDFORNONAMR >
ULNONCTRLTHDFOROTHER ULLDRTRIGTHD ULLDRRELTHD;
DLOLCTRIGTHD DLCELLTOTALTHD DLHOTHD >

DLCONVAMRTHD, DLCONVNONAMRTHD > DLOTHERTHD
DLLDRTRIGTHD DLLDRRELTHD;
RAN
Relevant Commands
3.12 Downlink Handover Admission Threshold

This describes the downlink handover admission threshold, based on which the downlink
admission of handover subscribers is implemented.
ID
DLHOThd
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value of DLHOThd is 85, namely 85%.
CAUTION
The downlink handover admission threshold must be smaller than the downlink OLC trigger
threshold for smart load control and not smaller than the downlink threshold for conversational
services.
calls. It uses the sum of the load factor predicted value and the uplink load factor of public
The downlink handover admission threshold aims to reserve handover resources and guarantee
a good handover performance.

l
If DLHOThd is set to an excessively high value, the downlink coverage of the cell is
reduced, the neighboring cells are interfered seriously, and the system stability is affected
If DLHOThd is set to an excessively low value, the system resources may be idled.
The downlink handover admission threshold needs to be considered with the downlink threshold
for conversational services and downlink threshold for other services.

3-17
RAN
Related Commands
DLHOThd.
3.13 Uplink Total Power Threshold

The total uplink power threshold of the cell is used for admission of HSPA uplink power
resource.
Parameter ID
ULCELLTOTALTHD
Value Range
0 to 100

0 to 100%, step 1%
Parameter Setting
The default value is 83, that is, 83%.
The setting of this parameter needs to consider the target load of uplink scheduling. Due to the
scheduling mechanism of HSUPA, the total load of uplink always fluctuates around the target
load. Therefore, some margin is added to the target load of uplink scheduling to serve as the
basis of setting this parameter.
Relationship with other parameters: UlOlcTrigThd > UlCellTotalThd >
UlNonCtrlThdForHo

l
If this parameter is too high, the system loads after admission maybe too high, which leads
to the system congestion, and makes the system unstable.
If it is too low, the possibility of subscribers rejected increases, part of hardware resource
is idle and wasted.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameter through ADD CELLCAC, query it through LST CELLCAC, and modify it
through MOD CELLCAC.
3.14 Downlink Total Power Threshold

This describes the total downlink power threshold of the cell (PR99 + GBP), which is used for
the admission of HSPA downlink power resource.
3-18

RAN
ID
DlCellTotalThd
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value of DlCellTotalThd is 90, namely 90%.

l
If DlCellTotalThd is excessively high, the system loads after admission maybe too high,
which leads to the system congestion, and makes the system unstable.
If DlCellTotalThd is excessively low, the possibility of subscribers rejected increases, and

part of hardware resource is idle and wasted.
Related Commands
DlCellTotalThd.
3.15 Reserved SF of the Uplink Credit Resource for

Handovers
This describes the reserved threshold for the uplink credit handover. The threshold is used for
the admission of uplink credit for new subscribers.
ID
UlHoCeResvSf
Value Range
SF4, SF8, SF16, SF32, SF64, SF128, SF256, SFOFF
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value is SF16.

3-19
RAN
SFOFF indicates that no resource is reserved for the handover. If the remaining cell uplink
resources cannot satisfy this parameter after a new service is admitted, this new service is
rejected.
The reserved SF of the uplink credit resources for handovers aims to reserve resources for the
UEs who perform the handover and to guarantee the handover performance. The parameter
should be higher than or equal to the uplink LDR credit reserved SF threshold.

The lower UlHoCeResvSf is, the less credit resource is reserved for UEs that perform the
handover, and the higher the probability of handover subscriber admission rejection is.
Related Commands
UlHoCeResvSf.
3.16 Reserved SF of the Downlink Credit Resource and

Channel Code Resource for Handovers
This describes the spreading factor (SF) threshold of the downlink code resources and CE
resources reserved for the handover. This parameter is used for the admission of downlink code
resources and credit for new subscribers.
ID
DlHoCeCodeResvSf
Value Range
Physical Scope
Setting
SFOFF indicates that no resource is reserved for the handover. If the remaining cell downlink
resources cannot satisfy this parameter after a new service is admitted, this new service is
rejected.
To reserve resources for UEs who perform handovers and to guarantee a good handover
performance, the SF of downlink code resources and CE resources reserved for the handover
should be higher than both the threshold of the SF reserved for the cell LDR and the threshold
of the SF reserved for the cell LDR.
3-20

RAN

The lower DlHoCeCodeResvSf is, the less credit resource is reserved for UEs that perform the
handover, and the higher the probability of handover subscriber admission rejection is.
Related Commands
DlHoCeCodeResvSf.
3.17 Resources Reserved for Common Channel Load

This describes the uplink common channel load factor and the downlink common channel load
factor. ULCCHLOADFACTOR is used to reserve the resource for the uplink common channel,
and DLCCHLOADRSRVCOEFF is used to reserve the resource for the downlink common
channel.
ID
ULCCHLOADFACTOR
DLCCHLOADRSRVCOEFF
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
Setting
The CAC is implemented only for dedicated channels, and also reserve some resource for
common channels.
Based on the current load factor of the system and the service properties of the call admission
request, the uplink admission control algorithm predicts the load factor of the system after the
new call is admitted, uses the sum of the predicted load factor value and the common channel
uplink load factor as the new predicted value of the load factor, and then compares the new
predicted value of the load factor with the load factor threshold. If the predicted load factor value
is not higher than the load factor threshold, the call will be admitted. If the predicted load factor
value is higher than the load factor threshold, the call is rejected.

The higher ULCCHLOADFACTOR and DLCCHLOADRSRVCOEFF are, the more power
resources are consumed, which may decrease the system capacity. If
ULCCHLOADFACTOR and DLCCHLOADRSRVCOEFF are excessively low, the power
resources can be fully utilized, but the coverage may become poor when the resources are
insufficient.

3-21
RAN
Related Commands
ULCCHLOADFACTOR and DLCCHLOADRSRVCOEFF.
3-22

RAN
Load Control Parameters
About This Chapter

This describes the load control parameters that can be modified by network planners.
4.1 Cell Load Reshuffling Algorithm Parameters
The common configurable cell load reshuffling (LDR) algorithm parameters are listed here.
4.2 Cell Overload Congestion Control Parameters
This describes the overload congestion control (OLC) parameters that can be modified by
network planners.

4-1
RAN
4.1 Cell Load Reshuffling Algorithm Parameters

The common configurable cell load reshuffling (LDR) algorithm parameters are listed here.
Table 4-1 List of cell load reshuffling (LDR) algorithm parameters
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default Value
Relevant
Command
L
e
v
el
LdrPeriodTimerLen
LDR period
timer length
10 s
Set or
modify:SET
LDCPERIOD
R
N
C
Query:LST
LDCPERIOD
2
UlLdrTrigThd
UlLdrRelThd
DlLdrTrigThd
DlLdrRelThd
UlLdrFirstAction
UlLdrSecondAction
UlLdrThirdAction
UlLdrFourthAction
UlLdrFifthAction
UlLdrSixthAction
UlLdrSeventhAction
Uplink or
downlink
LDR trigger
and release
threshold
Uplink or
downlink
LDR action
UlLdrTrigThd:
55%
Set:ADD
CELLLDM
DlLdrTrigThd:
70%
Query:LST
CELLLDM
UlLdrRelThd: 45%
DlLdrRelThd: 60%
Modify:MOD
CELLLDM
ULLDRFirstActio
n: CODEADJ
Set:ADD
CELLLDR
ULLDRFirstActio
n and
DLLDRSecondAct
ion:
INTERFREQLDH
O
Query:LST
CELLLDR
DLLDRSecondActi
on
ULLDRSecondAct
ion and
DLLDRTHIRDAc
tion:
BERATERED
DLLDRThirdAction
Others: NOACT
UlLdrEighthAction
DlLdrFirstAction
C
ell
C
ell
Modify:MOD
CELLLDR
DLLDRFourthActio
n
DLLDRFifthAction
DlLdrSixthAction
DlLdrSeventhAction
DlLdrEighthAction
DlLdrNinthAction
DlLdrTenthAction
4-2

RAN
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default Value
ULLDRBERateRed
uctionRabNum
Number of
users
processed by
uplink/
downlink
LDR action
ULCSINTERRAT
SHOULDBEHOU
ENUM,
ULCSINTERRAT
SHOULDNOTHO
UENUM and
ULLDRAMRRAT
EREDUCTIONR
ABNUM are set to
3 by default; others
are set to 1 by
default.
ULLDRPSRTQosRe
negRabNum
ULCSINTERRATS
HOULDBEHOUEN
UM
ULCSINTERRATS
HOULDNOTHOUE
NUM
ULPSINTERRATS
HOULDBEHOUEN
UM
ULPSINTERRATS
HOULDNOTHOUE
NUM
ULLDRAMRRATE
REDUCTIONRAB
NUM
DLLDRBERateRed
uctionRabNum
DLLDRPSRTQosRe
negRabNum
Relevant
Command
L
e
v
el
DLCSINTERRAT
SHOULDBEHOU
ENUM,
DLCSINTERRAT
SHOULDNOTHO
UENUM and
DLLDRAMRRAT
EREDUCTIONR
ABNUM are set to
3 by default ; others
are set to 1 by
default.
DLCSINTERRATS
HOULDBEHOUEN
UM
DLCSINTERRATS
HOULDNOTHOUE
NUM
DLPSINTERRATS
HOULDBEHOUEN
UM
DLPSINTERRATS
HOULDNOTHOUE
NUM
MAXUSERNUMC
ODEADJ
DLLDRAMRRATE
REDUCTIONRAB
NUM

4-3
RAN
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default Value
ULINTERFREQHO
CELLLOADSPACE
THD
UL or DL
interfrequency
cell load
handover
load space
threshold
20
UL or DL
interfrequency
cell load
handover
maximum
bound width
20,000 bit/s
DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd
UlInterFreqHoBWT
hd
DlInterFreqHoBWT
hd
CellSfResThd
Cell SF
reserved
threshold
SF8
DlCreditSfResThd
UL or DL
credit SF
reserved
threshold
SF8
UlCreditSfResThd
4-4
LdrCodePriUseInd
LDR code
priority
indicator
FALSE
10
CodeCongSelInterFreqHoInd
Code
congestion
select interfrequency
indication
FALSE
11
LdrCodeUsedSpace
Thd
InterFrequency
handover
code used
ratio space
threshold
13%
12
GoldUserLoadControlSwitch
Gold user
load control
switch
OFF

Relevant
Command
L
e
v
el
RAN
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default Value
13
MbmsDecPowerRab
Thd
MBMS
power
control
service
priority
threshold
Relevant
Command
L
e
v
el
4.1.1 LDR Period Timer Length

This describes the LDR timer length. When the preliminary congestion happens, the LDM (Load
Monitoring) module sends period of preliminary congestion indication (namely LDR execution
period) to LDR.
4.1.2 Uplink or Downlink LDR Trigger Threshold and Release Threshold
This describes the uplink and downlink load thresholds for the system to determine entering into
or being released from the preliminary congestion status. The uplink LDR trigger threshold and
release threshold are UlLdrTrigThd and UlLdrRelThd respectively. The downlink LDR
trigger threshold and release threshold are UlLdrTrigThd and UlLdrRelThd respectively.
4.1.3 Uplink or Downlink LDR Actions
This describes the settings of uplink or downlink LDR actions. The parameters are used to set
the sequence of uplink or downlink LDR actions.
4.1.4 Number of Subscribers for Uplink or Downlink LDR Actions
This describes the number of subscribers selected for uplink or downlink LDR actions.
4.1.5 Cell Load Space Threshold for Uplink or Downlink Inter-Frequency Handover
This describes the cell load space threshold for uplink or downlink inter-frequency handovers.
A blind handover target cell can serve as the target cell of inter-frequency handover only when
the current uplink load space of the cell is higher than the uplink inter-frequency handover cell
load space threshold, namely UlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd . A blind handover target cell
can serve as the target cell of inter-frequency handover only when the current downlink load
space of the cell is higher than the downlink inter-frequency handover cell load space threshold,
namely DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd. This parameter value is relative to the target cell
LDR threshold.
4.1.6 Upper Threshold of Bandwidth for Uplink or Downlink Inter-frequency Cell Load
Handover
A subscriber can serve as the target subscriber of an inter-frequency load handover only when
the uplink RB bandwidth of the R99 subscriber is lower than UlInterFreqHoBWThd or the
uplink GBR of the HSUPA subbscriber is lower than UlInterFreqHoBWThd. A subscriber
can serve as the target subscriber of an inter-frequency load handover only when the downlink
RB bandwidth of the R99 subscriber is lower than DlInterFreqHoBWThd or the downlink
GBR of the HSDPA subscriber is lower than DlInterFreqHoBWThd.
4.1.7 Cell SF Reserved Threshold
This describes the cell SF reserved threshold. The code adjusting could be done only when the
minimum available SF of a cell is higher than this threshold.
4.1.8 Uplink or Downlink Credit SF Reserved Threshold

4-5
RAN
This describes the uplink or downlink credit SF reserved threshold. The uplink or downlink
credit LDR could be triggered only when the SF factor corresponding to the uplink or downlink
reserved credit is higher than the uplink or downlink credit SF reserved threshold.
4.1.9 LDR Code Priority Indicator
This describes the LDR code priority indicator, which indicates whether the priority of code is
considered during the code reshuffling.
4.1.10 Code Congestion Select Inter-Frequency Indication
This describes the code congestion select inter-frequency handover indication. If the parameter
is set toTURE, subscribers can be selected for inter-frequency load handover in the case of code
resource congestion. If the parameter is set to FALSE, subscribers can not be selected for interfrequency load handover in the case of code resource congestion.
4.1.11 Inter-Frequency Handover Code used Ratio Space Threshold
If the space threshold of code used ratio between the source cell and the destination cell is larger
than this parameter, then start inter-frequency handover.
4.1.12 Gold User Load Control Switch
This switch is used to decide whether the load control measures will be taken for gold user in
the case of resource congestion or not.
4.1.13 MBMS Power Control Service Priority Threshold
This describes the MBMS power control service priority threshold. When the MBMS service
priority is higher than the threshold, the preliminary congestion status of a cell can be released
through the decrease of power.
4.1.1 LDR Period Timer Length

This describes the LDR timer length. When the preliminary congestion happens, the LDM (Load
Monitoring) module sends period of preliminary congestion indication (namely LDR execution
period) to LDR.
ID
LdrPeriodTimerLen
Value Range
1 to 86400
Physical Scope
1 s to 86400 s, with the step of 1 s
Setting
The LDR period timer length is used by the LDM module. Upon detecting the preliminary
congestion of uplink or downlink of the cell, the LDM module sends preliminary congestion
indications regularly with the interval of the LDR period. In addition, to reduce the message
interactions between modules, the uplink and downlink share the same period, that is, each
preliminary congestion indication sent by the LDM module indicates whether the uplink,
downlink, or both the uplink and the downlink have preliminary congestion.
4-6

RAN
The LDR algorithm aims to slowly reduce the cell load and control the load below the admission
threshold, each LDR action takes a period (for example the inter-RAT load handover needs a
delay of about 5 s if the compressed mode is needed), and there is a delay for the LDM module
responds to the load decreasing (the delay is about 3 s when the L3 filter coefficient is set to 6),
so LdrPeriodTimerLen should be higher than 8.

l
The lower LdrPeriodTimerLen is, the more frequently the LDR action is executed, which
decreases the load quickly. If LdrPeriodTimerLen is excessively low, an LDR action may
overlap the previous one before the previous result is displayed in LDM.
The higher LdrPeriodTimerLen is, the more likely this problem can be prevented. If
LdrPeriodTimerLen is excessively high, the LDR action may be executed rarely, failing
to lower the load timely.
Related Commands
Use SET LDCPERIOD to set and LST LDCPERIOD to query LdrPeriodTimerLen.
4.1.2 Uplink or Downlink LDR Trigger Threshold and Release

Threshold
This describes the uplink and downlink load thresholds for the system to determine entering into
or being released from the preliminary congestion status. The uplink LDR trigger threshold and
release threshold are UlLdrTrigThd and UlLdrRelThd respectively. The downlink LDR
trigger threshold and release threshold are UlLdrTrigThd and UlLdrRelThd respectively.
ID
UlLdrTrigThd
UlLdrRelThd
DlLdrTrigThd
DlLdrRelThd
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
Setting
l
The default value of ULLDRTrigThd is 55, namely 55%.
The default value of DLLDRTrigThd is 70, namely 70%.
The default value of ULLDRRelThd is 45, namely 45%.
The default value of DLLDRRelThd is 60, namely 60%.

4-7
RAN
CAUTION
The uplink and downlink LDR trigger thresholds must be higher than the uplink and downlink
LDR release thresholds.
When the uplink or downlink preliminary congestion is triggered, the system starts the uplink
or downlink LDR action. The LDR control aims to reserve a space for the admission and increase
the admission success rate. Therefore, according to the current strategy, the LDR trigger
threshold should be lower and close to the index of the admission threshold in concern. For
example, if the carrier is concerned about the access success rate of the voice service, the LDR
trigger threshold can be set to a value lower than and close to the admission threshold of the
voice service but higher than the admission threshold of the data service.
After the preliminary congestion state of the cell load is released, the system no longer
implements the LDR action. Because the load fluctuates, the difference between the LDR release
threshold and trigger threshold should be higher than 10%. The ping-pong effect of the
preliminary congestion state may occur.

The lower the LDR trigger and release thresholds are, the easier the system enters the preliminary
congestion status, the harder it is released from this status, the easier the LDR action is triggered,
and the more likely the users are affected. But, the admission success rate becomes higher since
the resources are preserved. The carrier shall make a trade-off between these factors.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLLDM to set, LST CELLLDM to query, and MOD CELLLDM to modify the
uplink or downlink LDR trigger threshold and release threshold.
4.1.3 Uplink or Downlink LDR Actions

This describes the settings of uplink or downlink LDR actions. The parameters are used to set
the sequence of uplink or downlink LDR actions.
ID
The first to the eighth actions of the uplink are set as follows:
UlLdrFirstAction
UlLdrSecondAction
UlLdrThirdAction
UlLdrFourthAction
UlLdrFifthAction
UlLdrSixthAction
UlLdrSeventhAction
UlLdrEighthAction
The first to the tenth actions of the downlink are set as follows:
4-8

RAN
DlLdrFirstAction
DLLDRSecondAction
DLLDRThirdAction
DLLDRFourthAction
DLLDRFifthAction
DlLdrSixthAction
DlLdrSeventhAction
DlLdrEighthAction
DlLdrNinthAction
DlLdrTenthAction
Value Range
Uplink Enum {NOACT, INTERFREQLDHO, BERATERED, QOSRENEGO,
CSINTERRATLDHO, PSINTERRATLDHO, AMRRATERED}
Downlink Enum {NOACT, INTERFREQLDHO, BERATERED, QOSRENEGO,
CSINTERRATLDHO, PSINTERRATLDHO, AMRRATERED}
Physical Scope
NOACT: No load reshuffling action is taken.
INTERFREQLDHO: The inter-frequency load handover is performed.
BERATERED (BE service rate decreasing): Channels are reconfigured for the BE service.
QOSRENEGO: The renegotiation on the QoS of the uncontrollable real-time service is
performed.
CSINTERRATSHOULDBELDHO: The inter-RAT SHOULDBE load handover of the CS
domain is performed.
CSINTERRATSHOULDNOTBELDHO: The inter-RAT SHOULDNOTBE load handover of
the CS domain is performed.
CSINTERRATSHOULDBELDHO: The inter-frequency SHOULDBE load handover of the CS
domain is performed.
PSINTERRATSHOULDNOTBELDHO: The inter-frequency SHOULDNOTBE load
handover of the PS domain is performed.
AMRRATERED (AMR service rate decreasing): The setting of the TFC subset and the
negotiation of the service rate can be performed for the AMR voice service.
MBMSDECPOWER (MBMS power limiting): The MBMS service is configured with the
maximum power.
CODEADJ (code tree reshuffling): The fragments of the downlink code tree are arranged.

4-9
RAN
Setting
l
The default value of DlLdrFirstAction is CODEADJDL.
The default values of ULLdrFirstAction and DLLdrSecondAction are

INTERFREQLDHO.
The default values of ULLdrSecondAction and DLLdrThirdAction are

BERATERED.
The default values of other parameters are NOACT.
The preceding parameters can be set to determine whether or not an action is taken in the LDR
and the sequence of the LDR actions.
The LDR takes the actions in the preset sequence and judges whether each action is successful.
If an action is unsuccessful, the LDR turns to the next action. If an action is successful, or an
action is set to NOACT, or all the preceding actions are taken, the LDR is finished, and the
system waits for the next triggering of the LDR.
Because each action is performed by an algorithm module, the LDR algorithm only selects users
and delivers control messages, the execution result of each action can be obtained after a delay,
and the LDR algorithm cannot wait for a long time, so the LDR can only judge whether the
actions succeed by whether candidate users are found.
The inter-frequency load handover have no impact on the QoS of users and can balance the cell
load, so the inter-frequency load handover usually serves as the first action.
The BE service rate decreasing is effective only when the DCCC algorithm is enabled.

The uplink or downlink LDR actions are set on the basis of the actual needs and RNP (radio
network planning) strategy.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLLDR to set, LST CELLLDR to query, and MOD CELLLDR to modify the
settings of uplink or downlink LDR actions.
4.1.4 Number of Subscribers for Uplink or Downlink LDR Actions

This describes the number of subscribers selected for uplink or downlink LDR actions.
Parameter ID
ULLDRBERATEREDUCTIONRABNUM (uplink LDR-BE service rate reduction RAB
number)
ULLDRPSRTQOSRENEGRABNUM (uplink LDR uncontrollable real-time service
negotiation RAB number)
ULCSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM (uplink LDR-CS domain inter-system
SHOULDBE load handover user number)
ULCSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUM (uplink LDR-CS domain inter-system
SHOULDNOTBE load handover user number)
4-10

RAN
ULPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM (uplink LDR-PS domain inter-system

ULPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUM (uplink LDR-PS domain inter-system
ULLDRAMRRATEREDUCTIONRABNUM(uplink LDR-AMR service reduction RAB
number)
MAXUSERNUMCODEADJ (downlink channel code maximum reshuffled user number)
DLLDRBERATEREDUCTIONRABNUM (downlink LDR-BE service reduction RAB
number)
DLLDRPSRTQOSRENEGRABNUM (downlink LDR uncontrollable real-time service
negotiation RAB number)
DLCSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM (downlink LDR-CS domain inter-system
DLCSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUM (downlink LDR-CS domain inter-system
DLPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM (downlink LDR-PS domain inter-system
DLPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUM(downlink LDR-PS domain inter-system
DLLDRAMRRATEREDUCTIONRABNUM (downlink LDR-AMR service reduction RAB
number)
Value Range
1 to 10

None
Parameter Setting
The following parameters are set to 1 by default:
l
ULLDRBERATEREDUCTIONRABNUM
ULLDRPSRTQOSRENEGRABNUM
ULPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM
ULPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUM
MAXUSERNUMCODEADJ
DLLDRBERATEREDUCTIONRABNUM
DLLDRPSRTQOSRENEGRABNUM
DLPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM
DLPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUM
The other parameters are set to 3 by default.


4-11
RAN

l
Uplink/Downlink LDR-BE service rate reduction user number: This parameter can be
configured according to the actual user distribution. If the proportion of high-rate users is
large, you need to set a smaller value for this parameter. If the proportion of high-rate users
is small, you need to set a greater value. Because the preliminary congestion control
algorithm is designed to slowly decrease cell load, you need to set a small value for this
parameter.
Uplink/Downlink uncontrollable real-time service negotiation user number: The target

users of this parameter are the PS real-time service users. The setting of this parameter is
analogous to the setting of BE service reduction user number. Because the number of users
performing QoS renegotiation may be smaller than the value of this parameter, for example,
the candidate users selected for downlink LDR do not meet the QoS renegotiation
conditions, you must leave some margin when setting this parameter to ensure the success
of load reengineering.
Uplink/Downlink CS domain inter-system SHOULDBE load handover user number: The

target users of this parameter are the CS domain users. Because the CS domain users are
session users in general and they have little impact on load, you can set a slightly big value
for this parameter.
Uplink/Downlink CS domain inter-system SHOULDNOTBE load handover user number:

The target users of this parameter are the CS domain users. Because the CS domain users
are session users in general and they have little impact on load, you can set a slightly big
value for this parameter.
Uplink/Downlink PS domain inter-system SHOULDBE load handover user number: The

target users of this parameter are the PS domain users. The setting of this parameter is
analogous to the setting of BE service rate reduction user number.
Uplink/Downlink PS domain inter-system SHOULDNOTBE load handover user number:

The target users of this parameter are the PS domain users. The setting of this parameter is
analogous to the setting of BE service rate reduction user number.
Downlink channel code maximum reshuffling user number: Code reshuffling has a great
impact on user feelings. In addition, the reshuffled users occupy two code resources during
code reshuffling. Thus, you must set a small value for this parameter.
For each user, during a life cycle of preliminary congestion, a type of uplink/downlink LDR
action can be selected only once. After a type of uplink/downlink LDR action is selected by a
user, the uplink/downlink LDR marks the user. If this type of action is triggered again, this user
is not selected as the candidate user. Note that an action is performed separately in the uplink
and downlink directions. That is, the same action is performed one time in both the uplink
direction and the downlink action.

The greater the values of this set of parameters are, the more significant the load of the local cell
is reduced. This, however, may affect user feeling or cause traffic congestion in the target cell.
The smaller the values of this set of parameters are, the smaller the load range are adjusted by
the LDR. This, however, more probably ensures users' QoS and balances traffic load.
Relevant Commands
Use the ADD CELLLDR command for configuration, the LST CELLLDR command for
query, and the MOD CELLLDR command for modification.
4-12

RAN
4.1.5 Cell Load Space Threshold for Uplink or Downlink InterFrequency Handover
This describes the cell load space threshold for uplink or downlink inter-frequency handovers.
A blind handover target cell can serve as the target cell of inter-frequency handover only when
the current uplink load space of the cell is higher than the uplink inter-frequency handover cell
load space threshold, namely UlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd . A blind handover target cell
can serve as the target cell of inter-frequency handover only when the current downlink load
space of the cell is higher than the downlink inter-frequency handover cell load space threshold,
namely DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd. This parameter value is relative to the target cell
LDR threshold.
ID
UlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd
DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0% to 100%
Setting

l
The lower UlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd and DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd

are, the easier it is to find a qualified target cell for the blind handover. Excessively small
values of the parameters, however makes the target cell easily enter the congestion status.
The higher UlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd and

DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd are, the more difficult it is for the inter-frequency
blind handover occurs, and the easier it is to guarantee the stability of the target cell.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLLDR to set, LST CELLLDR to query, and MOD CELLLDR to modify
UlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd and DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd.
4.1.6 Upper Threshold of Bandwidth for Uplink or Downlink Interfrequency Cell Load Handover
A subscriber can serve as the target subscriber of an inter-frequency load handover only when
the uplink RB bandwidth of the R99 subscriber is lower than UlInterFreqHoBWThd or the
uplink GBR of the HSUPA subbscriber is lower than UlInterFreqHoBWThd. A subscriber
can serve as the target subscriber of an inter-frequency load handover only when the downlink

4-13
RAN
RB bandwidth of the R99 subscriber is lower than DlInterFreqHoBWThd or the downlink

GBR of the HSDPA subscriber is lower than DlInterFreqHoBWThd.
ID
UlInterFreqHoBWThd
DlInterFreqHoBWThd
Value Range
0 to 400000
Physical Scope
0 bit/s to 400000 bit/s
Setting
The default value is 200000, namely 200000 bit/s.

l
The higher UlInterFreqHoBWThd and DlInterFreqHoBWThd are, the higher the

service rate of the user in handover is, and the more obviously the cell load is decreased.
But high values of UlInterFreqHoBWThd and DlInterFreqHoBWThd give rise to the
fluctuation and congestion of the target cell load.
The lower UlInterFreqHoBWThd and DlInterFreqHoBWThd are, the smaller

amplitude of the load decreases as a result of the inter-frequency load handover, and the
easier it is to maintain the stability of the target cell load.
Related Commands
UlInterFreqHoBWThd and DlInterFreqHoBWThd.
4.1.7 Cell SF Reserved Threshold

This describes the cell SF reserved threshold. The code adjusting could be done only when the
minimum available SF of a cell is higher than this threshold.
ID
CellLdrSfResThd
Value Range
SF8, SF16, SF32, SF64, SF128, SF256
Physical Scope
None.
4-14

RAN
Setting
This parameter indicates the condition how code resource trigger the load reshuffling algorithm.
When the downlink residually least SF code is lower than CellLdrSfResThd, the cell is in
downlink code resource congestion state. At this time LDR action begins to work. The LDR
control aims to reserve the code resource to improve the admission success rate of newly
accessing subscribers.
The restriction of setting this parameter is as following:
DlHoCeCodeResvSf CellLdrSfResThd

The lower the code resource LDR trigger threshold is, the easier the downlink code resource
enters the initial congestion status, the easier the LDR action is triggered, and the easier the
subscriber perception is affected. But a lower code resource LDR trigger threshold causes a
higher admission success rate because the resource is reserved. The parameter should be set
based on the operator's requirement.
Related Commands
CellLdrSfResThd.
4.1.8 Uplink or Downlink Credit SF Reserved Threshold

This describes the uplink or downlink credit SF reserved threshold. The uplink or downlink
credit LDR could be triggered only when the SF factor corresponding to the uplink or downlink
reserved credit is higher than the uplink or downlink credit SF reserved threshold.
ID
UlLdrCreditSfResThd
DlLdrCreditSfResThd
Value Range
SF8, SF16, SF32, SF64, SF128, SF256
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
This parameter indicates the condition how CE resource trigger the load reshuffling algorithm.
When the downlink residually CE resource corresponding SF code is higer than
DlLdrCreditSfResThd, the cell is in downlink code resource congestion state. At this time

4-15
RAN
LDR action begins to work. The LDR control aims to reserve the code resource to improve the
admission success rate of newly accessing subscribers.
The restriction of setting this parameter is as following:
UlHoCeResvSf UlLdrCreditSfResThd
DlHoCeCodeResvSf DlLdrCreditSfResThd

If the SF corresponding to the current UL/DL remaining credit resource is higher than the
threshold defined by this parameter, the UL/DL credit LDR could be performed and the related
handling actions are taken.
Related Commands
UlLdrCreditSfResThd and DlLdrCreditSfResThd.
4.1.9 LDR Code Priority Indicator

This describes the LDR code priority indicator, which indicates whether the priority of code is
considered during the code reshuffling.
ID
LdrCodePriUseInd
Value Range
FALSE, TRUE
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
FALSE means not considering the code priority during the code reshuffling. TRUE means
considering the code priority during the code reshuffling.

If LdrCodePriUseInd is TRUE, the codes with high priority are reserved during the code
reshuffling. It is good for the code resource dynamic sharing, which is a function used for the
HSDPA service.
Related Commands
LdrCodePriUseInd.
4-16

RAN
4.1.10 Code Congestion Select Inter-Frequency Indication

This describes the code congestion select inter-frequency handover indication. If the parameter
is set toTURE, subscribers can be selected for inter-frequency load handover in the case of code
resource congestion. If the parameter is set to FALSE, subscribers can not be selected for interfrequency load handover in the case of code resource congestion.
Parameter ID
CodeCongSelInterFreqHoInd
Value Range
FALSE, TRUE

None.
Parameter Setting
The setting of this parameter needs to refer to usage of network resources. In the case of multifrequency coverage, if code resource is the bottleneck (such as for the indoors), it is
recommended that the parameter be set as True.

When the setting is True, subscribers can be selected for inter-frequency load handover in the
case of code resource congestion to eliminate code congestion more easily and to use multifrequency resource effectively. However, inter-frequency blind handover will also introduce the
risk of call drops.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameter through ADD CELLLDR, query it through LST CELLLDR, and modify it
through MOD CELLLDR.
4.1.11 Inter-Frequency Handover Code used Ratio Space Threshold

If the space threshold of code used ratio between the source cell and the destination cell is larger
than this parameter, then start inter-frequency handover.
Parameter ID
LdrCodeUsedSpaceThd
Value Range
0 to 100

4-17
RAN

0 to 100%, step is 1%.
Parameter Setting
The setting of this parameter needs to consider the bandwidth of inter-frequency handover
subscribers. It should be avoided as much as possible to cause the destination cell congested by
subscribershandover.

The smaller the setting, the more likely to find blind handover target cells that meet LDR
conditions is. However, an extremely small setting is likely to cause the target cell congested.
The greater the setting, the less likely to incur inter-frequency blind handover is, but the more
likely to ensure the reliability of the target cell is.
Relevant Commands
4.1.12 Gold User Load Control Switch

This switch is used to decide whether the load control measures will be taken for gold user in
the case of resource congestion or not.
Parameter ID
GoldUserLoadControlSwitch
Value Range
ON, OFF

None.
Parameter Setting
The setting is based on the policy of operators towards VIP subscribers. If service quality is to
be ensured in resource congestion, this parameter is not enabled.

If this parameter is enabled, load control measures such as down-speeding and handover will be
taken for VIP subscribers in the case of resource congestion in the cell, thus affecting service
quality of VIP subscribers. Otherwise, no measures will be taken for VIP subscribers in the case
of resource congestion.
4-18

RAN
Relevant Commands
4.1.13 MBMS Power Control Service Priority Threshold

This describes the MBMS power control service priority threshold. When the MBMS service
priority is higher than the threshold, the preliminary congestion status of a cell can be released
through the decrease of power.
ID
MbmsDecPowerRabThd
Value Range
1 to 15
Physical Scope
1 to 15
Setting
When the priority of the RAB of MBMS services exceeds this threshold, reconfigure the MBMS
power to the minimum power.

l
The lower MbmsDecPowerRabThd is, the bigger the scope for selecting the MBMS
services is, the more cell load is decreased, the more effect there is on the MBMS service.
At the same time, the cell overload is significantly decreased while the impact on the MBMS
services becomes bigger.
The higher MbmsDecPowerRabThd is, the smaller the scope for selecting the MBMS
services is, the less cell load is decreased, the more effect there is on the MBMS services,
and the quality of services with high priority, however, can be guaranteed.
Related Commands
MbmsDecPowerRabThd.
4.2 Cell Overload Congestion Control Parameters

This describes the overload congestion control (OLC) parameters that can be modified by
network planners.

4-19
RAN
Table 4-2 List of overload congestion control parameters

S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configurat
ion
MML Command
Le
vel
OLC period
timer length
3000,
namely 3 s
Set or modify: SET

LDCPERIOD
RN
C
OlcPeriodTi
merLen
Query: LST LDCPERIOD

2
UlOlcTrigTh
d
DlOlcTrigTh
d
UlOlcRelTh
d
Uplink or
downlink
OLC trigger
threshold and
release
threshold
DlOlcRelTh
d
UlOlcFTFRs
trctTimes
DlOlcFTFRs
trctTimes
UlOlcFTFRs
trctRabNum
DlOlcFTFRs
trctRabNum
RateRstrctTi
merLen
RateRecover
TimerLen
4-20
RateRstrctC
oef
UlOlcTri
gThd:
95%
DlOlcTri
gThd:
95%
UlOlcRel
Thd: 80%
DlOlcRel
Thd: 80%
Uplink or
downlink
OLC fast TF
restriction
times
Number of
RABs selected
for the uplink
or downlink
OLC fast TF
restriction
OLC fast TF
restrict data
rate restriction
timer length
and recovery
timer length
RateRstrctT
imerLen:
3000 (3 s),
RateRecove
rTimerLen:
5000 (5 s)
Data rate
restriction
coefficient for
OLC fast TF
restriction
68, namely
68%
Set: ADD CELLLDM

Query: LST CELLLDM
Cel
l
Modify: MOD CELLLDM
Set: ADD CELLOLC

Query: LST CELLOLC
Modify: MOD CELLOLC

RAN
S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configurat
ion
Number of
RABs released
for the uplink
or downlink
traffic
UlOlcTraffR
elRabNum
DlOlcTraffR
elRabNum
MML Command
Le
vel
4.2.1 OLC Period Timer Length

This describes the period of the OLC timer. When this period is up, OLC executes once and then
restarts automatically. The period of the timer is the period of the OLC action. The uplink OLC
and downlink OLC share the same timer.
4.2.2 Uplink or Downlink OLC Trigger Threshold and Release Threshold
This describes the thresholds for the system to determine that the uplink or downlink enters
overload status and the threshold for the system to determine that the uplink or downlink overload
is released.
4.2.3 Uplink or Downlink OLC Fast TF Restriction Times
This describes the uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction times, which indicate the number
of times for which the uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction is executed. The number of
uplink OLC fast TF restriction times is UlOlcFTFRstrctTimes, and the number of downlink
OLC fast TF restriction times is DlOlcFTFRstrctTimes.
4.2.4 Number of RABs Selected for the Uplink or Downlink OLC Fast TF Restriction
This describes the number of RABs selected for an uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction.
The number of RABs selected for an uplink OLC fast TF restriction is
UlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum, and the number of RABs selected for a downlink OLC fast TF
restriction is DlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum.
4.2.5 OLC Fast TF Data Rate Restriction Timer Length and Recover Timer Length
This describes the OLC fast TF data rate restriction timer length and recover timer length.
RateRstrctTimerLen specifies the period for which the MAC applies TF restriction to BE
subscribers in a downlink fast TF restriction. RateRecoverTimerLen specifies the period for
which the MAC applies TF recovery to BE subscribers when the downlink overload is released.
4.2.6 OLC Fast TF Data Rate Restriction Coefficient
This describes the data rate restriction coefficient for OLC fast TF restriction. The data rate
restriction coefficient indicates the degree of the rate restriction.
4.2.7 Number of RABs Released by the Uplink or Downlink Traffic Release
This describes the number of RABs that are released by an uplink or downlink traffic release.
The number of RABs released by an uplink traffic release is UlOlcTraffRelRabNum, and the
number of RABs released by a downlink traffic release is DlOlcTraffRelRabNum.

4-21
RAN
4.2.1 OLC Period Timer Length

This describes the period of the OLC timer. When this period is up, OLC executes once and then
restarts automatically. The period of the timer is the period of the OLC action. The uplink OLC
and downlink OLC share the same timer.
ID
OlcPeriodTimerLen
Value Range
100 to 86400000
Physical Scope
100 ms to 86400 s, with the step of 1 ms
Setting
The default value of OlcPeriodTimerLen is 3000, namely 3 s.
In the current overload control algorithm, all the uplink/downlink OLC actions (TF restriction
and user release) are executed in the period of the OLC timer.
When the uplink or downlink has overload, the system implements overload control and checks
whether the OLC period timer is started in the current cell. If the OLC period timer is not started,
the system starts the timer. If the OLC period timer is started, the system shares the timer.
When the OLC timer times out, the system checks the overload state of the cell. If the uplink or
downlink has overload, the system implement overload control of the uplink or downlink. If
both the uplink and the downlink have overload, the system implements the overload control
based on a comprehensive decision. When implementing the overload control, the system resets
the OLC timer. The system implements the overload control until both the uplink and the
downlink has no overload.
NOTE
When setting OlcPeriodTimerLen, consider the hysteresis for which the load monitoring responds to the
load change. For example, when the layer 3 filter coefficient is 6, the hysteresis for which the load
measurement responds to the step-function signals is about 2.8 s, namely that the system can trace the load
control effect about 3 s later after each load control. In this case, the OLC period timer length cannot be
smaller than 3 s.
OlcPeriodTimerLen along with ULOLCFTFRstrctUserNum,

DLOLCFTFRstrctUserNum, ULOLCFTFRSTRCTTimes, DLOLCFTFRSTRCTTimes,
ULOLCTraffRelUserNum, and DLOLCTraffRelUserNum determine the time it takes to
release the uplink/downlink overload.
4-22
If the OLC period is excessively long, the system may respond very slowly to overload.
If the OLC period is excessively short, unnecessary adjustment may occur before the
previous OLC action has taken effect, and therefore the system performance is affected.
RAN
Related Commands
Use SET LDCPERIOD to set and LST LDCPERIOD to query OlcPeriodTimerLen.
4.2.2 Uplink or Downlink OLC Trigger Threshold and Release

Threshold
This describes the thresholds for the system to determine that the uplink or downlink enters
overload status and the threshold for the system to determine that the uplink or downlink overload
is released.
ID
UlOlcTrigThd
DlOlcTrigThd
UlOlcRelThd
DlOlcRelThd
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
Setting
The default values of UlOlcTrigThd and DlOlcTrigThd are 95 (95%). The default values of
UlOlcRelThd and DlOlcRelThd are 80 (80%).
CAUTION
The OLC trigger threshold must be not higher than the OLC release threshold.
The system judges whether the uplink or downlink is in overload status on the basis of the uplink
or downlink OLC trigger threshold. If the cell load is higher than the threshold for consecutive
pre-determined times, the system is already in overload status for a long time. In this case, the
system performs operations of the OLC algorith, including fast TF restriction or even user
release, if the cell OLC switch is enabled.
The uplink handover admission threshold guarantees the stability of the system, so
UlOlcTrigThd must be higher than UlHOThd, and DlOlcTrigThd must be higher than
DlHOThd.
UlOlcRelThd and DlOlcRelThd indicates that the uplink and downlink have recovered to the
normal state (the overload is released). When the cell load is lower than the UlOlcRelThd and
DlOlcRelThd within a hysteresis, the system has already entered the normal state and stops the
uplink and downlink OLC. The uplink or downlink OLC release threshold must guarantee the

4-23
RAN
system stability. To ensure that the overload can be released after the system implements the
overload algorithm to limit the rate of BE services, the value of the uplink or downlink OLC
release threshold should not be much lower than or close to the OLC trigger threshold, or the
system state may have a ping-pong effect. The recommended difference between the OLC
release threshold and the OLC trigger threshold is higher than 10%.

l
The lower the OLC trigger threshold is, the easier the system is in the overload status. Since
OLC ultimately uses extreme method like releasing users to lower the load, an excessively
low value of the OLC trigger threshold is very detrimental to the system performance.
The lower the OLC release threshold is, the harder the system releases the overload.
Since the consequence of overload is not as severe as expected, it is desirable to set the two
parameters a bit higher given that the difference between OLC trigger threshold and OLC release
threshold is fixed.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLLDM to set, LST CELLLDM to query, and MOD CELLLDM to modify the
uplink or downlink OLC trigger threshold and release threshold.
4.2.3 Uplink or Downlink OLC Fast TF Restriction Times

This describes the uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction times, which indicate the number
of times for which the uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction is executed. The number of
uplink OLC fast TF restriction times is UlOlcFTFRstrctTimes, and the number of downlink
OLC fast TF restriction times is DlOlcFTFRstrctTimes.
ID
UlOlcFTFRstrctTimes
DlOlcFTFRstrctTimes
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0 to 100 times
Setting
After the uplink or downlink overload is triggered, the RNC immediately executes OLC by first
executing uplink/downlink fast TF restriction. The internal counter is incremented by 1 with
each execution. If the number of overloads does not exceed the OLC action threshold, the system
lowers the BE service rate by lowering TF to relieve the overload. If the number of overloads
exceeds the OLC action threshold, the previous operation has no obvious effect on alleviating
the overload and the system has to release users to solve the overload problem.
4-24

RAN

The lower the parameters are, the more likely the users are released, resulting in negative effect
on the system performance. If the parameters are excessively high, the overload status is released
slowly.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLOLC to set, LST CELLOLC to query, and MOD CELLOLC to modify the
uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction times.
4.2.4 Number of RABs Selected for the Uplink or Downlink OLC

Fast TF Restriction
This describes the number of RABs selected for an uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction.
The number of RABs selected for an uplink OLC fast TF restriction is
UlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum, and the number of RABs selected for a downlink OLC fast TF
restriction is DlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum.
ID
UlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum
DlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum
Value Range
1 to 10
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The OLC selects RABs on the basis of comprehensive priorities. It considers the service priority,
the value of ARP, and the bearer priority indication, and selects the RABs with lower priorities.
In the actual system, UlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum and DlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum can be set on
the basis of the actual circumstances.
l
If the high-rate subscribers occupy a high proportion, set UlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum and

DlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum to comparatively low values.
If the high-rate subscribers occupy a low proportion, set UlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum and

DlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum to comparatively high values.

The higher the parameters are, the more users are involved in fast TF restriction under the same
conditions, the quicker the cell load decreases, and the more user QoS is affected.

4-25
RAN
Related Commands
number of RABs selected for the uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction.
4.2.5 OLC Fast TF Data Rate Restriction Timer Length and Recover
Timer Length
This describes the OLC fast TF data rate restriction timer length and recover timer length.
RateRstrctTimerLen specifies the period for which the MAC applies TF restriction to BE
subscribers in a downlink fast TF restriction. RateRecoverTimerLen specifies the period for
which the MAC applies TF recovery to BE subscribers when the downlink overload is released.
ID
RateRstrctTimerLen
RateRecoverTimerLen
Value Range
1 to 65535
Physical Scope
1 ms to 65535 ms
Setting
l
The default value of RateRstrctTimerLen is 3000, namely 3 s.
The default value of RateRecoverTimerLen is 5000, namely 5 s.
Once the MAC layer receives an instruction to perform the fast TF restriction on a subscriber,
it periodically uses the rate restriction coefficient to restrict the maximum available TF of the
subscriber until it receives an overload release instruction. Therefore, every period specified by
RateRstrctTimerLen, apart from the new OLC-selected users who are TF restricted, the
previously selected users are also fast-TF restricted in an effort to release the overload more
quickly. In order to timely adjust the BE service rate according to the load, the value of
RateRstrctTimerLen shall be slightly higher than the system load response time after rate
adjustment and the period of overload detection.
To avoid the fast TF restriction on the same user and guarantee the QoS of a single user, set
RateRstrctTimerLen to the maximum value (65535).
Upon receiving the overload release instruction, the MAC layer periodically recovers the
maximum available TF of the previously restricted BE users according to the period specified
by RateRecoverTimerLen, and raises the maximum available TF to the superior level each
time.
4-26

RAN
CAUTION
RateRstrctTimerLen and RateRecoverTimerLen are effective only to the downlink. The
uplink fast TF restriction is performed by the UE. For the uplink fast TF restriction, the RNC
only delivers a new TFCS and randomly selects a comparatively bigger time length in the
signaling value scope. As soon as the time length selected by the RNC comes to an end, the UE
automatically releases the TF restriction.

The higher RateRstrctTimerLen is, the more slowly the BE service rate decreases. The lower
RateRstrctTimerLen is, the harder it is to receive the overload release instruction.
The higher RateRecoverTimerLen is, the more slowly the BE service rate recovers, while the
lower probability that the overload is triggered again in a short period. The lower
RateRecoverTimerLen is, the more quickly the BE service rate is recovered, but more
overloads occur.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLOLC to set, LST CELLOLC to query, and MOD CELLOLC to modify
RateRstrctTimerLen and RateRecoverTimerLen.
4.2.6 OLC Fast TF Data Rate Restriction Coefficient

This describes the data rate restriction coefficient for OLC fast TF restriction. The data rate
restriction coefficient indicates the degree of the rate restriction.
ID
RateRstrctCoef
Value Range
1 to 99
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value of RateRstrctCoef is 68, namely 68%.
When configuring RateRstrctCoef, comply with the following principles:
Guaranteee the rate control effect on the high speed services, such as the 384 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s,
and 144 kbit/s services.
When there are more than two transport blocks, the restriction on the biggest transport block
must be effective, that is, the rate of the transport block must decrease by at lest one level.

4-27
RAN
For the 384 kbit/s service, TTI = 10 MS, and the TB set is {0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 12}. Consuming that
the rate restriction coefficient is x, the restriction rules are as follows:
l
8<12x<12
4<12x2<8
2<12x3<4
Through calculation on the basis of the preceding rules, x can be set to 0.68.

The lower the parameter is, the more severe the rate is restricted. An excessive low
RateRstrctCoef, however, may affect the BE transmission delay. A high RateRstrctCoef
means loose restriction, which may be ineffective in alleviating the overload.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLOLC to set, LST CELLOLC to query, and MOD CELLOLC to modify
RateRstrctCoef.
4.2.7 Number of RABs Released by the Uplink or Downlink Traffic

Release
This describes the number of RABs that are released by an uplink or downlink traffic release.
The number of RABs released by an uplink traffic release is UlOlcTraffRelRabNum, and the
number of RABs released by a downlink traffic release is DlOlcTraffRelRabNum.
ID
UlOlcTraffRelRabNum
DlOlcTraffRelRabNum
Value Range
0 to 10
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The number of RABs that are released by an uplink or downlink traffic release should be
considered together with the uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction times and the number
of RABs selected for the uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction.
When the uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction times exceed the threshold set by
UlOlcFTFRstrctTimes or DlOlcFTFRstrctTimes, the OLC starts releasing users. For the
users of a single service, the releasing of RABs means the complete releasing of the users. The
releasing of RABs causes call drops, so UlOlcFTFRstrctTimes or DlOlcFTFRstrctTimes
should be set to a low value.
4-28

RAN

Higher values of these parameters get the cell load to decrease more obviously, but the QoS will
be affected.
Related Commands
number of RABs released by an uplink or downlink traffic release.

4-29
RAN
PS Service Rate Control Parameters
About This Chapter

This describes the PS service rate control parameters: the service-related thresholds, DCCC
parameters, link stability parameters, state transfer parameters, PS active parameters, and so on.
5.1 BE Service Related Threshold Parameters
The common configurable BE service related threshold parameters are listed here.
5.2 Dynamic Channel Configuration Parameters Based on Traffic
This describes dynamic channel configuration parameters based on traffic.
5.3 Dynamic Channel Configuration Parameters Based on Throughput
This describes dynamic channel configuration parameters based on throughput.
5.4 Dynamic Channel Configuration Parameters Based on Link Quality
This describes dynamic channel configuration parameters based on link quality.
5.5 State Transition Parameters
This describes the state transition parameters.
5.6 PS Inactive
The common configurable PS inactive parameters are listed here.

5-1
RAN
5.1 BE Service Related Threshold Parameters

The common configurable BE service related threshold parameters are listed here.
Table 5-1 List of BE service related threshold parameters
5-2
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
Level
BeBitRateThd
BE service
handover rate
threshold
D384, that is,

384 kbit/s
Set or Modify:SET
HOCOMM
RNC

Query:LST
HOCOMM
RAN
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
R99GoldIAVUl
GBR
Uplink and
downlink BE
D64, namely
64 kbit/s
Set or modify: SET

USERGBR
R99GoldIAVDl
GBR
Level
Query: LST
USERGBR
R99SilverIAVU
lGBR
R99SilverIAVD
lGBR
R99CopperIAV
UlGBR
R99CopperIAV
DlGBR
HSPAGoldIAV
UlGBR
HSPAGoldIAV
DlGBR
HSPASilverIA
VUlGBR
HSPASilverIA
VDlGBR
HSPACopperIA
VUlGBR
HSPACopperIA
VDlGBR
R99GoldBGDU
lGBR
R99GoldBGDD
lGBR
R99SilverBGD
UlGBR
R99SilverBGD
DlGBR
R99CopperBG
DUlGBR
R99CopperBG
DDlGBR
HSPAGoldBG
DUlGBR
HSPAGoldBG
DDlGBR
HSPASilverBG
DUlGBR
HSPASilverBG
DDlGBR

5-3
RAN
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
HSPACopperB
GDUlGBR
service
guarantee bit
rate
HSPACopperB
GDDlGBR
3
UlStrTransMod
eOnHsupa
Streaming
service
HSUPA
transmission
mode
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
NonScheduled
Set or modify:SET
FRC
Level
Query:LST FRC
5.1.1 BE Service Handover Rate Threshold

This describes the Best Effort (BE) service handover rate threshold. The BE service handover
rate threshold is used to determine whether to perform soft handovers for the BE service on the
DCH. When the maximum rate of the transmission channel of the BE service is lower than or
equal to the BE service handover rate threshold, the system has the subscriber perform a soft
handover to guarantee the service quality of the subscriber. When the maximum rate of the
transmission channel of the BE service exceeds the BE service handover rate threshold, the
system has the subscriber perform an intra-frequency hard handover to reduce the impact upon
the system capacity.
5.1.2 Uplink/Downlink BE Service Insured Rate
This describes the insured bit rate configured for BE services with different priorities. DCH and
H share a set of parameters.
5.1.3 Streaming Service HSUPA Transmission Mode
This describes the HSUPA transmission mode switch for streaming services. The parameter is
used to control the E-DCH data transmission mode of the streaming service and is valid only
when the mapping from the streaming service to E-DCH is available.
5.1.1 BE Service Handover Rate Threshold

This describes the Best Effort (BE) service handover rate threshold. The BE service handover
rate threshold is used to determine whether to perform soft handovers for the BE service on the
DCH. When the maximum rate of the transmission channel of the BE service is lower than or
equal to the BE service handover rate threshold, the system has the subscriber perform a soft
handover to guarantee the service quality of the subscriber. When the maximum rate of the
transmission channel of the BE service exceeds the BE service handover rate threshold, the
system has the subscriber perform an intra-frequency hard handover to reduce the impact upon
the system capacity.
ID
BeBitRateThd
Value Range
Enum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384)
5-4

RAN
Physical Scope
Enum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384) kbit/s
Setting
The default value is D384, namely 384 kbit/s.

The higher BeBitRateThd is, the more resources are consumed, but the better the QoS becomes.
Related Commands
Use SET HOCOMM to set and LST HOCOMM to query BeBitRateThd.
5.1.2 Uplink/Downlink BE Service Insured Rate

This describes the insured bit rate configured for BE services with different priorities. DCH and
H share a set of parameters.
Parameter ID
R99GoldIAVUlGBR
R99GoldIAVDlGBR
R99SilverIAVUlGBR
R99SilverIAVDlGBR
R99CopperIAVUlGBR
R99CopperIAVDlGBR
HSPAGoldIAVUlGBR
HSPAGoldIAVDlGBR
HSPASilverIAVUlGBR
HSPASilverIAVDlGBR
HSPACopperIAVUlGBR
HSPACopperIAVDlGBR
R99GoldBGDUlGBR
R99GoldBGDDlGBR
R99SilverBGDUlGBR
R99SilverBGDDlGBR
R99CopperBGDUlGBR
R99CopperBGDDlGBR
HSPAGoldBGDUlGBR

5-5
RAN
HSPAGoldBGDDlGBR
HSPASilverBGDUlGBR
HSPASilverBGDDlGBR
HSPACopperBGDUlGBR
HSPACopperBGDDlGBR
Value Range
D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, and D384

8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, and 384 (unit: kbit/s)
Parameter Setting
The default value is D64, which stands for 64 kbit/s.

You can assign different GBRs to the users with different priorities to show service
differentiation. The QoS of the users with higher priorities is better. The user access, however,
becomes more difficult.
Relevant Commands
Use the SET USERGBR command for configuration and use the LST USERGBR command
for query.
5.1.3 Streaming Service HSUPA Transmission Mode

This describes the HSUPA transmission mode switch for streaming services. The parameter is
used to control the E-DCH data transmission mode of the streaming service and is valid only
when the mapping from the streaming service to E-DCH is available.
ID
UlStrTransModeOnHsupa
Value Range
Scheduled, Non-Scheduled
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The default setting is Non-Scheduled.
5-6

RAN

None.
Related Commands
For the RNC level, use SET FRC to set and LST FRC to query UlStrTransModeOnHsupa.
5.2 Dynamic Channel Configuration Parameters Based on

Traffic
This describes dynamic channel configuration parameters based on traffic.
Table 5-2 List of dynamic channel configuration parameters
N
o.
Parameter
ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default Value
Relevant
Command
Level
Event4aThd
Traffic upper
threshold
D1024, that is,

1024 bytes
RNC
Event4bThd
Traffic lower
threshold
D128, that is, 128

bytes
TimetoTrigg
er4A
Time to trigger
event 4A
D240, that is, 240

ms
TimetoTrigg
er4B
Time to Trigger
event 4B
D2560, that is,

2.56 s
Set: ADD
TYPRABDCCCM
C
Query: LST
TYPRAB
Modify: MOD
TYPRABDCCCM
C
UlDcccRate
Thd
Uplink DCCC
rate thresholds
D64 (64 kbit/s)
RNC
DlDcccRate
Thd
Downlink DCCC
rate thresholds
D64 (64 kbit/s)
Set or modify: SET

DCCC
Query: LST DCCC
UlMidRateT
hd
Uplink middle
rate thresholds
D128 (128 kbit/

s)
DlMidRateT
hd
Downlink middle
rate thresholds
D128 (128 kbit/

s)
UlMidRateC
alc
Uplink middle
rate calculate
method
HAND_APPOI
NT
10
DlMidRateC
alc
Downlink middle
rate calculate
method
HAND_APPOI
NT
11
UlRateUpA
djLevel
Uplink rate
increase adjust
level
3_Rates

5-7
RAN
N
o.
Parameter
ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default Value
12
DlRateUpA
djLevel
Downlink
increase adjust
level
3_Rates
13
UlRateDnA
djLevel
Uplink rate
decrease adjust
level
3_Rates
14
DlRateDnA
djLevel
Downlink rate
decrease adjust
level
3_Rates
15
LittleRateTh
d
Low activity
bitrate threshold
D64, that is, 64

kbit/s
Relevant
Command
Level
5.2.1 Traffic Upper Threshold

This describes the upper threshold of the traffic, which is used to check whether there is any
data to be transmitted.
5.2.2 Traffic Lower Threshold
This describes the lower threshold of the traffic. If the RLC buffer payload is lower than the
lower threshold of the traffic for a certain period, the system reports the 4B event. The 4B event
is implemented to detect for the decreasing of traffic. When the traffic transport is about to be
finished, the traffic in the buffer soon decreases to zero.
5.2.3 Time to Trigger Event 4A
This describes the time to trigger the 4A event. When the traffic exceeds the upper threshold for
a certain period, the system reports the 4A event.
5.2.4 Time to Trigger Event 4B
This describes the time to trigger the 4B event. When the traffic is lower than the lower threshold
for a certain period, the system reports the 4B event.
5.2.5 Uplink and Downlink Rate Adjust Levels
These parameters are used to judge uplink and downlink 2 rates or 3 rates adjusting in DCCC.
5.2.6 Uplink or Downlink DCCC Rate Threshold
When the uplink or downlink maximum rate applied for the BE service is not higher than the
uplink or downlink DCCC rate threshold, the system does not reconfigure channels according
to the uplink or downlink traffic.
5.2.7 Uplink or Downlink Middle Rate Calculate Method
This describes the uplink or downlink middle rate calculate method which can be set to
HAND_APPOINT or AUTO_CALC.
5.2.8 Uplink or Downlink DCCC Middle Rate
This describes the uplink or downlink DCCC middle rate. The uplink or downlink DCCC middle
rate is configured when 3 rate adjusting in DCCC is used and the middle rate computing method
is HAND_APPOINT. If the uplink or downlink DCCC middle rate is not configured, the middle
rate equals half of the maximum rate.
5.2.9 Low Activity Rate Threshold
5-8

RAN
This describes the low activity rate threshold. When the PS BE service rate has reduced to the
rate threshold of DCCC, but the UE cannot transfer to the CELL_FACH state for some reasons
(for example: PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH is off; UE has CS service), the PS BE service
rate is reduced to the low activity rate threshold if the PS BE service satisfies the requirement
of D2F.
5.2.1 Traffic Upper Threshold

This describes the upper threshold of the traffic, which is used to check whether there is any
data to be transmitted.
ID
Event4aThd
Value Range
Enum (D16, D32, D64, D128, D256, D512, D1024, D2k, D3k, D4k, D6k, D8k, D12k, D16k,
D24k, D32k, D48k, D64k, D96k, D128k, D192k, D256k, D384k, D512k, D768k)
Physical Scope
Enum (16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2k, 3k, 4k, 6k, 8k, 12k, 16k, 24k, 32k, 48k, 64k, 96k,
128k, 192k, 256k, 384k, 512k, 768k) bytes
Setting
The default value is D1024, namely 1024 bytes. The parameter is set separately in downlink and
uplink.

Event 4A: The transmission channel traffic (which is the buffered traffic in DCCC) exceeds an
absolute threshold. When this event occurs, data transmission is accelerated through the increase
of channel transmission bandwidth.
The setting of the traffic upper threshold is used to check whether there are data to be transmitted.
Therefore, to quickly satisfy the demand of data transmission, Event4AThd can be configured
to a comparatively low value. If Event4AThd is excessively low, the channel reconfiguration
may be triggered to increase bandwidth even when users have no enough data to be transmitted.
Related Commands
For service-oriented parameters:
Use ADD TYPRABDCCCMC to set, MOD TYPRABDCCCMC to modify, and LST
TYPRAB to query Event4AThd.
5.2.2 Traffic Lower Threshold

This describes the lower threshold of the traffic. If the RLC buffer payload is lower than the
lower threshold of the traffic for a certain period, the system reports the 4B event. The 4B event
is implemented to detect for the decreasing of traffic. When the traffic transport is about to be
finished, the traffic in the buffer soon decreases to zero.

5-9
RAN
ID
Event4BThd
Value Range
Enum (D8, D16,D32, D64, D128,D256, D512, D1024, D2k, D3k, D4k, D6k, D8k, D12k, D16k,
D24k, D32k, D48k, D64k, D96k, D128k, D192k, D256k, D384k, D512k)
Physical Scope
Enum (8, 16,32, 64, 128,256, 512, 1024, 2k, 3k, 4k, 6k, 8k, 12k, 16k, 24k, 32k, 48k, 64k, 96k,
128k, 192k, 256k, 384k, 512k) bytes
Setting
The default value is D128(rate < 128k), D256(rate >= 128k). The parameter is set separately in
downlink and uplink.

Event 4B: The transmission channel traffic (which is the buffered traffic in DCCC) becomes
lower than an absolute threshold. When this event occurs, the channel transmission bandwidth
is reduced to avoid resource waste.
The 4B event is used to check whether the traffic becomes lighter. When the service transmission
is about to finish, the traffic in the buffer decreases rapidly until it becomes zero. Therefore,
Event4BThd can be set to a low value. In addition, when the service has a stable but low source
rate, Event4BThd can be set to a proper value to detect the low source rate and decrease the
channel bandwidth. The tests on the FTP service and services with low source rates prove that
Event4BThd can be set to a value close to the size of the transport block to detect the demand
of decreasing the bandwidth caused by the FTP service and services with low source rates.
Related Commands
TYPRAB to query Event4BThd.
5.2.3 Time to Trigger Event 4A

This describes the time to trigger the 4A event. When the traffic exceeds the upper threshold for
a certain period, the system reports the 4A event.
ID
TimetoTrigger4A
Value Range
D2560, D5000)
5-10

RAN
Physical Scope
Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280,2560,5000) ms
Setting
The default value is D240, namely 240 ms. The parameter is set separately in uplink and
downlink.

TimetoTrigger4A can be properly set to avoid the unnecessary triggering of traffic events
caused by the unstable traffic.
If TimetoTrigger4A is set to an excessively high value, the reporting of the 4A event will be
delayed, and the performance of the traffic measurement report to trace the transmission
requirements for service source data is poor. Before setting TimetoTrigger4A, you need analyze
the changes of buffer traffic when there are data to be transmitted.
Related Commands
TYPRAB to query TimetoTrigger4A.
5.2.4 Time to Trigger Event 4B

This describes the time to trigger the 4B event. When the traffic is lower than the lower threshold
for a certain period, the system reports the 4B event.
ID
TimetoTrigger4B
Value Range
D2560, D5000)
Physical Scope
Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000) ms
Setting
The default value is D2560, namely 2560 ms. The parameter is set separately in uplink and
downlink.
The TimetoTrigger4B is used to prevent frequent triggering caused by small fluctuation of the
traffic. This parameter indicates the time from the moment when the traffic volume exceeds the
lower threshold to the moment when an event 4B is triggered. This parameter is used to avoid
unnecessary reports triggered by traffic fluctuation

5-11
RAN

TimetoTrigger4B can be properly set to avoid the unnecessary triggering of traffic events
caused by the unstable traffic.
Before setting TimetoTrigger4B, you need analyze the changes of buffer traffic when there are
data to be transmitted. You can set TimetoTrigger4B to a comparatively high value to guarantee
a good performance of service transmission.
The higher the parameter value is, the harder it is to trigger event 4B. In this case frequent
adjustments of the BE service rate can be avoided. An extremely high value, however, may lead
to slow system responses. The lower the parameter value is, the easier it is to trigger event 4B.
A low value, however, may lead to frequent event triggering under small fluctuation of the traffic.
Related Commands
TYPRAB to query TimetoTrigger4B.
5.2.5 Uplink and Downlink Rate Adjust Levels

These parameters are used to judge uplink and downlink 2 rates or 3 rates adjusting in DCCC.
Parameter ID
UlRateUpAdjLevel
UlRateDnAdjLevel
DlRateUpAdjLevel
DlRateDnAdjLevel
Value Range
Enum(2_Rates, 3_Rates)

1, 2
Parameter Setting
The default values are both 3_Rates.

None.
Relevant Commands
The RNC-oriented parameters: set them through SET DCCC and query them through LST
DCCC.
5-12

RAN
5.2.6 Uplink or Downlink DCCC Rate Threshold

When the uplink or downlink maximum rate applied for the BE service is not higher than the
uplink or downlink DCCC rate threshold, the system does not reconfigure channels according
to the uplink or downlink traffic.
ID
UlDcccRateThd
DlDcccRateThd
Value Range
Enum(D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384)
Physical Scope
Enum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384) kbit/s
Setting
The default value of the uplink or downlink DCCC rate threshold is D64, namely 64 kbit/s.

The uplink DCCC rate threshold cannot be set to an excessively low value, and it should be
higher than the minimum rate of the reverse bandwidth required by the 384 kbit/s service. In
this way, the uplink measurement reports can be effectively reduced.
To set the downlink DCCC rate threshold, consider the gain of code resource.
l
If the downlink DCCC rate threshold is excessively low, the DCCC algorithm is also
implemented even when the applied bandwidth is rather small, and there is only a low
algorithm gain.
If the downlink DCCC rate threshold is excessively high, the DCCC algorithm cannot be
implemented for some high bandwidth rates, and the code resource is wasted.
Related Commands
For RNC-oriented parameters:
Use SET DCCC to set and LST DCCC to query UlDcccRateThd and DlDcccRateThd.
5.2.7 Uplink or Downlink Middle Rate Calculate Method

This describes the uplink or downlink middle rate calculate method which can be set to
HAND_APPOINT or AUTO_CALC.
ID
UlMidRateCalc
DlMidRateCalc

5-13
RAN
Value Range
AUTO_CALC, HAND_APPOINT
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The default value is HAND_APPOINT.
This parameter is used to decide the uplink/downlink middle bite rate calculation method that
applies when uplink/downlink Rate increase adjust level or uplink/downlink Rate decrease
adjust level is 3_Rates.
If uplink/downlink middle bite rate calculate method is set to AUTO_CALC, the value of uplink/
downlink middle bite rate threshold is automatically calculated by the system. The value of
uplink/downlink middle bite rate threshold is equal to the RB rate closest to the highest rate
divided by two.

None.
Related Commands
Use SET DCCC to set and LST DCCC to query UlMidRateCalc and DlMidRateCalc.
5.2.8 Uplink or Downlink DCCC Middle Rate

This describes the uplink or downlink DCCC middle rate. The uplink or downlink DCCC middle
rate is configured when 3 rate adjusting in DCCC is used and the middle rate computing method
is HAND_APPOINT. If the uplink or downlink DCCC middle rate is not configured, the middle
rate equals half of the maximum rate.
ID
UlMidRateThd
DlMidRateThd
Value Range
Enum (D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384)
Physical Scope
Enum (16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384) kbit/s
Setting
5-14

RAN
UlMidRateThd and DlMidRateThd are needed only when UlMidRateCalc and

DlMidRateCal (the uplink or downlink rate calculating method) are set to
HAND_APPOINT.

None.
Related Commands
Use SET DCCC to set and LST DCCC to query UlMidRateThd and DlMidRateThd.
5.2.9 Low Activity Rate Threshold

This describes the low activity rate threshold. When the PS BE service rate has reduced to the
rate threshold of DCCC, but the UE cannot transfer to the CELL_FACH state for some reasons
(for example: PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH is off; UE has CS service), the PS BE service
rate is reduced to the low activity rate threshold if the PS BE service satisfies the requirement
of D2F.
ID
LittleRateThd
Value Range
Enum (D0, D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384).
Physical Scope
Enum (0, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 384) kbit/s
Setting

None.
Related Commands
Use SET DCCC to set and LST DCCC to query LittleRateThd.

Throughput
This describes dynamic channel configuration parameters based on throughput.

5-15
RAN
Table 5-3 List of DCCC parameters

N Parameter ID
o
.
Parameter
Meaning
Default Value
Relevant
Command
Leve
l
HSUPA DCCC
strategy
RATE_UP_AN
D_DOWN_ON
_EDCH
Set:SET DCCC
RNC
HSUPA UpLink
rate adjust set
Rate_128Kbps,
Rate_256Kbps,
Rate_608Kbps
Set:SET
EDCHRATEAD
JUSTSET
HsupaDcccStg
EdchRateAdjust
Set
Query:LST
DCCC
Query:LST
EDCHRATEAD
JUSTSET
3
HsupaInitialRate
Initial rate of
HSUPA BE traffic
D64
Set:SET FRC
Query:LST FRC
5.3.1 HSUPA DCCC Strategy

This describes the parameter used to set the HSUPA DCCC strategy.
5.3.2 HSUPA UpLink Rate Adjust Set
This describes the parameter used to set the HSUPA uplink rate adjust set.
5.3.3 Initial Rate of HSUPA BE Rraffic
This describes the parameter used to set the initial rate of HSUPA BE traffic.
5.3.1 HSUPA DCCC Strategy

This describes the parameter used to set the HSUPA DCCC strategy.
ID
HsupaDcccStg
Value Range
RATE_UP_AND_DOWN_ON_EDCH, RATE_UP_ONLY_ON_EDCH
Physical Scope
EDCH rate up and rate down, EDCH rate up
Setting
The default value is RATE_UP_AND_DOWN_ON_EDCH.
5-16

RAN

The RATE_UP_AND_DOWN_ON_EDCH strategy means that the rate can be both downsized
and upsized.
The RATE_UP_ONLY_ON_EDCH strategy means that the rate can only be upsized.
This means UE can transit to CELL_FACH state from CELL_EDCH state at any rate.
Related Commands
Use SET DCCC to set and LST DCCC to query HsupaDcccStg.
5.3.2 HSUPA UpLink Rate Adjust Set

This describes the parameter used to set the HSUPA uplink rate adjust set.
ID
EdchRateAdjustSet
Value Range
Rate_8Kbps, Rate_16Kbps, Rate_32Kbps, Rate_64Kbps, Rate_128Kbps, Rate_144Kbps,
Rate_256Kbps, Rate_384Kbps, Rate_608Kbps, Rate_1450Kbps, Rate_2890Kbps,
Rate_5760Kbps
Physical Scope
8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 384 kbit/s, 608 kbit/s,
1450 kbit/s, 2890 kbit/s, 5760 kbit/s
Setting
Rate_8Kbps: Unselected
Rate_128Kbps: Selected

5-17
RAN

The more rate levels selected, the longer time subscribers reach to MBR. Subscribers feel bad
but the network resource utilization increase.
The less rate levels selected, the shorter time subscribers reach to MBR. Subscribers feel good
but the network resource utilization decrease.
Related Commands
Use SET EDCHRATEADJUSTSET to set and LST EDCHRATEADJUSTSET to query
EdchRateAdjustSet.
5.3.3 Initial Rate of HSUPA BE Rraffic

This describes the parameter used to set the initial rate of HSUPA BE traffic.
ID
HsupaInitialRate
Value Range
D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384, D608, D1450, D2048, D2890, D5760
Physical Scope
1450 kbit/s, 2890 kbit/s, 5760 kbit/s
Setting
When DCCC algorithm switch and HSUPA DCCC algorithm switch are enabled, the uplink
initial bit rate will be set to this value if the uplink maximum bit rate is higher than the initial bit
rate.

The feel of subscribers and network resource utilization are considered in setting this parameter.
Related Commands
Use SET FRC to set and LST FRC to query HsupaInitialRate.
5-18

RAN

Link Quality
This describes dynamic channel configuration parameters based on link quality.
Table 5-4 List of DCCC parameters
S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Defaul
t
Config
uration
MML Command
Le
vel
Uplink quality
measurement
swithes
BeUlEv
TrigInd:
SINGL
E
Set:SET QOSACT
RN
C
BeUlEvTri
gInd
BeUlQos6
A1McSwit
ch
Query:LST QOSACT
BeUlQo
s6A1Mc
Switch:
YES
BeUlQos5
AMcSwitc
h
BeUlQo
s5AMc
Switch:
YES
BeUlQos6
DMcSwitc
h
BeUlQo
s6DMc
Switch:
YES
2
UlThd6A1
Uplink quality
transmit power
measurement
threshold
UlThd6A2
UlThd6B1
UlThd6B2
UlThd6
A2
UlThd6
B2: 10
dB
StaBlkNum
5A
Thd5A
UlThd6
A1
UlThd6
B1: 2 dB
Uplink quality
block error rate
measurement
threshold
Set or modify or remove:ADD

TYPRABQUALITYMEAS,
MOD
TYPRABQUALITYMEAS,
RMV
TYPRABQUALITYMEAS
RA
B
Query:LST
TYPRABQUALITYMEAS
StaBlkN
um5A:
500
Thd5A:
280

5-19
RAN
S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Defaul
t
Config
uration
MML Command
Le
vel
Downlink quality
measurement
swithes
NO
Set:SET QOSACT
RN
C
Downlink quality
code transmit
power
measurement
threshold
2 (1 dB)
SrncBeDlR
lcQosSwitc
h
Query:LST QOSACT
DrncBeDl
RlcQosSwi
tch
5
ThdEa
ThdEb

TYPRABQUALITYMEAS,
MOD
TYPRABQUALITYMEAS,
RMV
TYPRABQUALITYMEAS
RA
B
Query:LST
TYPRABQUALITYMEAS
6
EventAThr
ed
EventBThr
ed
Downlink quality
downlink RLC
measurement
threshold
EventA
Thred:
160
(16%)

TYPRABRLC, MOD
TYPRABRLC, RMV
TYPRABRLC
EventB
Thred:
80(8%)
QueryLST TYPRABRLC
RNC level:
Set:SET DCCC
Query:LST DCCC
Cell level:
Set:ADD CELLDCCC
Query:LST CELLDCCC
UlFullCvr
Rate
Uplink full
coverage rate
64kbit/s
DlFullCvr
Rate
Downlink full
coverage rate
32kbit/s
RA
B
RN
C/
CE
LL
5.4.1 Uplink Quality Measurement Switches

This describes the parameters used to specify the strategy of uplink quality measurement.
5.4.2 Uplink Quality Transmit Power Measurement Threshold
The parameters and UE maximum transmit power specify the threshold of 6A1, 6A2, 6B1, and
6B2 event.
5.4.3 Uplink Quality Block Error Rate Measurement Threshold
This describes the uplink quality block error rate 5A event threshold.
5-20

RAN
5.4.4 Downlink Quality Measurement Swithes

This parameters are used to specify the strategy of downlink quality measurement.
5.4.5 Downlink Quality Code Transmit Power Measurement Threshold
This describes relative threshold of the Ea event. The parameter and the maximum transmit
power determine the event Ea/Eb/Fa/Fb threshold of the DL DPCCH power.
5.4.6 Downlink Quality Downlink RLC Measurement Threshold
This describes the parametes, EventAThred and EventBThred.
5.4.7 Uplink Full Coverage Rate
This describes the uplink full coverage rate.
5.4.8 Downlink Full Coverage Rate
This describes the downlink full coverage rate.
5.4.1 Uplink Quality Measurement Switches

This describes the parameters used to specify the strategy of uplink quality measurement.
ID
BeUlEvTrigInd
BeUlQos6A1McSwitch
BeUlQos5AMcSwitch
BeUlQos6DMcSwitch
Value Range
BeUlEvTrigInd: SINGLE, COMBINE
BeUlQos6A1McSwitch, BeUlQos5AMcSwitch and BeUlQos6DMcSwitch: YES, NO
Physical Scope
BeUlEvTrigInd: SINGLE, COMBINE.
BeUlQos6A1McSwitch, BeUlQos5AMcSwitch and BeUlQos6DMcSwitch: YES, NO
Setting
The default value of BeUlEvTrigInd is: SINGLE
The default value of BeUlQos6A1McSwitch, BeUlQos5AMcSwitch and BeUlQos6DMcSwitch
are: YES

It specifies the strategy of uplink quality measurement by UE uplink transmit power, or uplink
BLER, or both UE uplink transmit power and uplink BLER. The COMBIN type is recommended
to ensure the stability of link, but the scope is smaller than the SINGLE type.

5-21
RAN
Related Commands
Use SET QOSACT to set and LST QOSACT to query the parameters.
5.4.2 Uplink Quality Transmit Power Measurement Threshold

The parameters and UE maximum transmit power specify the threshold of 6A1, 6A2, 6B1, and
6B2 event.
ID
UlThd6A1
UlThd6A2
UlThd6B1
UlThd6B2
Value Range
0 to 82
Physical Scope
0 to 82 dB, step: 1 dB
Setting
The default value of UlThd6A1 and UlThd6B1 is: 2 dB
The default value of UlThd6A2 and UlThd6B2 is: 10 dB

The higher UlThd6A1 and UlThd6B1, more sooner to trigger 6A1 and 6B1 event, more easily
to down-speeding, so that keep the stability of link but the scope is smaller.
The higher UlThd6A2 and UlThd6B2, more sooner to trigger 6A2 and 6B2 event, more easily
to not up-speeding, so that keep the stability of link but the scope is smaller.
Related Commands
Set or modify or remove: ADD TYPRABQUALITYMEAS, MOD
TYPRABQUALITYMEAS, RMV TYPRABQUALITYMEAS. query: LST
TYPRABQUALITYMEAS.
5.4.3 Uplink Quality Block Error Rate Measurement Threshold

This describes the uplink quality block error rate 5A event threshold.
5-22

RAN
ID
StaBlkNum5A
Thd5A
Value Range
1 to 512
Physical Scope
1 to 512
Setting
The default value of StaBlkNum5A is 500.
This parameter defines the length of slide window.
The default value of Thd5A is 280.
This parameter sets the threshold for the number of wrong blocks of uplink CRC. If the number
of wrong blocks statisticized within the length of one slide window is larger than the threshold,
5A event is reported.

The larger the threshold is, the more difficult to trigger 5A event, and the easier to cause a call
drop. The smaller the threshold is, the easier to trigger 5A event and cause unnecessary downspeeding and handover, thus affecting the QoS.
Related Commands
TYPRABQUALITYMEAS, RMV TYPRABQUALITYMEAS. query: LST
TYPRABQUALITYMEAS.
5.4.4 Downlink Quality Measurement Swithes

This parameters are used to specify the strategy of downlink quality measurement.
ID
SrncBeDlRlcQosSwitch
DrncBeDlRlcQosSwitch
Value Range
YES, NO

5-23
RAN
Physical Scope
YES, NO
Setting
The default value of SrncBeDlRlcQosSwitch and DrncBeDlRlcQosSwitch are NO.
The parameters specify that downlink RLC is necessary or not.

The combination of downlink code transmit power and downlink RLC can make the
measurement more strictly to ensure the stability of link, but make the scope be smaller.
Related Commands
Use SET QOSACT to set and LST QOSACT to query the parameters.
5.4.5 Downlink Quality Code Transmit Power Measurement

Threshold
This describes relative threshold of the Ea event. The parameter and the maximum transmit
power determine the event Ea/Eb/Fa/Fb threshold of the DL DPCCH power.
ID
ThdEa
ThdEb
Value Range
ThdEa, ThdEb0 to 111
Physical Scope
ThdEa, ThdEb: 0 dB to 55.5 dB, with the step of 0.5 dB
Setting
The default value of ThdEa and ThdEb is 2, namely 1 dB.
5-24
The higher EventEaThd is, the lower the absolute threshold for event Ea is, and it is easy
to trigger event Ea and it is useful for link stability. On the other hand, the service coverage
planning is much influenced by a high EventEaThd.
The lower EventEaThd is, the more likely it is to guarantee the link stability and the less
service coverage planning is affected.
RAN
Related Commands
ThdEa and ThdEb:
TYPRABQUALITYMEAS and RMV TYPRABQUALITYMEAS. Query: LST
TYPRABQUALITYMEAS.
5.4.6 Downlink Quality Downlink RLC Measurement Threshold

This describes the parametes, EventAThred and EventBThred.
ID
EventAThred
EventBThred
Value Range
0 to 1000
Physical Scope
0 to 100%, step: 0.1%.
Setting
The default value of EventAThred is 160, namely 16.
The default value of EventBThred is 80, namely 8.

The lower EventAThred is, it is easier to trigger event A and it is useful for link stability. On
the other hand, the service coverage planning is much influenced by a low EventAThred. The
higher EventAThred is, the more likely it is to guarantee the link stability and the less service
coverage planning is affected.
Related Commands
For Service-oriented parameters:
Set or modify or remove: ADD TYPRABRLC, MOD TYPRABRLC and RMV
TYPRABRLC. Query: LST TYPRABRLC.
5.4.7 Uplink Full Coverage Rate

This describes the uplink full coverage rate.
ID
ULFullCvrRate

5-25
RAN
Value Range
Enum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384)
Physical Scope
Enum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384) kbit/s
Setting

The uplink full coverage rate is the maximum uplink service rate that is reached when a cell is
totally covered under some bearer.
If the maximum rate of a BE service is excessively low, the DCCC algorithm cannot easily
control the rate and requires more handling workload. Therefore, only the BE services with an
uplink maximum rate higher than the threshold rate can perform the uplink coverage-based
DCCC algorithm control.
Related Commands
Use SET DCCC to set and LST DCCC to query ULFullCvrRate.
For cell-oriented parameters:
Use ADD CELLDCCC to set, LST CELLDCCC to query, and MOD CELLDCCC to modify
ULFullCvrRate.
5.4.8 Downlink Full Coverage Rate

This describes the downlink full coverage rate.
ID
DLFullCvrRate
Value Range
Enum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384)
Physical Scope
Enum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384) kbit/s
Setting
5-26

RAN

The downlink full coverage rate is the maximum downlink service rate that is reached when the
cell is totally covered. If the current rate is higher than the full coverage rate, lower the rate to
the full coverage rate after the downlink TCP is limited. If the current rate is lower than or equal
to the full coverage rate, lower the rate to the minimum guaranteed rate. If the Ea event is reported
again, disconnect the links.
If the maximum rate of a BE service is excessively low, the DCCC algorithm cannot easily
control the rate and requires more handling workload. Therefore, the downlink coverage-based
DCCC algorithm control can be implemented for only the BE services of which the downlink
maximum rate is higher than the threshold rate.
Related Commands
Use SET DCCC to set and LST DCCC to query DLFullCvrRate.
For cell-oriented parameters:
Use ADD CELLDCCC to set, LST CELLDCCC to query, and MOD CELLDCCC to modify
DLFullCvrRate.
5.5 State Transition Parameters

This describes the state transition parameters.
Table 5-5 List of state transition parameters
S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
FACH to DCH traffic D1024,

namely
report threshold
1024
bytes
FtoDTVMTh
d
RtFtoDHTvm
Thd
Defaul
t
Config
uratio
n
MML Command
Lev
el
Set or modify: SET

UESTATETRANS
RN
C
Query: LST
UESTATETRANS
BeFtoHTvm
Thd
FtoETvmThd

5-27
RAN
S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
FACH to DCH traffic D240,

namely
time totrigger
240 ms
FtoDTvmTim
eToTrig
RtFtoDHTvm
TimeToTrig
Defaul
t
Config
uratio
n
MML Command
Lev
el
BeFtoHTvm
TimeToTrig
FtoETvmTim
eToTrig
3
DtoFStateTra
nsTimer
DCH to FACH state

transition timer
5s
RtDH2FState
TransTimer
BeH2FStateT
ransTimer
E2FStateTran
sTimer
4
D2F2PTVM
THD
BeH2FTvmT
hd
RtDH2FTvm
Thd
DCH to FACH traffic D64,

namely
report threshold
64
bytes
E2FThr
ouThd:
8 kbps
E2FThrouTh
d
5-28

RAN
S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
DCH to FACH traffic D2FTv

mTime
time totrigger
ToTrig,
BeH2F
TvmTi
meToT
rig, and
E2FThr
ouTime
ToTrig:
D0,
namly 0
ms
D2FTvmTim
eToTrig
RtDH2FTvm
TimeToTrig
BeH2FTvmT
imeToTrig
E2FThrouTi
meToTrig
Defaul
t
Config
uratio
n
MML Command
Lev
el
RtDH2
FTvmT
imeToT
rig:
D240,
namely
240 ms
6
FtoPStateTra
nsTimer
FACH to PCH state

transition timer
180 s
CellReSelect
Timer
Cell Reselection
timer
180 s
5.5.1 FACH to DCH Traffic Report Threshold

This describes the upper threshold of 4A traffic in the CELL_FACH state to trigger state
transition from FACH to DCH. If the parameter is excessively high, congestion may occur in
common channels.
5.5.2 FACH to DCH Traffic Time to trigger
This describes the time to trigger the traffic transition from the FACH to the DCH. For UEs in
the CELL_FACH state, if the traffic exceeds the report threshold throughout the time length
specified by this parameter, the event 4A report is triggered, causing state transition to the
CELL_DCH state.
5.5.3 DCH to FACH State Transition Timer
This describes the DCH to FACH state transition timer. The parameter checks whether the users
in the CELL_DCH state are stably in low activity to determine whether there is a need for state
transition from CELL_DCH to CELL_FACH.

5-29
RAN
5.5.4 DCH to FACH Traffic Report Threshold

The parameter helps judge whether a UE is in the low activity state. Every time when a UE in
the CELL_DCH state reports the 4B traffic event, 1 is added to the low activity detection timer.
5.5.5 DCH to FACH Traffic Time to trigger
When the traffic volume is smaller than the lower threshold and lasts a time length, the UE report
event 4B.
5.5.6 FACH to PCH State Transition Timer
This describes the FACH to PCH state transition timer. The parameter checks whether the
subscribers in the CELL_FACH state are stably in low activity to determine whether there is a
need for state transition from CELL_FACH to CELL_PCH.
5.5.7 Cell Reselection Timer
This describes the cell reselection timer. The cell reselection timer and CellReSelectCounter
jointly check the status of the UE that frequently performs cell reselection to determine whether
there is a need of state transition from CELL_FACH to URA_PCH.
5.5.1 FACH to DCH Traffic Report Threshold

This describes the upper threshold of 4A traffic in the CELL_FACH state to trigger state
transition from FACH to DCH. If the parameter is excessively high, congestion may occur in
common channels.
ID
FtoDTVMThd
RtFtoDHTvmThd
BeFtoHTvmThd
FtoETvmThd
Value Range
Enum (D16, D32, D64, D128, D256, D512, D1024, D2k, D3k, D4k, D6k, D8k, D12k, D16k,
D24k, D32k, D48k, D64k, D96k, D128k, D192k, D256k, D384k, D512k, D768k)
Physical Scope
Enum (16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2k, 3k, 4k, 6k, 8k, 12k, 16k, 24k, 32k, 48k, 64k, 96k,
128k, 192k, 256k, 384k, 512k, 768k) bytes
Setting
The default value is D1024, namely 1024 bytes.

This threshold is set to check whether there is data to be transmitted so that the UE moves to the
CELL_DCH substate. To avoid common channel congestion, this parameter should not be set
too high.
5-30

RAN
Related Commands
Use SET UESTATETRANS to set and LST UESTATETRANS to query FtoDTVMThd.
5.5.2 FACH to DCH Traffic Time to trigger

This describes the time to trigger the traffic transition from the FACH to the DCH. For UEs in
the CELL_FACH state, if the traffic exceeds the report threshold throughout the time length
specified by this parameter, the event 4A report is triggered, causing state transition to the
CELL_DCH state.
ID
FtoDTvmTimeToTrig
RtFtoDHTvmTimeToTrig
BeFtoHTvmTimeToTrig
FtoETvmTimeToTrig
Value Range
D2560, D5000)
Physical Scope
Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000 ) ms
Setting
The default value of RtFtoDHTvmTimeToTrig is D240, namely 240 ms. The default value of
FtoDTvmTimeToTrig, BeFtoHTvmTimeToTrig, and FtoETvmTimeToTrig is D0, namely
0 ms.

FtoDTvmTimeToTrig can be properly set to avoid the unnecessary triggering of traffic events
caused by the unstable traffic. An excessively high FtoDTvmTimeToTrig may delay the
reporting of the 4A event and result in congestion of the common channel.
Related Commands
Use SET UESTATETRANS to set and LST UESTATETRANS to query
FtoDTvmTimeToTrig.

5-31
RAN
5.5.3 DCH to FACH State Transition Timer

This describes the DCH to FACH state transition timer. The parameter checks whether the users
in the CELL_DCH state are stably in low activity to determine whether there is a need for state
transition from CELL_DCH to CELL_FACH.
ID
DtoFStateTransTimer
RtDH2FStateTransTimer
BeH2FStateTransTimer
E2FStateTransTimer
Value Range
1 to 65535
Physical Scope
1 s to 65535 s
Setting

l
If DtoFStateTransTimer is excessively low, it may hard to judge whether the subscriber

is in relatively stable low activity status.
If DtoFStateTransTimer is excessively high, dedicated channel resources may be wasted.
DtoFStateTransTimer needs to be set on the basis of the BE service model.
Related Commands
Use SET UESTATETRANS to set and LST UESTATETRANS to query the parameters.
5.5.4 DCH to FACH Traffic Report Threshold

The parameter helps judge whether a UE is in the low activity state. Every time when a UE in
the CELL_DCH state reports the 4B traffic event, 1 is added to the low activity detection timer.
ID
D2F2PTVMTHD
BeH2FTvmThd
RtDH2FTvmThd
E2FThrouThd
5-32

RAN
Value Range
D2F2PTVMTHD, BeH2FTvmThd, RtDH2FTvmThd: D8 to D768K
E2FThrouThd: 0 to 384
Physical Scope
8bytes to 768K bytes
0 to 384 kbit/s
Setting
The default value of D2F2PTVMTHD, BeH2FTvmThd and RtDH2FTvmThd is D64, namely
64 bytes.
The default value of E2FThrouThd is 8, namely 8 kbit/s.

None.
Related Commands
5.5.5 DCH to FACH Traffic Time to trigger

When the traffic volume is smaller than the lower threshold and lasts a time length, the UE report
event 4B.
ID
D2FTvmTimeToTrig
RtDH2FTvmTimeToTrig
BeH2FTvmTimeToTrig
E2FThrouTimeToTrig
Value Range
D2560, D5000)
Physical Scope
Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000 ) ms
Setting

5-33
RAN

None.
Related Commands
5.5.6 FACH to PCH State Transition Timer

This describes the FACH to PCH state transition timer. The parameter checks whether the
subscribers in the CELL_FACH state are stably in low activity to determine whether there is a
need for state transition from CELL_FACH to CELL_PCH.
ID
FtoPStateTransTimer
Value Range
1 to 65535
Physical Scope
1 s to 65535 s
Setting

l
If FtoPStateTransTimer is excessively low, it may hard to judge whether the user is in

relatively stable low activity status.
If FtoPStateTransTimer is excessively high, common channel resources may be wasted.
FtoPStateTransTimer needs to be set on the basis of the BE service model.
Related Commands
5.5.7 Cell Reselection Timer

This describes the cell reselection timer. The cell reselection timer and CellReSelectCounter
jointly check the status of the UE that frequently performs cell reselection to determine whether
there is a need of state transition from CELL_FACH to URA_PCH.
5-34

RAN
ID
CellReSelectTimer
Value Range
1 to 65535
Physical Scope
1 s to 65535 s
Setting
The default value is 180, 180 s.

l
If CellReSelectTimer is excessively low, it is hard to judge whether the users are in

relatively stable low activity.
If CellReSelectTimer is excessively high, no state transition occurs for a long time.
For a UE in CELL_PCH, if the number of cell reselection is larger than or equal to

CellReSelectCounter within the CellReSelectTimer, it can be considered that the UE is in the
state of frequent cell reselection. The target state will be set to URA_PCH when the timer expired,
and if the UE initiates cell update again, RNC will enable it to transit to URA_PCH through the
message CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM to UE.
Related Commands
Use SET UESTATETRANS to set and LST UESTATETRANS to query
CellReSelectTimer.
5.6 PS Inactive
The common configurable PS inactive parameters are listed here.
Table 5-6 List of PS inactive parameters
No.
Paramet
er ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
Level
PsInactT
mrForCon
Conversationa
l service T1
20 s
RNC
PsInactT
mrForStr
Streaming
service T1
20 s
Set or modify: SET

PSINACTTIMER
Query: LST
PSINACTTIMER
PsInactT
mrForInt
Interactive
service T1
20 s

5-35
RAN
No.
Paramet
er ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
PsInactT
mrForBac
Background
service T1
20 s
Relevant
Command
Level
5.6.1 PS Inactive Timer

This describes the timer T1 for conversational, streaming, interactive and background services.
When no data is transferred during this timer for the PS interactive subscribers, then the PDCP
layer requests the RRC layer to release the connection.
5.6.1 PS Inactive Timer

This describes the timer T1 for conversational, streaming, interactive and background services.
When no data is transferred during this timer for the PS interactive subscribers, then the PDCP
layer requests the RRC layer to release the connection.
ID
PsInactTmrForCon
PsInactTmrForStr
PsInactTmrForInt
PsInactTmrForBac
Value Range
0 to 14400
Physical Scope
0 s to 14400 s
Setting

PsInactTmrForInt can be set to have the resource of the access layer be released for the PS
interactive service if no data is transmitted for the PS interactive service for a period to promote
the utilization of the cell resource.
5-36
The higher PsInactTmrForInt is, the more resource is occupied when no data is
transferred.
The lower PsInactTmrForInt is, the more frequently the timer is started and the more
signaling messages are transferred when data transfer is unstable.
RAN
Related Commands
For RNC-oriented parameters, use SET PSINACTTIMER to set and LST
PSINACTTIMER to query PsInactTmrForInt.

5-37
RAN
Miscellaneous Topic Parameters
About This Chapter

This describes the special topic parameters, including parameters for cell channel power
distribution, paging, RRC connection setup, synchronization, and location updating.
6.1 Cell Channel Power Distribution Parameters
This describes the cell channel power distribution parameters that can be modified by network
planners.
6.2 Paging Parameters
This describes the paging parameters that can be modified by network planners.
6.3 RRC Connection Setup Parameters
This describes the RRC connection setup parameters that can be configured by network planners.
6.4 Synchronization Parameters
This describes the synchronization parameters that can be modified by network planners.
6.5 Location Update Parameters
This describes the location update parameters that can be modified by network planners.
6.6 User Priority Parameters
This describes the user priority parameters that can be modified by network planners.
6.7 Bearer Channel Type Parameters
This describes the bearer channel type parameters.

6-1
RAN
6.1 Cell Channel Power Distribution Parameters

This describes the cell channel power distribution parameters that can be modified by network
planners.
Table 6-1 List of cell channel power distribution parameters
S ID
e
ri
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configu
ration
MML Command
Lev
el
MaxTxPowe
r
Maximum cell
transmit
power
430,
namely
43 dBm
Set: ADD CELLSETUP
Cell
PCPICHPow
er
PCPICH
transmit
power
330,
namely
33 dBm
Set: ADD PCPICH
Transmit
power of
PSCH and
SSCH
-50,
PschPower
namely -5 Set: ADD PSCH
dB
Query LST PSCH
PSCHPower
SSCHPower
Modify: MOD CELLSETUP
Query: LST PCPICH

Modify: MOD CELL
Modify: MOD CELL

SschPower Set: ADD SSCH
Query: LST SSCH
Modify: MOD CELL
4
BCHPower
BCH transmit
power
-20,
Set: ADD BCH
namely -2 Query: LST BCH
dB
Modify: MOD CELL
MaxFachPo
wer
Maximum
FACH
transmit
power
10,
namely 1
dB
Set: ADD FACH
PCH transmit
power
20 dB
Set: ADD PCH
PCHPower
Query: LST FACH
FA
CH
Modify: MOD SCCPCH

Cell
Query: LST PCH

Modify: MOD SCCPCH
6-2

RAN
S ID
e
ri
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configu
ration
MML Command
PICH transmit
power
-3 dB
Set: ADD CHPWROFFSET
PICHPower
Offset
Lev
el
Query: LST PICH

Modify: MOD
PICHPWROFFSET
AICHPower
Offset
AICH
transmit
power
-6 dB
Set: ADD CHPWROFFSET

Query: LST AICH
Modify: MOD
AICHPWROFFSET
6.1.1 Maximum Cell Transmit Power

This describes the maximum downlink transmit power of the NodeB.
6.1.3 PSCH and SSCH Transmit Power
This describes the transmit powers of the P-SCH and S-SCH relative to the PCPICH.
6.1.4 BCH Transmit Power
This describes the transmit power of the PCCPCH bearing the BCH compared with the PCPICH.
6.1.5 Maximum FACH Transmit Power
This describes the maximum FACH transmit power MaxFachPower relative to the PCPICH.
6.1.6 PCH Transmit Power
This describes the transmit power of the PCH relative to the PCPICH.
6.1.7 PICH Transmit Power
This describes the transmit power of the PICH relative to the PCPICH.
6.1.8 AICH Transmit Power
This describes the transmit power of the AICH relative to the PCPICH.
6.1.1 Maximum Cell Transmit Power

This describes the maximum downlink transmit power of the NodeB.
ID
MaxTxPower

6-3
RAN
Value Range
0 to 500
Physical Scope
Setting
This parameter defines the sum of the maximum transmit powers of all the downlink channels
in the cell at the same time. It should be set according to the NodeB capability, cell range and
capacity. The parameter is set on the basis of network planning.

If MaxTxPower is excessively low, the downlink capacity and the coverage is limited.
MaxTxPower, however, should not exceed the actual processing capability of the NodeB.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLSETUP to set and MOD CELLSETUP to modify MaxTxPower.

ID
PCPICHPower
Value Range
100 to 500
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value of PCPICHPower is 330, namely 33 dBm.
For a cell with large coverage, PCPICHPower should be set to a comparatively high value; for
a cell with small coverage, PCPICHPower should be set to a comparatively low value. In a
planned multi-cell environment, the minimum value of PCPICHPower is definite. If the value
of PCPICHPower is lower than the allowed minimum value, coverage holes may occur when
the cells are under heavy load.
6-4

RAN

l
If PCPICHPower is excessively low, the downlink pilot coverage range is directly

affected.
If PCPICHPower is excessively high, the downlink interference increases and the transmit
power allocated to the service is reduced, and thus the downlink capacity is affected.
In addition, the configuration of PCPICHPower also has direct influence on the distribution of
handover areas.
Related Commands
Use ADD PCPICH to set, LST PCPICH to query, and MOD CELL to modify
PCPICHPower.
6.1.3 PSCH and SSCH Transmit Power

This describes the transmit powers of the P-SCH and S-SCH relative to the PCPICH.
ID
PSCHPower
SSCHPower
Value Range
350 to 150
Physical Scope
Setting
These two parameters can be adjusted through measurement in the actual environment so that
the transmit powers of the synchronization channels just satisfy the UE receiving demodulation
requirement. Specifically, when UEs receive signals at different locations within the range of
the cell, the transmit power should be enough to ensure that the UE can implement fast
synchronization in most areas at the verge of the cell. Neither PSCH nor SSCH has come through
channel code spectrum spread, so they produce more serious interference than other channels
do, especially for near-end users. Therefore, PSCHPower and SSCHPower should not be
excessively high.

l
If PSCHPower and SSCHPower are excessively low, users at the verge of cells fail in
network searching, resulting in influence on coverage of the downlink common channel.
This finally affects the cell coverage.
If PSCHPower and SSCHPower are excessively high, the power resources are wasted,
and other channels are interfered seriously, thus the cell capacity is influenced.

6-5
RAN
Related Commands
l
Use ADD PSCH to set and use LST PSCH to query PschPower.
Use ADD SSCH to set and use LST SSCH to query SschPower.
After the cell setup, both PschPower and SschPower can be modified with MOD CELL.
6.1.4 BCH Transmit Power

This describes the transmit power of the PCCPCH bearing the BCH compared with the PCPICH.
ID
BCHPower
Value Range
350 to 150
Physical Scope
Setting
This parameter can also be adjusted and optimized through measurement in the actual
environment. When UEs receive signals at different locations within the range of the cell, the
transmit power should be enough to ensure the correct demodulation of the information carried
on the channel in most areas at the verge of the cell. BCHPower should not be excessively high,
so as to avoid unnecessary waste of the transmit power.

l
If BCHPower is excessively low, users at the verge of cells fail in receiving the system
information, resulting in the influence on the coverage of the downlink common channel,
which finally affects cell coverage.
If BCHPower is excessively high, other channels are interfered seriously, and thus the cell
capacity is influenced.
Related Commands
Use ADD BCH to set, LST BCH to query, and MOD CELL to modify BCHPower.

This describes the maximum FACH transmit power MaxFachPower relative to the PCPICH.
ID
MaxFachPower
6-6

RAN
Value Range
350 to 150
Physical Scope
Setting
If the FACH power is excessively low, the UE fails to receive the FACH data packets or the UE
receives error packets in a large portion; if the FACH power is excessively high, the power is
wasted. Set the maximum FACH transmit power to an appropriate value that is just enough to
ensure the target BLER.

l
If MaxFachPower is excessively low, the UE at the cell verge fails to receive correctly
the services and signaling borne over the FACH, resulting in the influence on the downlink
common channel coverage and the cell coverage.
If MaxFachPower is excessively high, other channels are interfered, the downlink power
resources are occupied, and consequently the cell capacity is influenced.
Related Commands
Use ADD FACH to set, LST FACH to query, and MOD SCCPCH to modify
MaxFachPower.
NOTE
In the MOD SCCPCH command, the maximum transmit powers of the two FACH channels are
respectively FACH1MaxPower and FACH2MaxPower.
6.1.6 PCH Transmit Power

This describes the transmit power of the PCH relative to the PCPICH.
ID
PCHPower
Value Range
350 to 150
Physical Scope
Setting

6-7
RAN
If the PCH power is excessively low, the UE fails to receive the PCH data packets or the UE
receives wrong packets, which may increase the retransmission times of paging packets,
resulting in the paging failure or the paging delay increase. If the PCH power is excessively high,
the power is wasted.

l
If PCHPower is excessively low, users at the verge of cells fail in receiving the system
information, resulting in the influence on the coverage of the downlink common channel,
which finally affects cell coverage.
If PCHPower is excessively high, other channels are interfered seriously, the downlink
power is occupied, and thus the cell capacity is influenced.
Related Commands
Use ADD PCH to set, LST PCH to query, and MOD SCCPCH to modify PCHPower.
6.1.7 PICH Transmit Power

This describes the transmit power of the PICH relative to the PCPICH.
ID
PICHPowerOffset
Value Range
10 to 5
Physical Scope
10 dB to 5 dB
Setting
An appropriate transmit power value should be set for PICH to ensure that all the users at the
cell verge can receive the paging indications. The transmit power, however, should not be
excessively high, or the power is wasted.

l
If PICHPowerOffset is excessively low, the UE at the cell verge fails to receive paging
messages correctly, resulting in mis-operation in reading PCH channel and waste of the
UE battery, and the downlink common channel coverage and cell coverage may be affected.
If PICHPowerOffset is excessively high, other channels are interfered seriously, the

downlink power is occupied, and thus the cell capacity is influenced.
Related Commands
Use ADD CHPWROFFSET to set, LST PICH to query, and MOD PICHPWROFFSET to
modify PICHPowerOffset.
6-8

RAN
6.1.8 AICH Transmit Power

This describes the transmit power of the AICH relative to the PCPICH.
ID
AICHPowerOffset
Value Range
22 to 5
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value is 6, namely -6 dB.
An appropriate transmit power value should be set for the AICH to ensure that all the users at
the cell verge can receive the paging indications. The transmit power, however, should not be
excessively high to avoid power waste.

l
If AICHPowerOffset is excessively low, users at the verge of cells fail in receiving the
system information, resulting in the influence on the coverage of the downlink common
channel, which finally affects cell coverage.
If AICHPowerOffset is excessively high, other channels are interfered seriously, the

downlink transmit power is occupied, and thus the cell capacity is influenced.
Related Commands
Use ADD CHPWROFFSET to set, LST AICH to query, and MOD AICHPWROFFSET to
modify AICHPowerOffset.
6.2 Paging Parameters

This describes the paging parameters that can be modified by network planners.

6-9
RAN
Table 6-2 List of paging parameters

S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Def
ault
Co
nfi
gur
atio
n
MML Command
L
ev
el
Paging cycle
coefficient
Set or modify: SET FRC and MOD

CNDOMAIN
R
N
C
DRXCycle
LenCoef
Query: LST FRC or LST CNDOMAIN

2
MaccPage
RepeatTim
es
Number of RNC
paging
repetitions
Set or modify: SET DPUCFGDATA

Query: LST DPUCFGDATA
6.2.1 Paging Cycle Coefficient

This describes the paging cycle coefficient. The parameter is the discontinuous receiving (DRX)
cycle coefficient, and it is a parameter of paging type 1. The paging cycle coefficient falls into
two categories: DRX cycle coefficient of the UTRAN domain and DRX cycle coefficient of the
CN domain.
6.2.2 Number of RNC Paging Repetitions
This describes the number of RNC paging repetitions. If the number of paging messages
retransmitted by the system exceeds the parameter and there is still no response to the pagings,
the system no longer transmits the paging.
6.2.1 Paging Cycle Coefficient

This describes the paging cycle coefficient. The parameter is the discontinuous receiving (DRX)
cycle coefficient, and it is a parameter of paging type 1. The paging cycle coefficient falls into
two categories: DRX cycle coefficient of the UTRAN domain and DRX cycle coefficient of the
CN domain.
ID
DRXCycleLenCoef
Value Range
UTRAN domain: 3 to 9
CN domain: 6 to 9
Physical Scope
None.
6-10

RAN
Setting
The default values of both the DRX cycle coefficients of the UTRAN domain and the CN domain
are 6.
In the idle mode, the UE can receive the paging indication in the DRX mode to reduce the power
consumption. In this case, the UE needs to detect only one paging indication in a paging occasion
within each DRX cycle. The DRX cycle length of UTRAN domain is obtained by substituting
this parameter into the formula DRX cycle = 2K PBP frames.
Where, K is the paging cycle coefficient, and PBP is the number of paging block periods (In
the FDD mode, PBP = 1).

l
If DRXCycleLenCoef is excessively low, the UE detects the paging channel frequently,

and thus the battery is consumed fast.
If DRXCycleLenCoef is excessively high, the UE reacts very slowly to paging indications,

and the system may repeatedly page the UE, resulting in increased downlink interference.
Related Commands
l
Use SET FRC to set the DRX cycle coefficient of the UTRAN domain.
Use ADD CNDOMAIN to set and MOD CNDOMAIN to modify the DRX cycle
coefficient of the CN domain.
The DRX cycle coefficients of both the UTRAN domain and the CN domain must be set. Use
LST FRC and LST CNDOMAIN to respectively query the DRX cycle coefficient of the
UTRAN domain and the DRX cycle coefficient of the CN domain.
6.2.2 Number of RNC Paging Repetitions

This describes the number of RNC paging repetitions. If the number of paging messages
retransmitted by the system exceeds the parameter and there is still no response to the pagings,
the system no longer transmits the paging.
ID
MaccPageRepeatTimes
Value Range
0 to 2
Physical Scope
0 to 2 times
Setting
In order to increase the paging success rate, the CN and RNC both repeat paging messages. The
paging repetition, however, has negative effects: it increases the paging messages, especially in

6-11
RAN
the condition of downlink common channel congestion on the air interface; therefore, the
downlink channel resources are wasted and new paging messages cannot be timely delivered.
If the RNC continuously transmits two paging messages of Type 1, the interval of the two paging
messages is a paging period.
To guarantee a high paging success rate and high paging efficiency, the number and time interval
of paging repetitions of the CN must be set on the basis of the number of UTRAN paging
repetitions. If the UTRAN retransmits the paging message once, the time interval for CN paging
repetitions should be longer than two DRX periods.
The CN cannot retransmit the next paging message until the UTRAN finishes transmitting and
retransmitting the previous paging message. Therefore, the number and time interval of RNC
paging repetitions, the number of UTRAN paging repetitions, and DRX paging period need to
be adjusted together.

If MaccPageRepeatTimes is excessively high, the system repeatedly pages UEs, the downlink
common channel resources are wasted, and the downlink interference increases.
Related Commands
Use SET DPUCFGDATA to set and LST DPUCFGDATA to query
MaccPageRepeatTimes.
6.3 RRC Connection Setup Parameters

This describes the RRC connection setup parameters that can be configured by network planners.
Table 6-3 List of RRC connection setup parameters
S ID
e
ri
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configuration
MML Command
Level
T300
T300 timer
N300 constant
Set: SET
IDLEMODETIMER
RNC
N300
T300: D2000 (2
s)
N300: 3
Query: LST
IDLEMODETIMER
6.3.1 T300 and N300

This describes the T300 timer and the constant N300. The UE starts the T300 timer after sending
the RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message and stops the T300 timer upon receiving the RRC
CONNECTION SETUP message. If the T300 timer times out and the number of retransmitted
RRC CONNECTION REQUEST messages is smaller than N300, the UE continues to retransmit
6-12

RAN
the RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message. If the T300 timer times out and the number of
retransmitted RRC CONNECTION REQUEST messages exceeds N300, the UE enters idle
mode.
6.3.1 T300 and N300

This describes the T300 timer and the constant N300. The UE starts the T300 timer after sending
the RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message and stops the T300 timer upon receiving the RRC
CONNECTION SETUP message. If the T300 timer times out and the number of retransmitted
RRC CONNECTION REQUEST messages is smaller than N300, the UE continues to retransmit
the RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message. If the T300 timer times out and the number of
retransmitted RRC CONNECTION REQUEST messages exceeds N300, the UE enters idle
mode.
ID
T300
N300
Value Range
T300: Enum (D100, D200, D400, D600, D800, D1000, D1200, D1400, D1600, D1800, D2000,
D3000, D4000, D6000, D8000)
N300: 0 to 7
Physical Scope
T300: Enum (100, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000, 3000, 4000, 6000,
8000) ms
N300: None
Setting
The default value of T300 is D2000, namely 2 s. The default value of N300 is 3.

The setting of timer T300 should be considered together with the UE and UTRAN processing
delay and the propagation delay. The higher T300 is, the longer the UE waits. The higher
N300 is, the higher success probability of the RRC connection setup is, and the longer RRC
setup time it takes. If N300 is excessively high, it is likely that a UE repeats access attempts and
connection setup requests, and consequently other UEs are influenced seriously.
Related Commands
Use SET IDLEMODETIMER to set and LST IDLEMODETIMER to query T300 and
N300.
6.4 Synchronization Parameters

This describes the synchronization parameters that can be modified by network planners.

6-13
RAN
Table 6-4 List of synchronization parameters

S ID
e
ri
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configur
ation
MML Command
Lev
el
NInsyncIn
d
Number of successive
in-sync indications
Cell
NOutsync
Ind
Number of successive
out-of-sync
indications
50
Set: ADD CELLSETUP

Query: LST CELL
Modify: MOD CELL
TRLFailur
e
Radio link failure

timer duration
50 (5 s)
N312
When the UE starts to

set up the dedicated
channel, it starts the
timer T312, and after
the UE detects N312
in-sync indications
from L1, it stops the
timer T312. Once the
timer expires, the
physical channel setup
fails.
N312:
D1
Set or modify: SET

IDLEMODETIMER
RN
C
T312: 6
s
Query: LST
IDLEMODETIMER
After the UE detects

N313 successive outof-sync indications
from L1, it starts the
timer T313. After the
UE detects N315
successive in-sync
indications from L1, it
stops timer T313.
N313:
D50
Set or modify: SET

CONNMODETIMER
N315:
D1
Query: LST
CONNMODETIMER
T313: 3
s
T312
N313
N315
T313
6.4.1 Number of Successive In-Sync Indications

This describes the number of successive in-sync indications.
6.4.2 Number of Successive Out-of-Sync Indications
This describes the number of successive out-of-sync indications.
6.4.3 Radio Link Failure Timer Duration
This describes the duration of the radio link failure timer. When the radio link set is in the
synchronized state, the NodeB starts the timer TRlFailure after it receives successive out-ofsync indications of the number defined by NOutsyncInd. The NodeB shall stop and reset the
timer TRlFailure after receiving successive in-sync indications of the number defined by
6-14

RAN
NInsyncInd. When the timer TRlFailure expires, the NodeB triggers the radio link failure
process, and indicates which radio link set is out-of-sync.
6.4.4 T312 and N312
This describes the T312 timer and the constant N312. When the UE starts to set up the dedicated
channel, it starts the timer T312, and after the UE detects N312 in-sync indications from L1, it
stops the timer T312. Once the timer expires, the physical channel setup fails.
6.4.5 N313, N315, and T313
This describes the constants N313 and N315 and the timer T313. After detecting a certain number
(the number is defined by N313) of successive out-of-sync indications from L1, the UE starts
the timer T313. After detecting a certain number (the number is defined by N315) of successive
in-sync indications from L1, the UE stops the timer T313. Once the timer expires, the radio link
is disconnected.
6.4.1 Number of Successive In-Sync Indications

This describes the number of successive in-sync indications.
ID
NInsyncInd
Value Range
1 to 256
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
This parameter defines the of successive in-sync indications required for the NodeB to trigger
the radio link recovery process. The radio link set remains in the initial state until it has received
a certain number (the number is defined by NInsyncInd) of successive in-sync indications from
L1, and then the NodeB triggers the radio link recovery process, which indicates that the radio
link set has been synchronized. Once the radio link recovery process is triggered, the radio link
set is considered to be in the synchronized state.

l
The higher NInsyncInd is, the stricter the synchronization process becomes, and the more
difficult the synchronization occurs.
The lower NInsyncInd is, the easier the synchronization occurs.
If the link quality is poor, a simple synchronization requirement leads to waste of the UE power
and increase of uplink interference. In the radio link maintenance process, NInsyncInd is used
together with the successive out-of-sync indication counter.

6-15
RAN
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLSETUP to set, LST CELL to query, and MOD CELL to modify
NInsyncInd.
6.4.2 Number of Successive Out-of-Sync Indications

This describes the number of successive out-of-sync indications.
ID
NOutsyncInd
Value Range
1 to 256
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
NOutsyncInd defines the number of successive out-of-sync indications required to receive
before starting the timer TRlFailure. When the radio link set is in synchronized state, the NodeB
starts the timer TRlFailure after it receives successive out-of-sync indications of the number
defined by NOutsyncInd. The NodeB shall stop and reset the timer TRlFailure after receiving
successive in-sync indications of the number defined by NInsyncInd. When the timer
TRlFailure expires, the NodeB triggers the radio link failure process, and indicates which radio
link set is out-of-sync.

l
If NOutsyncInd is excessively high, the link out-of-sync decision is likely to happen.
If NOutsyncInd is excessively low, the link out-of-sync decision is not likely to happen.
But if the link quality is poor, it may result in a waste of the UE power and increased uplink
interference.
In the radio link maintenance process, this parameter is used together with the successive insync indication counter.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLSETUP to set, LST CELL to query and MOD CELL to modify
NOutsyncInd.
6.4.3 Radio Link Failure Timer Duration

This describes the duration of the radio link failure timer. When the radio link set is in the
synchronized state, the NodeB starts the timer TRlFailure after it receives successive out-ofsync indications of the number defined by NOutsyncInd. The NodeB shall stop and reset the
6-16

RAN
timer TRlFailure after receiving successive in-sync indications of the number defined by
NInsyncInd. When the timer TRlFailure expires, the NodeB triggers the radio link failure
process, and indicates which radio link set is out-of-sync.
ID
TRLFailure
Value Range
0 to 255
Physical Scope
0 s to 25.5 s, with the step of 0.1 s
Setting

l
If TRLFailure is excessively low, there are few chances for the radio link to get
synchronized.
If TRLFailure is excessively high, the radio link failure process is probably delayed, and
the downlink interference increases.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLSETUP to set, use LST CELL to query and use MOD CELL to modify
TRLFailure.
6.4.4 T312 and N312

This describes the T312 timer and the constant N312. When the UE starts to set up the dedicated
channel, it starts the timer T312, and after the UE detects N312 in-sync indications from L1, it
stops the timer T312. Once the timer expires, the physical channel setup fails.
ID
T312
N312
Value Range
T312: 1 to 15
N312: Enum (D1, D2, D4, D10, D20, D50, D100, D200, D400, D600, D800, D1000)
Physical Scope
T312: 1 s to 15 s

6-17
RAN
N312: Enum (1, 2, 4, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000)
Setting
The default value of N312 is D1, namely 1, and the default value of T312 is 6, namely 6 s.

l
The higher N312 is, the more difficult the dedicated channel synchronization becomes.
The higher T312 is, the higher the synchronization probability is, but the longer the
synchronization time it takes.
Related Commands
Idle mode:
Use SET IDLEMODETIMER to set and LST IDLEMODETIMER to query N312 and
T312.
Connected mode:
Use SET CONNMODETIMER to set and LST CONNMODETIMER to query N312 and
T312.
6.4.5 N313, N315, and T313

This describes the constants N313 and N315 and the timer T313. After detecting a certain number
(the number is defined by N313) of successive out-of-sync indications from L1, the UE starts
the timer T313. After detecting a certain number (the number is defined by N315) of successive
in-sync indications from L1, the UE stops the timer T313. Once the timer expires, the radio link
is disconnected.
ID
N313
N315
T313
Value Range
N313: Enum (D1, D2, D4, D10, D20, D50, D100, D200)
N315: Enum (D1, D2, D4, D10, D20, D50, D100, D200, D400, D600, D800, D1000)
T312: 1 to 15
Physical Scope
N313: Enum (1, 2, 4, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200)
N315: Enum (1, 2, 4, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000)
T312: 1 s to 15 s
6-18

RAN
Setting
The default value of N313 is D50; the default value of N315 is D1; the default value of T313 is
3, namely 3 s.

l
The higher N313 is, the more difficult it is to start the timer T313, and the lower the outof-sync probability is.
The lower N315 is, the longer T313 is, and the higher the link recovery probability is.
Related Commands
Use SET CONNMODETIMER to set and LST CONNMODETIMER to query N313,
N315, and T313.
6.5 Location Update Parameters

This describes the location update parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Table 6-5 List of location update parameters
S ID
e
ri
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configur
ation
MML Command
Le
ve
l
Periodic
location
update timer
10, that is,

1 hour
Set: ADD CNDOMAIN
R
N
C
T321
2
Query: LST CNDOMAIN

Modify: MOD CNDOMAIN
6.5.1 Periodical Location Update Timer

This describes the time duration of the periodical location update timer.
6.5.1 Periodical Location Update Timer

This describes the time duration of the periodical location update timer.
ID
T3212
Value Range
0 to 255

6-19
RAN
Physical Scope
0 to 1530 minutes, with the step of 6 minutes
Setting
The default value is 10, namely 1 hour.
If T3212 is 0, no location update is needed. T3212 is valid only when the CN domain identifier
is CS_DOMAIN.
If the timer T3212 is not started, the system starts the timer T3212 when the UE enters NORMAL
SERVICE or ATTEMPTing TO UPDATE sub-mode of MM IDLE mode, and then the UE
sends the LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST message. If the UE receives the LOCATION
UPDATING ACCEPT, LOCATION UPDATING REJECT, or AUTHENTICATION
REJECT message, the system stops and initializes the timer T3212. Then the system starts a
location update again after the UE enters NORMAL SERVICE or ATTEMPTing TO
UPDATE mode. If the timer T3212 expires, the system initializes the timer and starts a location
update again.

l
If T3212 is excessively low, the UE performs location updates frequently, resulting in a

large number of location update messages on the Uu and Iu interfaces.
If T3212 is excessively high, the UE location information may not be updated timely.
Related Commands
Use ADD CNDOMAIN to set, LST CNDOMAIN to query, and MOD CNDOMAIN to modify
T3212.
6.6 User Priority Parameters

This describes the user priority parameters that can be modified by network planners.
6-20

RAN
Table 6-6 List of user priority parameters

S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Defa
ult
Confi
gurati
on
MML Command
Le
vel
User priorities
corresponding to
allocation or
retention priority
1 to 14
None.
Set: SET
USERPRIORITY
RN
C
ARP1Priority
ARP2Priority
ARP3Priority
ARP4Priority
Query: LST
USERPRIORITY
ARP5Priority
ARP6Priority
ARP7Priority
ARP8Priority
ARP9Priority
ARP10Priority
ARP11Priority
ARP12Priority
ARP13Priority
ARP14Priority
2
PriorityReference
Integrated
priority
configuration
reference
ARP
CarrierTypePriorInd
Indicator of
carrier type
priority
DCH
6.6.1 User Priorities Corresponding to Allocation or Retention Priority 1 to 14

This describes the user priorities corresponding to allocation or retention priority 1 to 14.
6.6.2 Intergated Priority Configuration Reference
This describes the reference used to determine which priority is arranged at the first in the priority
sequence.
6.6.3 Indication of Carrier Type Priority
This describes the indication that indicates which carrier type (DCH or HSPA) has the higher
priority when both carrier types have the same priority of ARP and TrafficClass.

6-21
RAN
6.6.1 User Priorities Corresponding to Allocation or Retention

Priority 1 to 14
This describes the user priorities corresponding to allocation or retention priority 1 to 14.
ID
ARP1Priority
ARP2Priority
ARP3Priority
ARP4Priority
ARP5Priority
ARP6Priority
ARP7Priority
ARP8Priority
ARP9Priority
ARP10Priority
ARP11Priority
ARP12Priority
ARP13Priority
ARP14Priority
Value Range
Gold, Sliver, Copper
Physical Scope
1, 2, 3
Setting
None.

None.
Related Commands
Use SET USERPRIORITY to set and LST USERPRIORITY to query the user priorities
corresponding to the allocation or retention priorities.
6-22

RAN
6.6.2 Intergated Priority Configuration Reference

This describes the reference used to determine which priority is arranged at the first in the priority
sequence.
ID
PriorityReference
Value Range
ARP, TrafficClass
Physical Scope
1, 2
Setting
The default value is ARP.

None.
Related Commands
Use SET USERPRIORITY to set and LST USERPRIORITY to query PriorityReference.
6.6.3 Indication of Carrier Type Priority

This describes the indication that indicates which carrier type (DCH or HSPA) has the higher
priority when both carrier types have the same priority of ARP and TrafficClass.
ID
CarrierTypePriorInd
Value Range
NONE, DCH, HSPA
Physical Scope
0, 1, 2
Setting
The default value is NONE.

None.

6-23
RAN
Related Commands
Use SET USERPRIORITY to set and LST USERPRIORITY to query
CarrierTypePriorInd.
6.7 Bearer Channel Type Parameters

This describes the bearer channel type parameters.
Table 6-7 List of bearer channel type parameters
6-24
S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
O
.
Meaning
Defa
ult
Confi
gurati
on
MML Command
Le
vel
VoipChlType
Priority type of
the bearer
channel for the
VoIP
DCH
Set: SET
FRCCHLTYPEPARA
Query: LST
FRCCHLTYPEPARA
RN
C
ImsChlType
Priority type of
the bearer
channel for the
IMS signaling
DCH
SrbChlType
Priority type of
the bearer
channel for the
SRB
DCH
SrbChlTypeRrcEffectFlag
Flag of effecting
SrbChlType at
the RRC stage
FALS
E
DlStrThsOnHsdpa
Downlink
streaming traffic
threshold on
HSDPA
64
kbit/s
DlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa
Downlink BE
traffic threshold
on HSDPA
64
kbit/s
UlStrThsOnHsupa
Uplink streaming
traffic threshold
on HSUPA
256
kbit/s

RAN
S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
O
.
Meaning
Defa
ult
Confi
gurati
on
UlBeTraffThsOnHsupa
Uplink BE traffic
threshold on
HSUPA
608
kbit/s
UlBeTraffDecThs
Uplink and
downlink BE
traffic decision
threshold on
DCH
8 kbit/
s
DlBeTraffDecThs
MML Command
Le
vel
Set: SET
FRCCHLTYPEPARA/
ADD CELLFRC
Query: LST
FRCCHLTYPEPARA/
LST CELLFRC
1
0
ImsBearEnhancedSwitch
Enhanced switch
of the IMS
signaling bearer
OFF
1
1
ImsInitialAccessRate
Initial access rate

of the IMS
signaling
32
kbit/s
Set: SET FRC

Query: LST FRC
6.7.1 Priority Type of the Bearer Channel for the VoIP

This parameter indicates the type of the VoIP bearer channel.
6.7.2 Priority Type of the Bearer Channel for the IMS Signaling
This parameter indicates the type of the IMS signaling.
6.7.3 Priority Type of the Bearer Channel for the SRB
This parameter indicates the type of the SRB.
6.7.4 Flag of Effecting SrbChlType at the RRC Stage
This parameter indicates whether SrbChlType takes effect when the RRC connection is
established and at other stages, or takes effect only at other stages.
6.7.5 Downlink Streaming Traffic Threshold on HSDPA
The rate decision threshold of Downlink PS domain streaming service to be carried on HSDSCH. When the maximum Downlink service rate is greater than or equal to this threshold, the
service will be carried on HS-DSCH. Otherwise, on DCH.
6.7.6 Downlink BE Traffic Threshold on HSDPA
The rate decision threshold of Downlink PS domain background or interactive service to be
carried on HS-DSCH. When the maximum DL service rate is greater than or equal to this
threshold, the service will be carried on HS-DSCH. Otherwise, on DCH.
6.7.7 Uplink Streaming Traffic Threshold on HSUPA

6-25
RAN
The rate decision threshold of Uplink PS domain streaming service to be carried on E-DCH.
When the maximum Uplink service rate is greater than or equal to this threshold, the service
will be carried on E-DCH.
6.7.8 Uplink BE Traffic Threshold on HSUPA
The rate decision threshold of UL PS domain background or interactive service to be carried on
E-DCH. When the maximum UL service rate is greater than or equal to this threshold, the service
6.7.9 Uplink and Downlink BE Traffic Decision Threshold on DCH
The default rate decision threshold of uplink and downlink PS domain background or interactive
service to be carried on DCH. If the FRC parameters of the best cell cannot be obtained, this
default value will be used. When the uplink and downlink service rate is greater than or equal
to this threshold, the service will be set up on DCH. Otherwise, on CCH.
6.7.10 Enhanced Switch of the IMS Signaling Bearer
This parameter indicates whether to enable the function of configuring the initial bandwidth of
the IMS signaling at the background.
6.7.11 Initial Access Rate of the IMS Signalling
This parameter indicates the initial bandwidth of the IMS signalling configured at the
background.
6.7.1 Priority Type of the Bearer Channel for the VoIP

This parameter indicates the type of the VoIP bearer channel.
ID
VoipChlType
Value Range
DCH, HSDPA, HSPA
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The default value is DCH.
DCH means the VoIP service is carried by the DCH channel. HSDPA means the VoIP is carried
by the HSDPA channel. HSPA means the VoIP is carried by the HSDPA and HSUPA channels.

None.
Related Commands
Use SET FRCCHLTYPEPARA to set and LST FRCCHLTYPEPARA to query
VoipChlType.
6-26

RAN
6.7.2 Priority Type of the Bearer Channel for the IMS Signaling
This parameter indicates the type of the IMS signaling.
ID
ImsChlType
Value Range
DCH, HSDPA, HSPA
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
DCH means the IMS signaling is carried by the DCH channel. HSDPA means the IMS signaling
is carried by the HSDPA channel. HSPA means the IMS signaling is carried by the HSDPA and
HSUPA channels.

None.
Related Commands
ImsChlType.
6.7.3 Priority Type of the Bearer Channel for the SRB

This parameter indicates the type of the SRB.
ID
SrbChlType
Value Range
DCH, HSDPA, HSPA
Physical Scope
None.
Setting

6-27
RAN
DCH means the SRB is carried by the DCH channel. HSDPA means the SRB is carried by the
HSDPA channel. HSPA means the SRB is carried by the HSDPA and HSUPA channels.

None.
Related Commands
SrbChlType.
6.7.4 Flag of Effecting SrbChlType at the RRC Stage

This parameter indicates whether SrbChlType takes effect when the RRC connection is
established and at other stages, or takes effect only at other stages.
ID
SrbChlTypeRrcEffectFlag
Value Range
FALSE, TRUE
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
TRUE means SrbChlType takes effect when the RRC connection is established and at other
stages. FALSE means SrbChlType takes effect only at other stages.

None.
Related Commands
SrbChlTypeRrcEffectFlag.
6.7.5 Downlink Streaming Traffic Threshold on HSDPA

The rate decision threshold of Downlink PS domain streaming service to be carried on HSDSCH. When the maximum Downlink service rate is greater than or equal to this threshold, the
service will be carried on HS-DSCH. Otherwise, on DCH.
ID
DlStrThsOnHsdpa
6-28

RAN
Value Range
D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384
Physical Scope
8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 384 kbit/s
Setting
The streaming service is fit to be carried on the cell with abundance power resource, such as
indoor cell. The bottleneck of such cell usually is channel code resource.
If the service is carried on DCH, the higher the rate, the more the channel code needed. If the
service is carried on HS-DSCH, the change of channel code needed is small when the rate getting
higher. So that the high-speed service is fit to carried on HS-DSCH.

If the parameter is set to low, the capacity of HS-DSCH may be lower than that of DCH.
Related Commands
DlStrThsOnHsdpa.
6.7.6 Downlink BE Traffic Threshold on HSDPA

The rate decision threshold of Downlink PS domain background or interactive service to be
carried on HS-DSCH. When the maximum DL service rate is greater than or equal to this
threshold, the service will be carried on HS-DSCH. Otherwise, on DCH.
ID
DlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa
Value Range
D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384, D768, D1024, D1536, D1800, D2048
Physical Scope
1024 kbit/s, 1536 kbit/s, 1800 kbit/s, 2048 kbit/s
Setting
HS-DSCH channel is a resource sharing channel. If the burst BE service is carried on HS-DSCH,
the time utilization of subscribers increase, converge the transmit data, save the power resource.
So that all the BE service is recommended to be carried on HS-DSCH.

6-29
RAN

If the parameter is set too large, the utilization of system resource will be lower.
Related Commands
DlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa.
6.7.7 Uplink Streaming Traffic Threshold on HSUPA

The rate decision threshold of Uplink PS domain streaming service to be carried on E-DCH.
When the maximum Uplink service rate is greater than or equal to this threshold, the service
ID
UlStrThsOnHsupa
Value Range
D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384
Physical Scope
8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 384 kbit/s
Setting

None.
Related Commands
UlStrThsOnHsdpa.
6.7.8 Uplink BE Traffic Threshold on HSUPA

The rate decision threshold of UL PS domain background or interactive service to be carried on
E-DCH. When the maximum UL service rate is greater than or equal to this threshold, the service
ID
UlBeTraffThsOnHsupa
Value Range
D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384, D768, D1024, D1536, D1800, D2048
6-30

RAN
Physical Scope
1024 kbit/s, 1536 kbit/s, 1800 kbit/s, 2048 kbit/s
Setting

Through the emulationwhen data service is carried on E-DCH, system capacity increase rather
than that is carried on R99 channel. So that all the BE service can be carried on E-DCH.
Related Commands
UlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa.
6.7.9 Uplink and Downlink BE Traffic Decision Threshold on DCH

The default rate decision threshold of uplink and downlink PS domain background or interactive
service to be carried on DCH. If the FRC parameters of the best cell cannot be obtained, this
default value will be used. When the uplink and downlink service rate is greater than or equal
to this threshold, the service will be set up on DCH. Otherwise, on CCH.
ID
UlBeTraffDecThs
DlBeTraffDecThs
Value Range
D8, D16
Physical Scope
8, 16. unit: kbit/s
Setting

The service carried on DCH can obtain better rate and consume more system resource. So lowspeed service is often carried on CCH, and the high-speed service is carried on DCH.
Related Commands
Use SET FRCCHLTYPEPARA or ADD CELLFRC to set and LST
FRCCHLTYPEPARA or LST CELLFRC to query the parameters.

6-31
RAN
6.7.10 Enhanced Switch of the IMS Signaling Bearer

This parameter indicates whether to enable the function of configuring the initial bandwidth of
the IMS signaling at the background.
ID
ImsBearEnhancedSwitch
Value Range
OFF, ON
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
OFF means the function is disabled. ON means the function is enabled.

None.
Related Commands
Use SET FRC to set and LST FRC to query ImsBearEnhancedSwitch.
6.7.11 Initial Access Rate of the IMS Signalling

This parameter indicates the initial bandwidth of the IMS signalling configured at the
background.
ID
ImsInitialAccessRate
Value Range
D32, D64
Physical Scope
32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s
Setting
This parameter takes effect when the IMS signalling enhanced switch is enabled.
6-32

RAN

If this parameter is set to 32 kbit/s, a higher bandwidth utilization can be obtained, but the access
delay of the IMS service is longer. If this parameter is set to 64 kbit/s, a shorter service access
delay can be obtained, but the bandwidth utilization is lower.
Related Commands
Use SET FRC to set and LST FRC to query ImsInitialAccessRate.

6-33
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
HSDPA Parameters
About This Chapter

This describes HSDPA parameters as follows: HSDPA power resource management parameters,
HSDPA code resource management algorithm parameters, HSDPA mobility management
parameters, HSDPA direct retry and switch of channel types parameters, and HSDPA call
admission control algorithm parameters.
7.1 HSDPA Power Resource Management Parameters
This describes the HSDPA power resource management parameters. Based on three different
UE capabilities, the minimum TTI interval for UE to receive data on HS-PDSCH is 1, 2, or 3
TTIs. For the default configuration, inside the brackets is the physical value while outside the
brackets is the cell value.
7.2 HSDPA Code Resource Management Parameters
This describes the HSDPA code resource management parameters that can be modified by
network planners.
7.3 HSDPA Mobility Management Parameters
The common configurable HSDPA mobility management parameters are listed here.
7.4 HSDPA Direct Retry and Channel Type Switch Parameters
This describes the HSDPA direct retry and channel type switch parameters that can be modified
by network planners.
7.5 HSDPA Admission Control Parameters
This describes the HSDPA admission control parameters that can be modified by network
planners.

7-1
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
7.1 HSDPA Power Resource Management Parameters

This describes the HSDPA power resource management parameters. Based on three different
UE capabilities, the minimum TTI interval for UE to receive data on HS-PDSCH is 1, 2, or 3
TTIs. For the default configuration, inside the brackets is the physical value while outside the
brackets is the cell value.
7.1.1 HSPA Total Power and Measurement Power Offset Constant
This describes the HSPA total power and measurement power offset constant that can be
modified by network planners.
7.1.2 F-DPCH Power Control Parameter
This describes the F-DPCH power control RNC-oriented parameters.
7.1.1 HSPA Total Power and Measurement Power Offset Constant

This describes the HSPA total power and measurement power offset constant that can be
modified by network planners.
Table 7-1 HSPA total power and measurement power offset constant
S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Defau
lt
Confi
gurati
on
MML Command
Lev
el
Power offset of
the total power of
HSPA relative to
the cell maximum
transmit power
0 dB
Set: ADD CELLHSDPA
Cell
Measurement
power offset
constant. Measure
Power Offset =
Min
(13,CellMaxPowe
r - PcpichPower Measure Power
Offset Constant)
2.5 dB
HspaPower
HsPdschM
POConstEn
um
Query: LST CELLHSDPA

Modify: MOD CELLHSDPA
7.1.1.1 HSPA Total Power

This describes the offset between the maximum value of the sum of HS-PDSCH, HS-SCCH, EAGCH, E-RGCH, and E-HICH and the maximum transmit power of a cell.
7-2

RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
7.1.1.2 Measurement Power Offset Constant

This describes the constant that is used to calculate the measurement power offset (MPO).
HSPA Total Power

This describes the offset between the maximum value of the sum of HS-PDSCH, HS-SCCH, EAGCH, E-RGCH, and E-HICH and the maximum transmit power of a cell.
ID
HspaPower
Value Range
500 to 0
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value of is 0, namely 0 dB.

The maximum value for dynamic power adjustment affects the throughput of HSDPA
subscribers on the edge of a cell.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLHSDPA to set, LST CELLHSDPA to query, and MOD CELLHSDPA to
modify the total HSPA power.
Measurement Power Offset Constant

This describes the constant that is used to calculate the measurement power offset (MPO).
ID
HsPdschMPOConstEnum
Value Range
3 to 19
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value is 2.5, namely 2.5 dB.

7-3
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters

It helps calculate the MPO ().
Measure Power Offset = Max ( -6, Min (13, CellMaxPower - PcpichPower - Measure Power
Offset Constant))
According to the formula PHSPDSCH = PCPICH + + , calculate PHSPDSCH, and then convert it
to CQI. This parameter is used to adjust the distribution of CQI reported by UE. In order to
schedule and resource allocate based on correct channel quality on the network side, make sure
that the value of CQI cannot be 0 or 30.
Related Commands
modify HsPdschMPOConstEnum.
7.1.2 F-DPCH Power Control Parameter

This describes the F-DPCH power control RNC-oriented parameters.
Table 7-2 List of F-DPCH parameters
S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
O
.
Meaning
Defa
ult
Confi
gurati
on
MML Command
Le
vel
F-DPCH power
offset
3 dB
Set: SET FPDCHPARA
RN
C
FdpchPO2
Query: LST
FPDCHPARA
FDPCHMAXREFPW
R
F-DPCH
maximum
reference power
-3 dB
FDPCHMINREFPWR
F-DPCH
minimum
reference power
-20 dB
Set: SET
FDPCHRLPWR
Query: LST
FDPCHRLPWR
7.1.2.1 F-DPCH Power Offset

The parameter indicating the power offset of TPC command on F-DPCH channel relative to
Reference F-DPCH TX power
7.1.2.2 F-DPCH Maximum Reference Power
This parameter is used to limit the F-DPCH maximum transmit power.
7.1.2.3 F-DPCH Minimum Reference Power
7-4

RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
This parameter is used to limit the F-DPCH minimum transmit power.
F-DPCH Power Offset

The parameter indicating the power offset of TPC command on F-DPCH channel relative to
Reference F-DPCH TX power
ID
FdpchPO2
Value Range
0 to 24
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value of is 12, namely 3 dB.

If the parameter is set too large, some power will be wasted. If the parameter is set too low, the
quality of F-DPCH can't be ensured.
Related Commands
Use SET FDPCHPARA to set, LST FDPCHPARA to query.
F-DPCH Maximum Reference Power

This parameter is used to limit the F-DPCH maximum transmit power.
ID
FDPCHMAXREFPWR
Value Range
-350 to 150
Physical Scope
-35 dB to 15 dB, with the step of 0.1 dB
Setting

7-5
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters

If the parameter is set too large, the F-DPCH power will be largely consumed. If the parameter
is set too small, the F-DPCH coverage can't be ensured.
Related Commands
Use SET FDPCHRLPWR to set, LST FDPCHRLPWR to query.
F-DPCH Minimum Reference Power

This parameter is used to limit the F-DPCH minimum transmit power.
ID
FDPCHMINREFPWR
Value Range
-350 to 150
Physical Scope
-35 dB to 15 dB, with the step of 0.1 dB
Setting

If the parameter is set too large, the F-DPCH power will be largely consumed. If the parameter
is set too small, the F-DPCH power control may be longer.
Related Commands
Use SET FDPCHRLPWR to set, LST FDPCHRLPWR to query.
7.2 HSDPA Code Resource Management Parameters

This describes the HSDPA code resource management parameters that can be modified by
network planners.
7-6

RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
Table 7-3 List of HSDPA code resource management parameters

S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Defa
ult
Conf
igura
tion
MML Command
Lev
el
AllocCodeMode
HSDPA code
resource allocation
mode (Manual,
Automatic)
Auto
matic
Set: ADD CELLHSDPA

Query: LST CELLHSDPA
Modify: MOD
CELLHSDPA
Cell
HsPdschCodeNum
Number of HSPDSCH codes.

Valid when
AllocCodeMode is
set to Manual.
HsPdschMaxCode
Num
Maximum number
of HS-PDSCH
codes. Valid when
AllocCodeMode is
set to Automatic.
10
HsPdschMinCode
Num
Minimum number
of HS-PDSCH
codes. Valid when
AllocCodeMode is
set to Automatic.
HsScchCodeNum
Number of HSSCCH codes
7.2.1 HSDPA Code Resource Allocation Mode

This describes the HSDPA code resource allocation mode: automatic or manual.
7.2.2 Number of HS-PDSCH Codes
This describes the number of HS-PDSCH codes. The number of HS-PDSCH codes is valid only
when AllocCodeMode is set to Manual.
7.2.3 Maximum Number of HS-PDSCH Codes
This describes the maximum number of HS-PDSCH codes. The maximum number of HSPDSCH codes is valid only when AllocCodeMode is set to Automatic.
7.2.4 Minimum Number of HS-PDSCH Codes
This describes the minimum number of HS-PDSCH codes. The minimum number of HSPDSCH codes is valid only when AllocCodeMode is set to Automatic.
7.2.5 Number of HS-SCCH Codes
This describes the number of codes allocated for the HS-SCCH.

7-7
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
7.2.1 HSDPA Code Resource Allocation Mode

This describes the HSDPA code resource allocation mode: automatic or manual.
ID
AllocCodeMode
Value Range
Automatic, Manual
Physical Scope
Automatic means automatic allocation. Manual means manual allocation.
Setting
The default value is Automatic.
At the early stage of network construction, or when the traffic model of subscribers in a cell is
not fixed, AllocCodeMode can be set to Automatic to have the HSDPA channel codes be
automatically allocated. If the traffic model of subscribers in a cell is fixed and known,
AllocCodeMode can be set to Manual to select the static allocation mode.

Manual allocation leads to restriction of HSDPA code resource or leaves HSDPA code resource
idle.
Related Commands
modify AllocCodeMode.
7.2.2 Number of HS-PDSCH Codes

This describes the number of HS-PDSCH codes. The number of HS-PDSCH codes is valid only
when AllocCodeMode is set to Manual.
ID
HsPdschCodeNum
Value Range
1 to 15
Physical Scope
None.
7-8

RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
Setting
HsPdschCodeNum is set according to actual traffic model of a cell. The default value of
HsPdschCodeNum is 4.

l
If HsPdschCodeNum is excessively low, the HSDPA code resource is restricted.
If HsPdschCodeNum is excessively high, the HSDPA code resource is wasted and the
admission rejection rate of R99 services increases due to code resource.
Related Commands
modify HsPdschCodeNum.
7.2.3 Maximum Number of HS-PDSCH Codes

This describes the maximum number of HS-PDSCH codes. The maximum number of HSPDSCH codes is valid only when AllocCodeMode is set to Automatic.
ID
HsPdschMaxCodeNum
Value Range
1 to 15
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
HsPdschMaxCodeNum is set according to the actual traffic model of a cell. The default value
of HsPdschMaxCodeNum is 10.

In automatic HSDPA code allocation mode, set the maximum number of HS-PDSCH codes to
a comparatively high value.
Related Commands
modify HsPdschMaxCodeNum.
7.2.4 Minimum Number of HS-PDSCH Codes

This describes the minimum number of HS-PDSCH codes. The minimum number of HSPDSCH codes is valid only when AllocCodeMode is set to Automatic.

7-9
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
ID
HsPdschMinCodeNum
Value Range
1 to 15
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
HsPdschMinCodeNum is set according to the actual traffic model of a cell. The default value
of HsPdschMinCodeNum is 5.

In automatic HSDPA code allocation mode, set the minimum number of HS-PDSCH codes to
a comparatively low value. In addition, HsPdschMinCodeNum must be not higher than
HsPdschMaxCodeNum.
Related Commands
modify HsPdschMinCodeNum.
7.2.5 Number of HS-SCCH Codes

This describes the number of codes allocated for the HS-SCCH.
ID
HsScchCodeNum
Value Range
1 to 15
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
HsScchCodeNum is set according to actual traffic model of a cell. The default value of
HsScchCodeNum is 4.

HsScchCodeNum decides the maximum number of subscribers that the NodeB can schedule
in a TTI period. In the scenarios like outdoor macro cells with power restricted, it is less likely
7-10

RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
to schedule multiple subscribers simultaneously, so two HS-SCCHs are configured. In the

scenarios like indoor pico with code restricted, it is more likely to schedule multiple subscribers
simultaneously, so four HS-SCCHs are configured. If excessive HS-SCCHs are configured, the
code resource is wasted. If insufficient HS-SCCHs are configured, the HS-PDSCH code resource
or power resource is wasted. Both affect the cell throughput rate.
Related Commands
modify HsScchCodeNum.
7.3 HSDPA Mobility Management Parameters

The common configurable HSDPA mobility management parameters are listed here.
Table 7-4 List of HSDPA mobility management parameters
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant Command
Level
HSPATIMERLE
N
HSPA
handover
protection
length
0 (0 s)
Set or modify:SET HOCOMM
RNC
Query: LST HOCOMM
7.3.1 HSPA Handover Protection Length

According to event 1D trigger, HSPA uses a protection timer (TimerHSPA) to: Guerantee that
HSPA does not change serving cell frequently; Affect system performance. When event 1D
triggers HSPA handover, the timer starts. Before the TimerHSPA expires, the event 1D does
not trigger HSPA handover. If the value is 0, the system does not start the timer, namely, event
1D immediately trigger HSPA handover. If the value is 1024, the HSPA handover will never be
triggered until the cell to bear HSPA service is unlisted.
7.3.1 HSPA Handover Protection Length

According to event 1D trigger, HSPA uses a protection timer (TimerHSPA) to: Guerantee that
HSPA does not change serving cell frequently; Affect system performance. When event 1D
triggers HSPA handover, the timer starts. Before the TimerHSPA expires, the event 1D does
not trigger HSPA handover. If the value is 0, the system does not start the timer, namely, event
1D immediately trigger HSPA handover. If the value is 1024, the HSPA handover will never be
triggered until the cell to bear HSPA service is unlisted.
Parameter ID
HSPATIMERLEN
Value Range
0 to 1024

7-11
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters

0 s to 1024 s
Parameter Setting
The default value is 0 s.
The serving cell is updated between different NodeBs. The buffer of original MAC-hs is reset,
so the data in the buffer is missing. As a result, the interruption time of data transfer exists. The
length of interruption time of data transfer is relevant to implementation of flow control
algorithm and RLC parameter configuration. The unit is hundred mill-second.
In the scenarios with great fluctuation of signals, if the process occurs frequently, the subscriber
keeps in the state of restoring data transfer, interruption of data transfer, and then restoring data
transfer. This impacts the average throughput.
Set this parameter to control the frequency of update of serving cell. As a result, the impact of
the process on performance of HSPA data transfer is controlled. If the flow control algorithm
can control data in MAC-hs buffer accurately, set the parameter to 0.
If the parameter is too large in the scenarios with great fluctuation of signals, report event 1D
by UE before expiration is more probable. When the UE reports event 1D before expiration, due
to the parameter restriction, the serving cell keeps being weak cell. As a result, the throughput
declines.
Figure 7-1 Impact from over long HSPA protection length

Set it properly to restrict the frequency to update serving cell in the scenarios with great
fluctuation of signals. This helps control the interruption of data transfer in serving cell update
between different NodeBs. It also helps control the impact on subscriber throughput.
7-12

RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
Relevant Commands
Set it through SET HOCOMM. Query it through LST HOCOMM.
7.4 HSDPA Direct Retry and Channel Type Switch

Parameters
This describes the HSDPA direct retry and channel type switch parameters that can be modified
Table 7-5 List of HSDPA direct retry and channel type switch parameters
Se
ria
l
N
o.
ID
Meaning
Defau
lt
Confi
gurati
on
MML Command
Le
ve
l
HRetryTimerL
en
D2H retry
timer length
5s
Set: SET COIFTIMER
R
N
C
D2HIntraHoTi
merLen
Timer length
of D2H intrafrequency
handover
2s
D2HInterHoTi
merLen
Timer length
of D2H interfrequency
handover
5s
MultiCarrierH
oTimerLen
Timer length
of multicarrier
handover
14 s
HsdpaCMPer
missionInd
CM
permission
indicator on
HSDPA
TURE
Query: LST COIFTIMER

Set: SET HOCOMM
Query: LST HOCOMM
Set: SET CMCF

Query: LST CMCF
7.4.1 D2H Retry Timer Length

This describes the D2H retry timer length. If a service is preferably to be mapped to the HSDSCH but is actually mapped to the DCH, the D2H retry timer starts. If H2D occurs, the D2H
retry timer starts only after the D2H punishment timer expires.
7.4.2 Intra-Frequency Handover D2H Timer Length
This describes the intra-frequency handover D2H timer length. After a UE finishes the intrafrequency handover, the system starts the D2H intra-frequency handover timer and performs the
D2H retry after the timer expires, if the current cell after the handover supports HSDPA or has
a DRD neighboring cell. If the intra-frequency handover D2H timer length is set to 0, the D2H
retry is triggered immediately after the intra-frequency handover.

7-13
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
7.4.3 Inter-Frequency Handover D2H Timer Length

This describes the D2H inter-frequency handover timer length. After a UE finishes the intrafrequency handover, the system starts the D2H inter-frequency handover timer and performs the
D2H retry after the timer expires, if the current cell after the handover does not support HSDPA
but has a DRD neighboring cell. If the inter-frequency handover D2H timer length is set to 0,
the D2H retry is triggered immediately after the inter-frequency handover.
7.4.4 Multi-Carrier Handover Timer Length
This describes the multi-carrier handover timer length. To prevent ping-pong handovers between
multiple carriers, which have a bad effect on the system performance, a protect timer
MultiCarrierHoTimerLen is needed. After the UE is handed over from cell A, the timer starts
up. Before the timer expires, the HSDPA or HSUPA service is not directly redirected to cell A.
If the timer length is set to 0, the timer does not start up, that is, it does not prevent the pingpong handovers between multiples carriers.
7.4.5 Compress Mode Permission Indication on HSDPA
This describes the compress mode permission indication on HSDPA. If the compress mode
permission indication is set to TRUE, the CM (Compress Mode) is permitted on HSDPA, and
HSDPA can exist with CM activated. If the compress mode permission indication is set to
FALSE, H2D is needed before the CM is activated when HSDPA exists, and HSDPA cannot
exist when CM is activated.
7.4.1 D2H Retry Timer Length

This describes the D2H retry timer length. If a service is preferably to be mapped to the HSDSCH but is actually mapped to the DCH, the D2H retry timer starts. If H2D occurs, the D2H
retry timer starts only after the D2H punishment timer expires.
ID
HRetryTimerLen
Value Range
0 to 180
Physical Scope
0, 1 to 180 s
Setting
The default value is 5 (5 s).
When the D2H timer is set to 0, the H retry function is closed.
7-14
If HRetryTimerLen is excessively high, the D2H handover does not occur when the
subscribers data can be carried on HSDPA. This affects subscriber perception.
If HRetryTimerLen is excessively low, useless direct retry occurs. As a result, extra

signaling interaction occurs and the network resource is wasted.
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
Related Commands
Use SET COIFTIMER to set and LST COIFTIMER to query HRetryTimerLen.
7.4.2 Intra-Frequency Handover D2H Timer Length

This describes the intra-frequency handover D2H timer length. After a UE finishes the intrafrequency handover, the system starts the D2H intra-frequency handover timer and performs the
D2H retry after the timer expires, if the current cell after the handover supports HSDPA or has
a DRD neighboring cell. If the intra-frequency handover D2H timer length is set to 0, the D2H
retry is triggered immediately after the intra-frequency handover.
ID
D2HIntraHoTimerLen
Value Range
0 to 999
Physical Scope
0 s to 999 s
Setting

l
If D2HIntraHoTimerLen is excessively high, the D2H is not triggered in time after an

intra-frequency handover. This may affect the QoS.
If D2HIntraHoTimerLen is excessively low, the ping-pong handover between H2D and

D2H may occur in some scenarios.
Related Commands
Use SET HOCOMM to set and user LST HOCOMM to query D2HIntraHoTimerLen.
7.4.3 Inter-Frequency Handover D2H Timer Length

This describes the D2H inter-frequency handover timer length. After a UE finishes the intrafrequency handover, the system starts the D2H inter-frequency handover timer and performs the
D2H retry after the timer expires, if the current cell after the handover does not support HSDPA
but has a DRD neighboring cell. If the inter-frequency handover D2H timer length is set to 0,
the D2H retry is triggered immediately after the inter-frequency handover.
ID
D2HInterHoTimerLen

7-15
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
Value Range
0 to 180
Physical Scope
0 s to 180 s
Setting

l
If D2HInterHoTimerLen is excessively high, the D2H is not triggered in time after an

inter-frequency handover. This may affect the QoS.
If D2HInterHoTimerLen is excessively low, the ping-pong handover between H2D and

D2H may occur in some scenarios.
Related Commands
Use SET HOCOMM to set and LST HOCOMM to query D2HInterHoTimerLen.
7.4.4 Multi-Carrier Handover Timer Length

This describes the multi-carrier handover timer length. To prevent ping-pong handovers between
multiple carriers, which have a bad effect on the system performance, a protect timer
MultiCarrierHoTimerLen is needed. After the UE is handed over from cell A, the timer starts
up. Before the timer expires, the HSDPA or HSUPA service is not directly redirected to cell A.
If the timer length is set to 0, the timer does not start up, that is, it does not prevent the pingpong handovers between multiples carriers.
ID
MultiCarrierHoTimerLen
Value Range
0 to 999
Physical Scope
0 s to 999 s
Setting

l
7-16
If MultiCarrierHoTimerLen is excessively high, the handover to the original cell may

not be triggered in time after multi-carrier handovers. This may affect the QoS.
RAN
l
7 HSDPA Parameters
If MultiCarrierHoTimerLen is excessively low, the ping-pong handover between

multiple carriers occurs in some scenarios.
Related Commands
Use SET HOCOMM to set DivCtrlField and LST HOCOMM to query
MultiCarrierHoTimerLen.
7.4.5 Compress Mode Permission Indication on HSDPA

This describes the compress mode permission indication on HSDPA. If the compress mode
permission indication is set to TRUE, the CM (Compress Mode) is permitted on HSDPA, and
HSDPA can exist with CM activated. If the compress mode permission indication is set to
FALSE, H2D is needed before the CM is activated when HSDPA exists, and HSDPA cannot
exist when CM is activated.
ID
HsdpaCMPermissionInd
Value Range
FALSE (not permitted), TRUE (permitted)
Physical Scope
0, 1
Setting
The default value is TRUE.

If the terminal supports this function, the terminal has a better performance when the CM is
activated with HSDPA connected.
Related Commands
Use SET CMCF to set and LST CMCF to query HsdpaCMPermissionInd.
7.5 HSDPA Admission Control Parameters

This describes the HSDPA admission control parameters that can be modified by network
planners.

7-17
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
Table 7-6 List of admission control parameters

Ser
ial
No
.
ID
Meaning
Default
Configurati
on
MML Command
Level
NodeBHsd
paMaxUse
rNum
Maximum
number of
HSDPA users
of the NodeB
3840
Set: ADD
NODEBALGOPAR
A
NodeB
Query: LST
NODEBALGOPAR
A
Modify: MOD
NODEBALGOPAR
A
UlHsDpcc
hRsvdFact
or
UL HSDPCCH reserve
factor
HsdpaStr
mPBRThd
HSDPA
streaming PBR
threshold
70%
HsdpaBeP
BRThd
HSDPA BE
service PBR
threshold
30%
MaxHSDS
CHUserN
um
Maximum
number of users
supported by
the HS-DSCH
64
Set: ADD CELLCAC

Query: LST
CELLCAC
Modify: MOD
CELLCAC
Cell
7.5.1 Maximum HSDPA Users Per NodeB

This describes the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSDPA channel per
NodeB.
7.5.2 Uplink HS-DPCCH Reserve Factor
This describes the uplink HS-DPCCH reserve factor. If the uplink HS-DPCCH bears ACK and
NACK messages, the system does not perform the CAC. If the HS-DPCCH bears CQI messages,
the system performs the CAC. The uplink HS-DPCCH reserve factor is the resource reserved
when the uplink HS-DPCCH bears ACK/NACK messages. The CAC threshold equals the
product of the UL limit capacity and the uplink HS-DPCCH reserve factor.
7.5.3 HSDPA Streaming PBR Threshold
This describes the average throughput admission threshold of the HSDPA streaming traffic.
7.5.4 HSDPA BE Service PBR Threshold
This describes the average throughput admission threshold of the HSDPA BE service.
7.5.5 Maximum HSDPA User Number
This describes the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSDPA channel.
7-18

RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
7.5.1 Maximum HSDPA Users Per NodeB

This describes the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSDPA channel per
NodeB.
ID
NodeBHsdpaMaxUserNum
Value Range
0 to 3840
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
NodeBHsdpaMaxUserNum is set according to the product specification and actual number of
sold HSDPA licenses.

If the HSDPA user connection is rejected by the NodeB, you can infer that the HSDPA licenses
are insufficient. We need to apply for new HSDPA licenses.
Related Commands
Use ADD NODEBALGOPARA to set, LST NODEBALGOPARA to query, and MOD
NODEBALGOPARA to modify NodeBHsdpaMaxUserNum.
7.5.2 Uplink HS-DPCCH Reserve Factor

This describes the uplink HS-DPCCH reserve factor. If the uplink HS-DPCCH bears ACK and
NACK messages, the system does not perform the CAC. If the HS-DPCCH bears CQI messages,
the system performs the CAC. The uplink HS-DPCCH reserve factor is the resource reserved
when the uplink HS-DPCCH bears ACK/NACK messages. The CAC threshold equals the
product of the UL limit capacity and the uplink HS-DPCCH reserve factor.
ID
UlHsDpcchRsvdFactor
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0 to 1, with the step of 0.01

7-19
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
Setting
Because the current ACK and NACK channel power on the HS-DPCCH is included in the public
measurement of the Iub interface, the uplink HS-DPCCH reverse factor is set according to the
ACK/NACK load that may burst on the HS-DPCCH during the interval of two measurement
processes. In general, the burst data in such a short time rarely have any impact, so the uplink
HS-DPCCH reverse factor can be set to 0 by default.

l
If UlHsDpcchRsvdFactor is excessively high, the probability of admission rejection

increases.
If UlHsDpcchRsvdFactor is excessively low, the reserved uplink resource is insufficient.

But because the probability of the burst load of ACK/NACK messages is low and the effect
is small, UlHsDpcchRsvdFactor can be set to a comparatively lower value so as to admit
more connections.
Related Commands
UlHsDpcchRsvdFactor.
7.5.3 HSDPA Streaming PBR Threshold

This describes the average throughput admission threshold of the HSDPA streaming traffic.
ID
HsdpaStrmPBRThd
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0% to 100%
Setting
For the HSDPA admission, the system needs to meet the following condition:
, where,
7-20
PBRstrm is the total throughput of the streaming service provided by the cell.
Thdhsdpa_strm_PBR is the average throughput admission threshold of the HSDPA streaming

service.
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters

This parameter is likely a active factor of streaming service. If the HsdpaStrmPBRThd is
excessively high, the admission mistaken rejection rate may increase. If the
HsdpaStrmPBRThd is excessively low, the mistakenly admission rate may increase, the GBR
of subscribers cannot be guaranteed.
Related Commands
HsdpaStrmPBRThd.
7.5.4 HSDPA BE Service PBR Threshold

This describes the average throughput admission threshold of the HSDPA BE service.
ID
HsdpaBePBRThd
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0% to 100%
Setting
For the HSDPA admission, the system needs to meet the following condition:
, where,
l
PBRBE is the total throughput of the BE service provided by the cell.
Thdhsdpa_BE_pbr is the average throughput admission threshold of the HSDPA BE service.

This parameter is likely a active factor of BE service. If the HsdpaBePBRThd is excessively
high, the admission mistaken rejection rate may increase. If the HsdpaBePBRThd is excessively
low, the mistakenly admission rate may increase, the GBR of subscribers cannot be guaranteed.
Related Commands
HsdpaBePBRThd.
7.5.5 Maximum HSDPA User Number

This describes the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSDPA channel.

7-21
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
ID
MaxHSDSCHUserNum
Value Range
0 to 64
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The number of subscribers supported by the HSDPA refers to the number of subscribers whose
service is carried by the HSDPA channel, no matter how many RABs are borne by the HSDPA
channel. The highest value of MaxHSDSCHUserNum equals the cell HSDPA capacity that is
prescribed in the NodeB product specification. MaxHSDSCHUserNum can be set according
to the cell type, the available power of HSDPA, and the code resource.

l
If MaxHSDSCHUserNum is excessively low, the HSDPA capacity of cell may be

reduced, causing a waste of the HSDPA resource.
If MaxHSDSCHUserNum is excessively high, the congestion of HSDPA service may be

caused.
Related Commands
MaxHSDSCHUserNum.
7-22

RAN
8 HSUPA Parameters
HSUPA Parameters
About This Chapter

This describes the HSUPA parameters: HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters,
HSUPA power control parameters, and HSUPA admission control parameters.
8.1 HSUPA MAC-e Scheduling Algorithm Parameters
This describes the HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters that can be modified by
network planners.
8.2 HSUPA Admission Control Parameters
This describes the HSUPA admission control parameters that can be modified by network
planners.
8.3 HSUPA Outer Loop Power Control Parameters
This describes the HSUPA outer loop power control parameters that can be modified by network
planners.

8-1
RAN
8 HSUPA Parameters

network planners.
Table 8-1 List of HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters
S ID
e
ri
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configur
ation
MML Command
Le
vel
MaxTargetUlL
oadFactor
Maximum target uplink

load factor
75%
Cel
l
NonServToTot
alEdchPwrRati
o
Target non-serving EDCH to total E-DCH

power ratio
Set: ADD
CELLHSUPA
Query: LST
CELLHSUPA
Hsupa2msTtiR
ateThs
Rate Threshold for

HSUPA 2 ms TTI
384 kbit/s
Set: SET FRC
RN
C
Query: LST FRC
8.1.1 Maximum Target Uplink Load Factor

This describes the target uplink load factor of the NodeB scheduling module. The RNC calculates
the maximum RTWP value according to this factor, and then sends it to the NodeB by the Iub
message.
8.1.2 Rate Threshold for HSUPA 2 ms TTI
Only HSUPA services with uplink bit rate reaching this threshold can use 2ms as their E-DCH
TTI value, otherwise use 10ms as the E-DCH TTI value.
8.1.3 Threshold of Non-Serving E-DCH to Total E-DCH Power Ratio
This describes the threshold of the ratio of the non-serving E-DCH power to the total E-DCH
power. The non-serving NodeB sends RG DOWN to the UE only when the ratio of the nonserving E-DCH power to the total E-DCH power is higher than this threshold.
8.1.1 Maximum Target Uplink Load Factor

This describes the target uplink load factor of the NodeB scheduling module. The RNC calculates
the maximum RTWP value according to this factor, and then sends it to the NodeB by the Iub
message.
ID
MaxTargetUlLoadFactor
8-2

RAN
8 HSUPA Parameters
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0% to 100%
Setting

This parameter is set according to the radio network planning.
l
If MaxTargetUlLoadFactor is excessively low, the cell throughput is excessively low.
If MaxTargetUlLoadFactor is excessively high, the interference is excessively high.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLHSUPA to set and LST CELLHSUPA to query MaxTargetUlLoadFactor.
8.1.2 Rate Threshold for HSUPA 2 ms TTI

Only HSUPA services with uplink bit rate reaching this threshold can use 2ms as their E-DCH
TTI value, otherwise use 10ms as the E-DCH TTI value.
ID
Hsupa2msTtiRateThs
Value Range
D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384, D608, D1450
Physical Scope
1450 kbit/s
Setting

If the parameter is set too low, the low-speed service use the 2 ms TTI which lead to the waste
of CE resource. If the parameter is set too high, the high-speed service cannot use the 2 ms TTI
which lead to influence on QoS of traffic.

8-3
RAN
8 HSUPA Parameters
Related Commands
Use SET FRC to set and LST FRC to query Hsupa2msTtiRateThs.
8.1.3 Threshold of Non-Serving E-DCH to Total E-DCH Power

Ratio
This describes the threshold of the ratio of the non-serving E-DCH power to the total E-DCH
power. The non-serving NodeB sends RG DOWN to the UE only when the ratio of the nonserving E-DCH power to the total E-DCH power is higher than this threshold.
ID
NonServToTotalEdchPwrRatio
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0% to 100%
Setting

This parameter is used to decide whether the non-serving NodeB sends RG DOWN to the UE.
l
If NonServToTotalEdchPwrRatio is excessively low, the power of non-serving RL is

very low, and the UE data rate is affected when the UE is in soft handover status.
If NonServToTotalEdchPwrRatio is excessively high, the non-serving RL can not send

RG DOWN to the UE even if the system is overloaded.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLHSUPA to set and use LST CELLHSUPA to query
NonServToTotalEdchPwrRatio.
8.2 HSUPA Admission Control Parameters

This describes the HSUPA admission control parameters that can be modified by network
planners.
8-4

RAN
8 HSUPA Parameters
Table 8-2 List of HSUPA admission control parameters

S ID
e
ri
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configur
ation
MML Command
Le
vel
MAXHSUPA
USERNUM
Maximum number of
users supported by the
HSUPA
64
Cel
l
HsupaNonServ
InterfereFactor
HSUPA Non-serveice
cell interfere factor
HsupaLowPrio
rityUserPBRT
hd
PBR satisfaction for

HSUPA different priority
users
100/100/1
00
Set: ADD
CELLCAC
Query: LST
CELLCAC
Modify: MOD
CELLCAC
Set: ADD
NODEBALGOPAR
A
No
de
B
HsupaEqualPri
orityUserPBR
Thd
HsupaHighPri
orityUserPBR
Thd
4
DLHSUPARS
VDFACTOR
DL HSUPA reserved
factor
NodeBHsupa
MaxUserNum
Maximum number of
users of the HSUPA in
the NodeB
3840
Query: LST
NODEBALGOPAR
A
Modify: MOD
NODEBALGOPAR
A
8.2.1 Maximum HSUPA User Number

This describes the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSUPA channel. The
parameter is used for the HSUPA admission control.
8.2.2 HSUPA Non-Serveice Cell Interfere Factor
This parameter indicates that the ratio of uplink interference generated by the non-service RL
in an HSUPA cell to the total uplink interference.
8.2.3 PBR satisfaction for HSUPA different priority users
This group of parameters indicates the threshold of PBR satisfaction decision. The parameter
affects HSUPA scheduling service access. The QoS satisfaction of the existing service is used
to allow new users to access.

8-5
RAN
8 HSUPA Parameters
8.2.4 Downlink HSUPA Reserved Factor

This describes the downlink HSUPA reserved factor. The parameter is used to reserve part of
resource for downlink control channels: E-AGCH, E-RGCH, and E-HICH.
8.2.5 Maximum HSUPA User Number Per NodeB
This describes the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSUPA channel per
NodeB.
8.2.1 Maximum HSUPA User Number

This describes the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSUPA channel. The
parameter is used for the HSUPA admission control.
ID
MaxHsupaUserNum
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0 to 100
Setting
This parameter represents the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSUPA
channel and is set according to the product specification. For the HSUPA admission, the number
of subscribers must be counted first. If the current HSUPA subscriber number is lower than this
parameter, the admission request is being analyzed, or else, the admission is rejected directly.

l
If MaxHsupaUserNum is excessively high, the product capacity cannot support all the
HSUPA users after admission, and cannot provide satisfying services.
If MaxHsupaUserNum is excessively low, part of the subscribers are rejected for

admission, and part of the resource is idle and wasted, thus decreasing the system capacity.
Related Commands
MaxHsupaUserNum.
8.2.2 HSUPA Non-Serveice Cell Interfere Factor

This parameter indicates that the ratio of uplink interference generated by the non-service RL
in an HSUPA cell to the total uplink interference.
ID
HsupaNonServInterfereFactor
8-6

RAN
8 HSUPA Parameters
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0 to 100%
Setting
The ratio of HSUPA users and soft handover in the system is considered when setting this
parameter. If the ratio of HSUPA users and soft handover in the system is large, this parameter
should be increased.

l
If HsupaNonServInterfereFactor is excessively low, the product capacity cannot support

all the HSUPA users after admission, and cannot provide satisfying services.
If HsupaNonServInterfereFactor is excessively high, part of the subscribers are rejected

for admission, and part of the resource is idle and wasted, thus decreasing the system
capacity.
Related Commands
HsupaNonServInterfereFactor.
8.2.3 PBR satisfaction for HSUPA different priority users

This group of parameters indicates the threshold of PBR satisfaction decision. The parameter
affects HSUPA scheduling service access. The QoS satisfaction of the existing service is used
to allow new users to access.
ID
HsupaNonServInterfereFactor
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0 to 100%
Setting
During setting, the characteristics of the scheduling service, the setting of GBR and GBR
guarantee strategy should be considered. To ensure GBR of users, set the parameter to 100. If
the requirement for GBR is low, the parameter can be set to a value less than 100.

8-7
RAN
8 HSUPA Parameters

If the parameter is set too large, the requirement for users PBR satisfaction is higher, and the
probability of refusing HSUPA scheduling service increases, thus affecting access success rate.
If the value is too small, the requirement for users PBR satisfaction is lower, and too many
HSUPA scheduling service users may be accessed, thus affecting the satisfaction of accessed
users and resulting in system congestion due to serious load.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modify the
parameters.
8.2.4 Downlink HSUPA Reserved Factor

This describes the downlink HSUPA reserved factor. The parameter is used to reserve part of
resource for downlink control channels: E-AGCH, E-RGCH, and E-HICH.
ID
DlHSUPARsvdFactor
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
Setting

The higher DlHSUPARsvdFactor is, the more resource is reserved for the HSUPA control
channel, and thus the more resource is wasted.
If DlHSUPARsvdFactor is excessively low, the HSUPA service quality is affected when the
resource is limited.
Related Commands
DlHSUPARsvdFactor.
8.2.5 Maximum HSUPA User Number Per NodeB

This describes the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSUPA channel per
NodeB.
8-8

RAN
8 HSUPA Parameters
ID
NodeBHsupaMaxUserNum
Value Range
0 to 3840
Physical Scope
0 to 3840
Setting
NodeBHsupaMaxUserNum is set according to the product specification and actual number of
sold HSUPA licenses.

If the HSUPA subscriber connection is rejected by the NodeB, you can infer that the HSUPA
licenses are insufficient. We need to apply for new HSUPA licenses.
Related Commands
NODEBALGOPARA to modify NodeBHsupaMaxUserNum.
8.3 HSUPA Outer Loop Power Control Parameters

This describes the HSUPA outer loop power control parameters that can be modified by network
planners.
Table 8-3 List of HSUPA outer loop power control parameters
S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Defau
lt
Confi
gurati
on
MML Command
Lev
el
Target number of
E-DCH PDU
retransmission
0.1
Set: ADD TYPRABOLPC

Query: LST TYPRABOLPC
Modify: MOD TYPRABOLPC
RA
B
EdchTarget
RetransNu
m

8-9
RAN
8 HSUPA Parameters
S ID
e
r
i
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Defau
lt
Confi
gurati
on
Target value of EDCH residual

BLER
N/A
ResBLER
MML Command
Lev
el
8.3.1 HSUPA Outer Loop Power Control Switch

This switch is used to select HSUPA outer loop power control algorithm.
8.3.2 Target Number of E-DCH PDU Retransmission
This parameter specifies the target number of E-DCH PDU Mac-es retransmission.
8.3.3 Target Value of E-DCH Residual BLER
This parameter indicates the target transmission quality of E-DCH, that is, the target residual
BLER value.
8.3.1 HSUPA Outer Loop Power Control Switch

This switch is used to select HSUPA outer loop power control algorithm.
Parameter ID
OlpcAlgSwitch
Value Range
Enum (BASEDONRESIDUALBLER, BASEDONMEANNHT)

BASEDONRESIDUALBLER, BASEDONMEANNHT
Parameter Setting
For BE and streaming services, set this parameter to BASEDONMEANNHT.
For conversational services, set this parameter to BASEDONRESIDUALBLER.

None.
8-10

RAN
8 HSUPA Parameters
Relevant Commands
Use ADD TYPRABOLPC to set, LST TYPRABOLPC to query and MOD
TYPRABOLPC to modifyOlpcAlgSwitch.
8.3.2 Target Number of E-DCH PDU Retransmission

This parameter specifies the target number of E-DCH PDU Mac-es retransmission.
ID
EdchTargetRetransNum
Value Range
0 to 150
Physical Scope
0 to 15, step is 0.1.
Setting
The default value is 1, namely 0.1.

The smaller the parameter is, the better subscribers feel, but the air interface capacity is not the
maximum. The rate of subscriber, air interface capacity, and CE resource consumed are
considered for the parameter setting.
Related Commands
Use ADD TYPRABOLPC to set, LST TYPRABOLPC to query, and MOD
TYPRABOLPC to modify EdchTargetRetransNum.
8.3.3 Target Value of E-DCH Residual BLER

This parameter indicates the target transmission quality of E-DCH, that is, the target residual
BLER value.
ID
ResBLER
Value Range
0 to 1000
Physical Scope
0 to 1, step is 0.001.

8-11
RAN
8 HSUPA Parameters
Setting
None.

If the parameter is set too small, the subscribers feel better, but the air interface capacity is not
the maximum. The rate of subscriber, air interface capacity, and CE resource consumed are
considered for the parameter setting.
Related Commands
Use ADD TYPRABOLPC to set, LST TYPRABOLPC to query, and MOD
TYPRABOLPC to modify ResBLER.
8-12

RAN
9 MBMS Parameters
MBMS Parameters
About This Chapter

This describes MBMS parameters. MBMS parameters are MBMS admission parameters,
MBMS preemption parameters, and FLC/FLD algorithm parameters.
9.1 MBMS Admission and Preemption Algorithm Parameters
This describes the MBMS admission and preemption algorithm parameters that can be modified
9.2 FLC/FLD Algorithm Parameters
This describes the FLC/FLD algorithm parameters that can be modified by network planners.

9-1
RAN
9 MBMS Parameters
9.1 MBMS Admission and Preemption Algorithm

Parameters
This describes the MBMS admission and preemption algorithm parameters that can be modified
Table 9-1 List of MBMS admission and preempt algorithm parameters
9-2
S ID
e
ri
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configur
ation
MML Command
Le
vel
MaxFachPowe
r
Maximum transmit
power of the FACH that
carries the MBMS
service
Set
various
values
according
to the
service
rate.
Set: ADD FACH
Cel
l
MTCHMinPer
c0
Minimum coverage
80%
percentage of the MBMS
service with the highest
priority, that is, priority 0
MTCHMaxPer
c15
Minimum coverage
50%
percentage of the MBMS
service with the lowest
priority, that is, priority
15
MtchRsvPwr
MTCH budget power

resource
20%
MtchRsvsf
MTCH budget code

resource
16 SF64
MtchMaxPwr
MTCH maximum power
60%
MtchMaxsf
MTCH maximum code

resource
40 SF64

Query: LST FACH
Set: ADD
CELLMBMSFACH
Query: LST
CELLMBMSFACH
Set: ADD
CELLCAC
Query: LST
CELLCAC
Modify: MOD
CELLCAC
RAN
9 MBMS Parameters
S ID
e
ri
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configur
ation
MML Command
A service priority
threshold, indicating that
the power of the MBMS
services with a priority
lower than this threshold
can be decreased
Set: ADD
CELLLDR
MBMS service preempt

algorithm switch
OFF
MbmsDecPow
erRabThd
MbmsPreempt
AlgoSwitch
Le
vel
Query: LST
CELLLDR
Modify: MOD
CELLLDR
Set: SET
QUEUEPREEMPT
Query: LST
QUEUEPREEMPT
1
0
PtmPreemptS
witch
MBMS PTM preempt

switch
ON
1
1
PtmStrmPasiS
witch
MBMS streaming PTM

preempt switch
ON
1
2
PtmNullStrmP
asiSwitch
MBMS non-streaming
PTM preempt switch
ON
Set: SET
RNCMBMSPARA
Query: LST
RNCMBMSPARA
RN
C

This describes the maximum transmit power of the FACH that carries the MBMS service.
9.1.2 Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with the Highest Priority
This describes the minimum coverage percentage of the MBMS service with the highest priority,
that is, priority 0.
9.1.3 Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with the Lowest Priority
This describes the minimum coverage percentage of the MBMS service with the lowest priority,
9.1.4 MTCH Budget Power Resources
This parameter is configured according to the budget for power and code resources of the MBMS
PTM bearer (that is MTCH) made by carriers.
9.1.5 MTCH Budget Code Resource
9.1.6 MTCH Maximum Power
This parameter indicates the MTCH maximum power of a MBMS cell.
9.1.7 MTCH Maximum Code Resource
This parameter indicates the MTCH maximum code resource of a MBMS cell.

9-3
RAN
9 MBMS Parameters
9.1.8 Service Priority Threshold for Decreasing Power

This describes the service priority threshold for decreasing power. The power of the MBMS
services with a priority lower than this threshold can be decreased.
9.1.9 MBMS Service Preemption Algorithm Switch
This describes the MBMS preemption algorithm switch. When this switch is ON, an MBMS
service can obtain resources through preemption in case the access of the MBMS service fails.
The preemption, however, occurs only between the MBMS services.
9.1.10 MBMS PTM Preempt Switch
This parameter is configured according to the requirements of operators.
9.1.11 MBMS Streaming PTM Preempt Switch
9.1.12 MBMS Non-Streaming PTM Preempt Switch

This describes the maximum transmit power of the FACH that carries the MBMS service.
ID
MaxFachPower
Value Range
350 to 150
Physical Scope
Setting
Set various values for MaxFachPower according to the service rate.

Because the FACH does not have the power control function, you must consider the QoS of the
subscribers on the edge of a cell when setting the maximum transmit power of the FACH.
l
If MaxFachPower is excessively low, the quality for receiving services on the edge of a
cell decreases and the mosaic effect and the service delay occur.
If MaxFachPower is excessively high, the extra power of the FACH is wasted.
RAN6.1 supports only the MBMS broadcast function. Thus, all cells must use the PTM
transmission mode. This means that all cells use the FACH to send data. An UE can obtain
remarkable gain through soft combination or selective combination. According to the emulation
result, the gain obtained through soft combination ranges from 4.6 dB to 6.6 dB and the gain
obtained through selective combination ranges from 2 dB to 3 dB. In terms of the MBMS
terminal, you must choose selective combination for the integrated channel of the CMB and the
MBMS. Thus, by taking the generated gain into account, you can configure a lower power for
the FACH when a majority of terminals in a network support the MBMS service.
9-4

RAN
9 MBMS Parameters
CAUTION
The CMB terminals do not support soft combination or selective combination. Therefore, if a
majority of terminals support the CMB service, you can neglect the relevant gain when
configuring the FACH.
Related Commands
Use ADD FACH to set and LST FACH to query MaxFachPower.
9.1.2 Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with the

Highest Priority
This describes the minimum coverage percentage of the MBMS service with the highest priority,
ID
MTCHMinPerc0
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0% to 100%
Setting

When a cell has a heavy load, the RNC assigns a low power to the MBMS service. This avoids
the further deterioration of cell congestion and increases the success rate of MBMS service setup.
You must ensure that the assigned low power can cover the minimum coverage area of the
MBMS service. The minimum coverage area is set on the basis of the percentage of area covered
by the MBMS service using the maximum transmit power of the FACH.
To implement service differentiation, you must ensure that the minimum coverage area varies
according to service priorities. The value of MTCHMinPerc0 is in positive correlation with the
coverage area of the MBMS service when the cell load is high.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLMBMSFACH to set andLST CELLMBMSFACH to query
MTCHMinPerc0.

9-5
RAN
9 MBMS Parameters
9.1.3 Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with the

Lowest Priority
This describes the minimum coverage percentage of the MBMS service with the lowest priority,
ID
MTCHMinPerc15
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0% to 100%
Setting

When a cell has a heavy load, the RNC assigns a low power to the MBMS service. This avoids
the further deterioration of cell congestion and increases the success rate of MBMS service setup.
You must ensure that the assigned low power can cover the minimum coverage area of the
MBMS service. The minimum coverage area is set on the basis of the percentage of area covered
by the MBMS service using the maximum transmit power of the FACH.
To implement service differentiation, you must ensure that the minimum coverage area varies
according to service priorities. The value of MTCHMinPerc15 is in positive correlation with
the coverage area of the MBMS service when the cell load is high.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLMBMSFACH to set andLST CELLMBMSFACH to query
MTCHMinPerc15.
9.1.4 MTCH Budget Power Resources

ID
MtchRsvPwr
Value Range
0 to 100
9-6

RAN
9 MBMS Parameters
Physical Scope
0% to 100%
Setting
When the power sum of all the MBMS PTM bearers in a cell is less than or equal to
MtchRsvPwr, and the code sum of all the MBMS PTM bearers in a cell is less than or equal to
MtchRsvSF, the established MBMS PTM bearer can only be preempted by the MBMS PTM
bearer with higher priority, and cannot be preempted by the MBMS PTP bearer or non-MBMS
bearer.

This parameter is a kind of protection for the MBMS PTM bearer, In case of low power resource
consumption, it is necessary to prevent the MBMS PTM bearer being preempted, because this
bearer serves multiple users at the same time. This threshold should not be set to a large one,
otherwise, the system resources will be consumed by the MBMS PTM bearer, and few nonMBMS service capability will be left.
Related Commands
MtchRsvPwr.
9.1.5 MTCH Budget Code Resource

ID
MtchRsvsf
Value Range
0 to 63
Physical Scope
64 SF64
Setting
The default value is 16, namely 16 SF64.
When the power sum of all the MBMS PTM bearers in a cell is less than or equal to
MtchRsvPwr, and the code sum of all the MBMS PTM bearers in a cell is less than or equal to
MtchRsvSF, the established MBMS PTM bearer can only be preempted by the MBMS PTM
bearer with higher priority, and cannot be preempted by the MBMS PTP bearer or non-MBMS
bearer.

9-7
RAN
9 MBMS Parameters

This parameter is a kind of protection for the MBMS PTM bearer, In case of low code resource
Related Commands
MtchRsvsf.
9.1.6 MTCH Maximum Power

This parameter indicates the MTCH maximum power of a MBMS cell.
ID
MtchMaxPwr
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0% to 100%
Setting
This parameter is configured according to the budget for power of the MBMS PTM bearer (that
is MTCH) made by carriers. When the power sum of all the MBMS PTM bearers in a cell is
larger than this threshold, the MBMS PTM bearer whose access is refused can only preempt the
MBMS PTM bearer with low priority, and cannot preempt the MBMS PTP bearer or non-MBMS
bearer.

This parameter is a kind of protection for the MBMS PTM bearer, In case of low code resource
Related Commands
MtchMaxPwr.
9-8

RAN
9 MBMS Parameters
9.1.7 MTCH Maximum Code Resource

ID
MtchMaxsf
Value Range
0 to 63
Physical Scope
64 SF64
Setting
The default value is 40, namely 40 SF64.
This parameter is configured according to the budget for code of the MBMS PTM bearer (that
is MTCH) made by carriers. When the code sum of all the MBMS PTM bearers in a cell is larger
than this threshold, the MBMS PTM bearer whose access is refused can only preempt the MBMS
PTM bearer with low priority, and cannot preempt the MBMS PTP bearer or non-MBMS bearer.

This parameter is a kind of limit to the MBMS PTM bearer. When the total code resources of
the bearer are consumed largely, excessive consumption should be avoided. This threshold
should not be set to a large one. Otherwise, the system resource will be consumed by the MBMS
PTM bearer and few non-MBMS service capability will be left.
Related Commands
MtchMaxsf.
9.1.8 Service Priority Threshold for Decreasing Power

This describes the service priority threshold for decreasing power. The power of the MBMS
services with a priority lower than this threshold can be decreased.
ID
MbmsDecPowerRabThd
Value Range
1 to 15
Physical Scope
1 to 15

9-9
RAN
9 MBMS Parameters
Setting

The MBMS service at each rate is set on the basis of two power levels. The power set for an
MBMS service is determined according to cell load during the service access. In addition, the
FACH power of the MBMS service must be decreased as required in the duration of cell
congestion. Some services with high priority, for example the disaster pre-alert, however, do
not need the coverage shrink caused by cell load. In such a case, you can adjust the service
priority threshold to protect the services with high priority against the impact of the service
access failure and the load control algorithm.
Related Commands
MbmsDecPowerRabThd.
9.1.9 MBMS Service Preemption Algorithm Switch

This describes the MBMS preemption algorithm switch. When this switch is ON, an MBMS
service can obtain resources through preemption in case the access of the MBMS service fails.
The preemption, however, occurs only between the MBMS services.
ID
MbmsPreemptAlgoSwitch
Value Range
ON, OFF
Physical Scope
ON, OFF
Setting

The periodic re-setup of the preempted MBMS service is not implemented in RAN6.1. As a
result, an MBMS service cannot be sent in a cell if the resource for the MBMS service is occupied
by another service through preemption. Therefore, the switch is OFF by default.
Related Commands
Use SET QUEUEPREEMPT to set and LST QUEUEPREEMPT to query
MbmsPreemptAlgoSwitch.
9-10

RAN
9 MBMS Parameters
9.1.10 MBMS PTM Preempt Switch

ID
PtmPreemptSwitch
Value Range
ON, OFF
Physical Scope
ON, OFF
Setting
If the parameter is set to ON, the PTM bearer is allowed to preempt other MBMS service bearers
or non-MBMS service bearers. If the parameter is set to OFF, preemption is forbidden.

If the parameter is set to ON, preemption may be triggered in case of failure of access to the
PTM bearer. The MBMS service bearer or non-MBMS service bearer with low priority will be
released, thus resulting in traffic interruption.
Related Commands
Use SET RNCMBMSPARA to set and LST RNCMBMSPARA to query
PtmPreemptSwitch.
9.1.11 MBMS Streaming PTM Preempt Switch

ID
PtmStrmPasiSwitch
Value Range
ON, OFF
Physical Scope
ON, OFF
Setting

9-11
RAN
9 MBMS Parameters
If the parameter is set to ON, the PTM streaming service bearer is preempted by the MBMS
service bearer or non-MBMS service bearer with high priority. If the parameter is set to OFF,
preemption is forbidden.

If the parameter is set to ON, the PTM streaming service bearer may be preempted by the MBMS
service bearer or non-MBMS service bearer with high priority in case of resource congestion,
thus resulting in MBMS service interruption. Because the PTM service bearer serves multiple
users, the influence scope of service interruption is wide.
Related Commands
PtmStrmPasiSwitch.
9.1.12 MBMS Non-Streaming PTM Preempt Switch

ID
PtmNullStrmPasiSwitch
Value Range
ON, OFF
Physical Scope
ON, OFF
Setting
If the parameter is set to ON, the PTM streaming service bearer is preempted by the MBMS
service bearer or non-MBMS service bearer with high priority. If the parameter is set to OFF,
preemption is forbidden.

If the parameter is set to ON, the PTM streaming service bearer may be preempted by the MBMS
service bearer or non-MBMS service bearer with high priority in case of resource congestion,
thus resulting in MBMS service interruption. Because the PTM service bearer serves multiple
users, the influence scope of service interruption is wide.
Related Commands
PtmNullStrmPasiSwitch.
9-12

RAN
9 MBMS Parameters
9.2 FLC/FLD Algorithm Parameters

This describes the FLC/FLD algorithm parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Table 9-2 List of FLC/FLD algorithm parameters
S ID
e
ri
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configur
ation
MML Command
Le
vel
FLC algorithm switch
ON
Set: ADD
CELLMCCH
Cel
l
FlcAlgoSwitch
Query: LST
CELLMCCH
Modify: MOD
CELLMCCH
2
MbmsTransM
ode
MBMS transmission
mode
PTM
NCountingThd
Counting threshold
NPtpToPtmOf
fset
PTP to PTM offset
MbmsPtpUlBit
Rate
MBMS PTP RB uplink

rate
16 kbit/s
Set: SET
RNCMBMSPARA
orADD
SAMBMSPARA
orADD
CELLMBMSPARA
Query: LST
RNCMBMSPARA
orLST
SAMBMSPARA or
LST
CELLMBMSPARA
Modify: MOD
SAMBMSPARA or
MOD
CELLMBMSPARA
RN
C/
SA/
Cel
l
Set: SET
RNCMBMSPARA
RN
C
Query: LST
RNCMBMSPARA

9-13
RAN
9 MBMS Parameters
S ID
e
ri
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configur
ation
MML Command
Le
vel
MBMS neighboring cell

indicator
TRUE
Set: ADD
INTRAFREQNCE
LL
Cel
l
MbmsNCellIn
d
Query: LST
INTRAFREQNCE
LL
Modify: MOD
INTRAFREQNCE
LL
9.2.1 FLC Algorithm Switch

This describes the FLC algorithm switch. When the FLC algorithm switch is enabled, the RNC
performs FLC operations.
9.2.2 MBMS Transmission Mode
This describes the transmission mode of MBMS.
9.2.3 Counting Threshold
When the counting or recounting UE is larger than the parameter, then use the PTM transmission
mode, otherwise use the PTP transmission mode.
9.2.4 PTP To PTM Offset
This describes the offset from PTP to PTM.
9.2.5 MBMS PTP RB Uplink Rate
This describes the MBMS PTP uplink bit rate.
9.2.6 MBMS Neighboring Cell Indicator
This parameter indicates whether the cell is MBMS neighboring cell or not.
9.2.1 FLC Algorithm Switch

This describes the FLC algorithm switch. When the FLC algorithm switch is enabled, the RNC
performs FLC operations.
ID
FlcAlgoSwitch
Value Range
ON, OFF
9-14

RAN
9 MBMS Parameters
Physical Scope
ON, OFF
Setting

The FLC algorithm is a mandatory algorithm. When the network starts sending the MBMS
service, the FLC algorithm ensures that the subscribers on the other frequency points can reselect
the current frequency point for receiving the MBMS service. Therefore, the FLC algorithm is
enabled by default.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLMCCH to set, LST CELLMCCH to query, and MOD CELLMCCH to
modify FlcAlgoSwitch.
9.2.2 MBMS Transmission Mode

This describes the transmission mode of MBMS.
ID
MbmsTransMode
Value Range
PTM~0/ PTP~1/ ENHANCEDPTM~2/ DYNAMIC~3
Physical Scope
PTM/PTP/ENHANCEDPTM/DYNAMIC
Setting
The default value is PTM.
This parameter can be configured for the RNC or service area(SA).
If for the RNC, all the cells under the RNC adopt the transmission mode. If for the SA, all the
cells under the SA adopt the transmission mode.

PTM, PTP and ENHANCEDPTM, as static or semi-static transmission modes, have small effect
on the MBMS service and network performance.
The DYNAMIC mode is the most complicated. To balance the service quality guarantee and
network resource utilization, dynamically convert PTP and PTM modes. The network converts
transmission modes periodically according to the number of users and the state of neighboring
cells, so the reception of MBMS users may be affected. In addition, when passing the boundary

9-15
RAN
9 MBMS Parameters
of a PTP cell or a PTM cell, MBMS users may be aware of service interruption, thus greatly
affecting the MBMS service and network performance.
Related Commands
Use SET RNCMBMSPARA orADD SAMBMSPARA orADD CELLMBMSPARA to set,
LST RNCMBMSPARA orLST SAMBMSPARA or LST CELLMBMSPARA to query, and
MOD SAMBMSPARA or MOD CELLMBMSPARA to modify MbmsTransMode.
9.2.3 Counting Threshold

When the counting or recounting UE is larger than the parameter, then use the PTM transmission
mode, otherwise use the PTP transmission mode.
ID
NCountingThd
Value Range
2 10
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
Comprehensively configure such resources as power, code, CE and transmission of the PTM
bearer and PTP bearer. Suppose that the consumption of the PTM bearer resources is two times
the average consumption of the PTP bearer resources, the parameter is configured as 2. This
parameter can be configured for RNC, SA or CELL.

The greater the parameter, the higher the probability of the network to adopt PTP transmission
mode. Although the power consumption of PTP may be less than that of PTM, the code, CE and
transmission occupied by the PTP bearer increase as the number of subscribers increases. This
parameter should be configured by considering various resources and bottleneck resources of
operators so that it should not be set too large.
Related Commands
MOD SAMBMSPARA or MOD CELLMBMSPARA to modify NCountingThd.
9.2.4 PTP To PTM Offset

This describes the offset from PTP to PTM.
9-16

RAN
9 MBMS Parameters
ID
NPtpToPtmOffset
Value Range
15
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
To avoid ping-pong of PTP and PTM transmission modes, adopt dual-threshold control as mode
conversion decision. That is, in the initial state or PTM mode, the PTM mode is adopted if the
number of MBMS subscribers exceeds NCountingThd, otherwise, the PTP mode is adopted.
But in the PTP mode, the PTM mode is adopted if the number of MBMS users exceeds
NCountingThd+NPtpToPtmOffset, otherwise, the PTP mode is adopted. This parameter can
be configured for RNC, SA or Cell.

Although dual-threshold control is adopted, this parameter only acts as hysteresis. The
configuration of this parameter should not affect the whole decision policy. In addition,
NCountingThd should not be too large. The smaller this parameter, the better.
It is recommended to keep the default value.
Related Commands
MOD SAMBMSPARA or MOD CELLMBMSPARA to modify NPtpToPtmOffset.
9.2.5 MBMS PTP RB Uplink Rate

This describes the MBMS PTP uplink bit rate.
ID
MbmsPtpUlBitRate
Value Range
D8~0, D16~1, D32~2, D64~3, D128~4, D144~5, D256~6
Physical Scope
8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s

9-17
RAN
9 MBMS Parameters
Setting
The default value is D16~1, namely 16 kbit/s.
MBMS service is a unidirectional downlink service. But for the PTP bearer, an uplink channel
must be established for signaling transmission. Because the uplink signaling traffic is not heavy,
the uplink channel width can be configured as a small one.

If the parameter is set too large, uplink resources will be wasted. Therefore, the default value is
recommended.
Related Commands
Use SET RNCMBMSPARA to set and LST RNCMBMSPARA to
queryMbmsPtpUlBitRate.
9.2.6 MBMS Neighboring Cell Indicator

This parameter indicates whether the cell is MBMS neighboring cell or not.
ID
MbmsNCellInd
Value Range
TRUE, FALSE
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The default value is TRUE.
In an actual commercial network, there may be multiple intra-frequency neighboring cells
around a cell. Such a design can further limit the number of neighboring cells affecting the
transmission mode of this cell.
If the MbmsTransMode is set to DYNAMIC, and a cell is not in the elementary congestion
state and the PTP transmission mode is shown in the statistical result of the number of users in
the cell, the final transmission mode is PTM mode if only a PTM mode is shown in the statistical
result of the number of subscribers in an MBMS neighboring cell.

The more the intra-frequency neighboring cells are configured as MBMS neighboring cells, the
easier the transmission mode of this cell is determined as PTM, and the higher the ratio of PTM
transmission mode in the whole network is. In terms of performance of the whole network, if
the number of subscribers reaches a certain scale, the higher the ratio of PTM transmission mode,
the better. Because the higher the ratio, the greater the MBMS consolidatory gain obtained by
9-18

RAN
9 MBMS Parameters
subscribers, the less the conversion between PTP and PTM modes, and the lower the service
influence. But, if there are a few subscribers in the whole network, the high ratio of PTM
transmission mode will waste resources and affect other service capacities.
Related Commands
Use ADD INTRAFREQNCELL to set, LST INTRAFREQNCELL to query, and MOD
INTRAFREQNCELL to modify MbmsNCellInd.

9-19
RAN
10
Algorithm Switches
About This Chapter

This describes the RNC algorithm Switches. In the RNC, algorithm switches are categorized
into connection-oriented algorithm switches and cell-oriented algorithm switches.
10.1 Connection-Oriented Algorithm Switches in the RNC
This describes the connection-oriented algorithm switches in the RNC. In the RNC, the
connection-oriented algorithm switches are effective only within the duration of a cell, that is,
the modification of an algorithm switch is not effective for the UEs that are already in connection
mode before the modification but effective for the UEs that are connected later. The enabling
and disabling of the connection-oriented algorithm switches are effective for the entire RNC,
but cannot be controlled for single cells.
10.2 Cell Algorithm Switches
This describes the cell algorithm switches, which are valid for single cells. Different cells can
have different algorithm configurations. The algorithm switches become effective as soon as
they are configured.
10.3 Other Algorithm Switches
This describes some other algorithm switches, such as the Iub CAC algorithm switch, Iub
bandwidth-restricted BE service rate reduction algorithm switch, and intra-frequency
measurement control information indication.

10-1
RAN
10.1 Connection-Oriented Algorithm Switches in the RNC

This describes the connection-oriented algorithm switches in the RNC. In the RNC, the
connection-oriented algorithm switches are effective only within the duration of a cell, that is,
the modification of an algorithm switch is not effective for the UEs that are already in connection
mode before the modification but effective for the UEs that are connected later. The enabling
and disabling of the connection-oriented algorithm switches are effective for the entire RNC,
but cannot be controlled for single cells.
On the RNC LMT, set each connection-oriented algorithm switch through SET
CORRMALGOSWITCH and query the status of each algorithm switch through LST
CORRMALGOSWITCH.
10.1.1 Channel Class Algorithm Switches
This describes the channel algorithm switches.
10.1.2 Handover Algorithm Switch
This describes the handover algorithm switches.
10.1.3 Power Control Algorithm Switches
This describes the power control switches.
10.1.4 HSPA Algorithm Switch
This describes the HSPA algorithm switches.
10.1.5 DRD Algorithm Switches
This describes the DRD algorithm switches.
10.1.6 SRNS Relocation Algorithm Switch
This describes the SRNS relocation algorithm switches.
10.1.7 Compressed Mode Algorithm Switch
This describes the compressed mode algorithm switches.
10.1.1 Channel Class Algorithm Switches

This describes the channel algorithm switches.
ID
ChSwitch
10-2

RAN
Meaning
CAUTION
The DCCC algorithm is a basic function. If the DCCC algorithm is disabled, channels cannot
implement the following D2D adjustments that are caused by other algorithms:
l
D2D rate adjustment of the BE service triggered on the basis of traffic
1A rate decreasing, that is, the rate decreasing before soft handovers
Rate decreasing due to the IUB bandwidth limit
Rate decreasing due to the TCP limit, that is, the rate decreasing for the link stability
BE service bandwidth adjustment that is triggered by the primary congestion
Table 10-1 shows channel algorithm switches.

Table 10-1 List of channel algorithm switches
Serial No.
Algorithm
Switch
Switch
Name
Default
Configur
ation
Description
AMR_TWO
_CODCH_S
WITCH
Switch of
configurin
g two
DCHs for
AMR
OFF
When the switch is enabled, two

CoDCHs are allocated for the
AMR voice call with the bit rate of
7.95 kbit/s or less. When the switch
is disabled, three CoDCHs are
allocated for the AMR voice call.
AMR_SID_
MUST_CF
G_SWITCH
Switch of
configurin
g the SID
frame for
AMR
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the

SID frame for AMR-NB voice call
will be configured anyway.
Otherwise, the SID frame will be
configured acorrding to the CN
assignment.
AMRC_SW
ITCH
AMRC
algorithm
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled and the

AMRC (AMR Control) license is
activated, the AMR control
function is applied to the AMR
service.
AQM_SWI
TCH
AQM
algorithm
switch
OFF

AQM algorithm is applied to the
RNC.
BE_RATE_
DOWN_BF
_HO_SWIT
CH
Algorithm
switch for
rate
decreasing
before
handovers
OFF

bandwidth of the BE services is
decreased before handover
happens. It is recommended to
enable DCCC_SWITCH when
using this function.

10-3
RAN
Serial No.
Algorithm
Switch
Switch
Name
Default
Configur
ation
Description
DCCC_SWI
TCH
DCCC
algorithm
switch
ON

dynamic channel reconfiguration
control algorithm is applied to the
RNC.
DL_INNER
_LOOP_PO
WER_CTR
L_SWITCH
Downlink
inner loop
power
control
activation
switch
ON

inner loop downlink power control
status is set to Active. When the
switch is disabled, the inner loop
downlink power control status is
set to Inactive.
DOWNLIN
K_BLIND_
DETECTIO
N_SWITCH
Downlink
blind
detection
switch
ON

downlink blind transport format
detection function is used for
single SRB and AMR + SRB
bearers.
NOTE
The UE is only required to support the
blind transport format that is the
prescribed in section 4.3.1 of the 3GPP
25.212 protocol.
10-4
FRC_FP_M
ODE_SWIT
CH
FP mode
switch
ON
When the switch is enabled, the FP

mode on the Iub interface is set to
normal mode. When the switch is
disabled, the FP mode on the Iub
interface is set to silent mode.
10
FRC_PDCP
_RFC2507_
HC_SWITC
H
PDCP IP
header
compressi
on switch
OFF

PDCP IP header compression
license is activated, the PDCP IP
header compression algorithm will
be applied to the RNC.
11
FRC_PDCP
_RFC3095_
HC_SWITC
H
PDCP RO
header
compressi
on switch
OFF

PDCP RO header compression
license is activated, the PDCP RO
header compression algorithm will
be applied to the RNC.

RAN
Serial No.
Algorithm
Switch
Switch
Name
Default
Configur
ation
Description
12
HANDOVE
R_TO_UTR
AN_DEFA
ULT_CONF
IG_SWITC
H
Default
configurat
ion switch
for interRAT
handover
to
UTRAN
ON

default configurations of signaling
and RABs which are defined in
3GPP 25.331 are used when the UE
performs handovers from the GSM
system to the WCDMA system.
When the switch is disabled, those
default configurations are not
applied, but the RB, TrCH and
PhyCH included in the
HANDOVER TO UTRAN
COMMAND message are used
instead.
13
IGNORE_R
LC_CAP_S
WITCH
Algorithm
switch of
ignoring
the RLC
capability
of UE
ON

RAB Assignment request and the
subsequent RB Setup should be
continued if the RLC AM
capability of UE cannot meet the
minimum RLC buffer requirement
defined by the RLC TX/RX
WINDOW LIMITs of the RAB to
be setup. When the switch is
disabled, the RAB setup request
should be rejected.
14
IMS_PROC
_AS_NOR
MAL_PS_S
WITCH
IMS
processed
as a
normal PS
RAB
switch
OFF
When the switch is enablede, the

IMS signalling RAB CN assigned
will be processed as a normal PS
RAB. Otherwise no special action
will be taken.
15
IMS_SUPP
ORT_ACTI
VATION
IMS
support
activation
switch
ON

IMS license is activated, the RNC
supports IMS.
16
IU_QOS_N
EG_SWITC
H
Iu QoS
negotiatio
n switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the Iu

QoS negotiation function is
applied to the PS domain if
alternative RAB parameters are
present in the RANAP RAB
ASSIGNMENT REQUEST or
RELOCATION REQUEST
message.

10-5
RAN
10-6
Serial No.
Algorithm
Switch
Switch
Name
Default
Configur
ation
Description
17
IU_QOS_R
ENEG_SWI
TCH
Iu QoS renegotiatio
n switch
OFF

IU QOS RENEQ license is
activated, the RNC supports the
maximum rate re-negotiation if the
QoS of real-time traffic can not be
guaranteed according to cell
conditions.

RAN
Serial No.
Algorithm
Switch
Switch
Name
Default
Configur
ation
Description
18
IUB_OVER
BOOKING_
SWITCH
Iub
overbooki
ng switch
OFF
When the wireless environment is

poor, some TFs are banned for high
speed RAB to limit the speed and
then reduce the transmission
power. When the switch is enabled,
the IUB overbooking function is
applied to the SRNC.
The data services are unstable to a
certain degree, for example, some
traffic is caused by downloading a
webpage while no traffic is caused
when users are reading the
webpage, so the actual service rate
is much different from the channel
rate and there is a big peak-toaverage ratio.
If data services and voice services
use the same path for transmission,
a full-rate bandwidth must be
reserved for the data services so
that the voice services are not
affected when the data services are
implemented in peak rate. The Iub
interface has insufficient
transmission resources and each
data service needs much
bandwidth, so a rather limited
amount of data can be connected at
the same time, and thus it is
difficult to carry out a mass of data
services.
More data services can be
implemented if data services use an
independent path for transmission,
differentiated transmission
methods are used, and smaller
activated factors are configured. In
this way, only data services are
affected even when congestion is
caused by simulatneous data
transmission of multiple data
connections.
19
IUUP_V2_S
PT_SWITC
H
IUUp V2
SPT
switch
OFF


Support IUUP Version 2 license
is enabled, the RNC supports the
TFO/TRFO function.
10-7
RAN
10-8
Serial No.
Algorithm
Switch
Switch
Name
Default
Configur
ation
Description
20
LOSSLESS
_RELOCIN
_SWITCH
Lossless
relocation
switch
OFF

UE supports lossless relocation,
PDCP is configured to supporting
the lossless relocation if the RNC
meets conditions such as the RLC
mode, desertion mode, and insequence submission.
21
LOSSLESS
_DLRLC_P
DUSIZECH
G_SWITCH
Lossless
downlink
RLC PDU
size
change
algorithm
switch
OFF

size of downlink RLC PDU can
change lossless.
21
MULTI_RA
B_SWITCH
Switch of
single
domain
supporting
multiple
services
ON
When the switch is enabled, multiRABs combination of 2CS, 2CS

+1PS, 1CS+2PS and 2PS are
supported in the RNC.
22
PDCP_IPV6
_HEAD_C
OMPRESS_
SWITCH
IPv6
packet
header
compressi
on switch
OFF

PDCP header compression license
is activated, the PDCP header
compression algorithm for IPv6
will be applied to the RNC.
23
PS_BE_ST
ATE_TRA
NS_SWITC
H
UE state
transition
switch for
PS BE
service
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the UE

RRC state transitions
(CELL_FACH/CELL_PCH/
URA_PCH) for services are
applied to the RNC.
24
PS_NON_B
E_STATE_
TRANS_S
WITCH
UE State
Transition
switch for
PS NonBE service
OFF

RRC state transitions to
CELL_FACH for real-time
services are applied to the RNC.
25
RAB_DOW
NSIZING_S
WITCH
RAB
downsizin
g switch
ON

RAB downsizing function is
activated to determine the initial bit
rate according to cell resources.

RAN
Serial No.
Algorithm
Switch
Switch
Name
Default
Configur
ation
Description
26
RSC_FEED
BK_AFTER
_SETUPRA
B_FAIL_S
WITCH
RSC
feedback
after setup
RAB
failure
switch
OFF

cell left SF is brought back if the
RAB setup fails because of the lack
of CELL SF and then the RAB
setup tries again with a lower speed
to fit the feedback SF.
27
SYSHOIN_
CMP_IUUP
_FIXTO1_S
WITCH
SysHoIn
complete
configure
IUUP
version
back
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, IUUP

Version can back to R99 when
SysHoIn use complete configure.
28
THROU_D
CCC_SWIT
CH
DCCC
switch
based on
throughpu
t
OFF
When the switch is enabled, DCCC

is applied to DCH based on
throughput statistic.
10.1.2 Handover Algorithm Switch

This describes the handover algorithm switches.
ID
HoSwitch
Meaning
Table 10-2 List of handover algorithm switches
Serial No.
Algorithm
Switch
Switch
Name
Default
Configur
ation
Description
1J_MEAS_
SWTICH
1J
measurem
ent control
switch
OFF

UE version is R6, 1J event will be
carried with intra-frequency
measurement control.

10-9
RAN
10-10
Serial No.
Algorithm
Switch
Switch
Name
Default
Configur
ation
Description
6F6G_SWI
TCH
6F6G
measurem
ent control
switch
OFF

RNC starts the 6F6G measurement
if the UE is in a macro-diversity,
that is, the UE triggers the radio link
synchronization parameters
measurement if the UE has more
than two links in the active set. If the
timing difference between radio
links exceeds a certain threshold,
the UE reports the 6F event and
triggers a timer. If the timing
difference between the radio links is
below the threshold, the UE reports
the 6G event, or the UE will release
one or more radio links when the
timer expires.
ACT_SET_
QUAL_SW
ITCH
Active set
quality
measurem
ent switch
ON

active set quality measurement is
allowed. After the RB setup is
complete (or after the RRC setup is
complete if
SIGNAL_HO_SWITCH is ON),
the RNC initiates signal quality
measurement to all the cells in the
active set. If the integrated signal
quality of all the cells in the active
set is below a certain threshold, the
UE reports the 2D event. Then
according to the status of the interfrequency and inter-RAT handover
switch and UE capability, the RNC
will initiate the compressed mode
and send inter-frequency
measurement control or inter-RAT
measurement control to trigger
inter-frequency or inter-RAT
handovers based on the coverage.
DETSET_
ADD_TO_
ACTSET_
SWITCH
Detected
set add to
active set
switch
OFF (ON
recommen
ded)

cells in detected set can be added to
the active set when the RNC
receives the valid event reports from
the cells. The cells in the detected
set allowed to be added to the active
set must be the neighboring intrafrequency cells of a cell in the active
set.

RAN
Serial No.
Algorithm
Switch
Switch
Name
Default
Configur
ation
Description
DETSET_
RPRT_SW
ITCH
Detected
set report
switch
OFF (ON
recommen
ded)

detected cell is allowed to send the
intra-frequency measurement
report to the RNC.
HCS_SPD_
EST_SWIT
CH
HCS speed
estimation
switch
OFF

RNC evaluates the UE's moving
speed when it is in an HCS cell, and
initiates inter-layer handover by
fast-mobility decision or by fastmobility decision according to the
UE's speed.
INTRA_FR
EQUENCY
_HARD_H
ANDOVE
R_SWITC
H
Intrafrequency
hard
handover
switch
ON

intra-frequency hard handover is
allowed under the following
conditions:
l
The BE service is set up on the

DCH and the bit rate of BE
service or combined services
exceeds the threshold for soft
handover downlink bit rate.
The UE reports the 1D event

when the soft handover switch is
off.
The UE performs inter-RNC

handovers when there is no Iur
interface between the RNCs.
INTER_FR
EQ_HHO_
SWITCH
Interfrequency
hard
handover
switch
OFF

inter-frequency measurement is
allowed or the inter-frequency hard
handover based on cell load is
allowed.
INTER_R
AT_CS_O
UT_SWIT
CH
Inter-RAT
handover
out switch
for CS
service
ON

RNC is allowed to initiate interRAT measurement to trigger interRAT handovers of the CS domain
from the UTRAN.
10
INTER_R
AT_PS_O
UT_SWIT
CH
Inter-RAT
handover
out switch
for PS
service
ON

RNC is allowed to initiate interRAT measurement to trigger interRAT handovers of the PS domain
from the UTRAN.

10-11
RAN
Serial No.
Algorithm
Switch
Switch
Name
Default
Configur
ation
Description
11
IUR_SHO_
DIVCTRL
_FIELD_S
UPP_SWIT
CH
Inter-Iur
softhandover
macrodiversity
support
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the Iur

diversity support switch is
configured according to the
diversity switch of this RNC. When
the switch is disabled, the Iur
diversity support switch is set to
MUST (for BE service) or MAY
(for other services) according to the
service type.
12
NCELL_C
OMBINE_
SWITCH
Neighbori
ng cell
combining
switch
OFF

measurement object is chosen from
neighboring cells of all the cells in
the active set and limited by 32.
When the switch is disabled, the
measurement object is chosen from
neighboring cells and the best cell
and limited by 32.
13
PS_3G2G_
CELLCHG
_NACC_S
WITCH
PS 3G>2G cell
change
NACC
switch
OFF

Network Assisted Cell Change
(NACC) function is supported in the
3G -> 2G inter-RAT handover
support process for the PS domain.
When
PS_3G2G_RELOCATION_SWIT
CH is ON, the PS 3G->2G cell
change NACC switch is not invalid.
NACC: Network Assisted Cell
Change. The NACC is used to
access the 2G cell according to the
SI/PSI of the target cell to reduce the
delay of inter-cell handovers.
14
10-12
PS_3G2G_
RELOCAT
ION_SWIT
CH
PS 3G>2G
reallocatio
n switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled,

inter-RAT handovers of the PS
domain from UTRAN use the
relocation method.
When the switch is disabled,

inter-RAT handovers of the PS
domain from UTRAN use the
cell change order method.

RAN
Serial No.
Algorithm
Switch
Switch
Name
Default
Configur
ation
Description
15
SERVICE_
HO_BASE
D_ON_RN
C_SWITC
H
Service
handover
based on
the RNC
settings
OFF

service attribute of inter-RAT
handovers is configured
according to the RNC
parameters.

service attribute of inter-RAT
handovers is configured based on
the CN if the CN has the service
handover attribute, and is
configured based on the RNC if
the CN has not the service
handover attribute.
16
SIGNAL_
HO_SWIT
CH
Signaling
handover
switch
OFF

RNC initiates the quality
measurement of active set after the
RRC setup is complete (before RB
setup). In this way, the RNC can
trigger inter-frequency or interRAT handover when the RRC setup
is complete. Thus the UE can be
handed over to an inter-frequency or
inter-RAT neighboring cell more
quickly when the UE is located at
the edge of the cell or the signal
quality of the radio link is bad.
SIGNAL_HO_SWITCH is not
used to trigger inter-frequency or
inter-RAT handovers only when the
UE has signal connection. It is used
to start the active set quality
measurement process once the RRC
connection is set up and the RB is
not setup. If the active set quality
measurement result has been sent,
SIGNAL_HO_SWITCH affects
nothing.
17
SIGNAL_I
UR_INTR
A_HO_SW
ITCH
Signaling
intrafrequency
handover
control
over Iur
OFF

intra-frequency handover over IUR
is allowed if the UE has only signal
connection.

10-13
RAN
Serial No.
Algorithm
Switch
Switch
Name
Default
Configur
ation
Description
18
SNA_RES
TRICTION
_SWITCH
SNA
restriction
switch
OFF

RNC controls the UEs that are
active in the CN configuration.
Those UEs are allowed to access
and move only in the cells with
permission.
The SNA restriction needs to be
supported by the CN.
10-14
19
SOFT_HA
NDOVER_
SWITCH
Soft
handover
switch
ON
When the switch is enabled, the soft

or softer handover is allowed in the
cells of the RNC. When receiving an
event 1A, 1B, 1C, or 1D report, the
RNC starts to add, remove or
replace soft handover cells.
20
HO_BEYO
ND_UE_C
AP_ADD_
TO_MC_S
WITCH
Neighbor
cell
beyond UE
capability
measurem
ent switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, then the

neighboring cells whose frequency
band is not included in the UE's
measurement capability will also be
sent in the inter-frequency
measurement list.
21
LDR_HO_
ALLOW_S
HO_SWIT
CH
Soft
handover
state
trigger
LDR interfrequency
handover
switch
OFF

LDR inter-frequency handover is
allowed in the soft handover state.
22
MBMS_FL
C_SWITC
H
MBMS
frequency
layer
convergen
ce swtich
OFF

MBMS frequency layer
convergence adopts redirection
strategy.
23
OVERLAY
_SWITCH
Overlay
network
switch
OFF

special functions for overlay
network are valid. Otherwise, they
are forbidden.
24
SERV_CE
LL_CHG_
WITH_AC
TSET_UP
DATE_SW
ITCH
Service
cell change
and active
set update
in one step
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, active

set update procedure and service
cell change procedure can be
finished in one step. The switch is
only fit for the UE with version R6.

RAN
Serial No.
Algorithm
Switch
Switch
Name
Default
Configur
ation
Description
25
SERV_CE
LL_CHG_
WITH_CH
L_SWITC
H
Service
cell change
and
channel
reconfigur
ation in
one step
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, channel

reconfiguration procedure and
service cell change procedure can
be finished in one step.
10.1.3 Power Control Algorithm Switches

This describes the power control switches.
ID
PcSwitch
Switch Meaning
Table 10-3 List of power control switches
Serial No.
Algorith
m Switch
Switch
Name
Default
Configur
ation
Description
AMR_MO
DE_INDU
CE_BLER
_TARGET
_ALTER_
SWITCH
Altering
switch of
target
BLER
value
induced by
AMR
mode
OFF

BLER target value comes from the
BLER target value of the AMR
modes specified in the AMRC
parameter table. When the switch is
disabled, the BLER target value
comes from the BLER target value
specified in TYPRAB.
DOWNLI
NK_POW
ER_BALA
NCE_SWI
TCH
Downlink
power
balance
switch
ON
When the switch is enabled, the DPB

(Downlink Power Balance)
algorithm is applied to the RNC.
Downlink power drift among
different RLs may be caused by TPC
bit error in the soft handover process.
The downlink power balance can
solve the power unbalance between
RLs to reach the otpimal gain of soft
handovers.

10-15
RAN
10-16
Serial No.
Algorith
m Switch
Switch
Name
Default
Configur
ation
Description
FP_MUTI
_RLS_IN
D_SWITC
H
Multi RLS
indicator
switch
ON
When the switch is enabled, the RNC

will inform NodeB about the change
of RLS's number with FP inner band
signaling.
INNER_L
OOP_DL_
LMTED_P
WR_INC_
SWITCH
Limited
power
increase in
the inner
loop power
control
switch
OFF

limited power increase algorithm is
applied in the inner loop power
control.
OLPC_S
WITCH
Outer loop
power
control
switch
ON
When the switch is enabled, the RNC

updates the uplink SIR TARGET of
RLS on the NodeB side by IUB DCH
FP signals.
OLPC_UL
_SIR_ERR
_REL_SW
ITCH
UE
released
linked to
UL SIR
error
switch
OFF

is released if the SIRERR is high and
the cell is overloaded.
RL_RECF
G_SIR_T
ARGET_C
ARRY_S
WITCH
SIRTarget
switch for
RL
reconfigur
ation
ON

current converged outer loop SIR
Target should be taken into
consideration in the new initial SIR
Target during the RL
reconfiguration, and the UL SIR
Target is not included in the RL
reconfiguration message to the
NodeB. The switch is valid only
when OLPC_SWITCH is on.
SIG_DCH
_OLPC_S
WITCH
Switch of
the
signaling
transmissi
on
participati
ng in the
outer loop
power
control for
multiple
DCHs
OFF
This switch is used to determine

whether SIG DCH joins the uplink
OLPC (outside loop power control)
procedure if there are multiple
DCHs. When the switch is enabled,
SIG DCH joins OLPC procedure.
But when there is SIG DCH, SIG
DCH joins OLPC procedure no
matter whether this switch is enabled
or not.

RAN
10.1.4 HSPA Algorithm Switch

This describes the HSPA algorithm switches.
ID
HspaSwitch
Switch Meaning
Table 10-4 List of HSPA algorithm switches
Serial No.
Algorith
m Switch
Switch
Name
Default
Configur
ation
Description
HSDPA_S
TATE_TR
ANS_SWI
TCH
HSDPA
service
state
transition
switch
OFF

RRC state transitions to
CELL_FACH for the HSDPA
services are applied to the RNC. $
When the RAB on the HS-DSCH is
the BE service, the
PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH
needs to be enabled simultaneously.
$ When the RAB on the HS-DSCH
is the PS real-time service, the
PS_NON_BE_STATE_TRANS_S
WITCH needs to be enabled
simultaneously.
PS_STRE
AMING_
ON_HSDP
A_SWITC
H
Streaming
service on
HSDPA
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the PS

streaming service can be mapped to
the HS-DSCH if the maximum
downlink bit rate is higher than or
equal to the threshold for the PS
streaming service to be set up on the
HSDPA.
HSDPA_F
LOW_CO
NTROL_S
WITCH
HSDPA
flow
control
switch
OFF

HSDPA (AM mode) flow control
function is applied to the SRNC.
HSUPA_S
TATE_TR
ANS_SWI
TCH
HSUPA
state
transition
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, UE RRC

state transitions to CELL_FACH for
the DCCC algorithm of HSUPA
services are allowed in the RNC.
HSUPA_P
O_UPDA
TE_SWIT
CH
HSUPA
PO update
switch
OFF
When the HSUPA PO update switch

and OLPC algorithm switch is
enabled, the RNC adjusts the E-DCH
power offset periodically.

10-17
RAN
Serial No.
Algorith
m Switch
Switch
Name
Default
Configur
ation
Description
PS_STRE
AMING_
ON_E_DC
H_SWITC
H
PS
streaming
on E-DCH
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the PS

streaming traffic can be mapped to
the E-DCH if the maximum uplink
bit rate is higher than or equal to the
threshold for the PS streaming
service to be set up on HSUPA.
H2D_FOR
_LOWR5_
NRNCCE
LL_ADD_
SWITCH
H2D
before an
NRNC cell
whose
version is
earlier than
R5 is
added
OFF
When the switch is enabled, channel

switch of HS-DSCH to DCH is
needed before an NRNC whose
version is earlier than R5 is added to
the active set.
HSUPA_T
TI_2MS_S
WITCH
2 ms TTI
switch for
HSUPA
service
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the 2ms

TTI could be applied to HSUPA
traffic.
HSUPA_D
CCC_SWI
TCH
DCCC
switch for
HSUPA
service
OFF

dynamic channel reconfiguration
control algorithm is applied to the
HSUPA service.
10.1.5 DRD Algorithm Switches

This describes the DRD algorithm switches.
ID
DrdSwitch
Meaning
Table 10-5 DRD algorithm switches
10-18
Serial No.
Algorithm
Switch
Switch
Name
Default
Configu
ration
Description
COMB_SER
V_DRD_SWI
TCH
Integrate
d service
DRD
switch
OFF
When this switch is enabled,

DRD can be performed only if
the integrated service needs
retry.

RAN
Serial No.
Algorithm
Switch
Switch
Name
Default
Configu
ration
Description
DRD_SWITC
H
DRD
switch
OFF
This is the general DRD

algorithm switch. Other DRD
sub-switches can be enabled
only when this switch is enabled.
HSDPA_DRD
_SWITCH
HSDPA
DRD
switch
OFF

the HSDPA service needs retry.
RAB_DCCC_
DRD_SWITC
H
DCCC
DRD
switch
OFF

DRD can be done only if the
RAB DCCC process needs retry.
RAB_MODIF
Y_DRD_SWI
TCH
RAB
modify
DRD
switch
OFF

the RAB modify process needs
retry.
HSUPA_DRD
_SWITCH
HSUPA
DRD
switch
OFF

HSUPA service needs retry.
RAB_SETUP
_DRD_SWIT
CH
RAB
setup
DRD
switch
ON

RAB setup process needs retry.
INTRA_HO_
D2H_DRD_S
WITCH
Intrafrequenc
y
handover
D2H
DRD
switch
ON
When the UE needs D2H retry

for handover-triggering after the
intra-frequency handover
process is completed, the blindHo DRD cell can be selected for
D2H retry only if the switch is
on.
INTER_HO_
D2H_DRD_S
WITCH
Interfrequenc
y
handover
D2H
DRD
switch
ON
When the UE needs D2H retry

for handover-triggering after the
inter-frequency handover
process is completed, the blindHo DRD cell can be selected for
D2H retry only if the switch is
on.
10.1.6 SRNS Relocation Algorithm Switch

This describes the SRNS relocation algorithm switches.

10-19
RAN
ID
SrnsrSwitch
Meaning
Table 10-6 List of SRNS relocation algorithm switches
Serial No.
Algorithm
Switch
Switch
Name
Default
Configur
ation
Description
SRNSR_D
SCR_IUR_
RESRCE_
SWITCH
SRNS
relocation
or DSCR
switch for
Iur
resource
optimizati
on
OFF

RNC initiates SRNS relocation or
DSCR of certain UEs under the
following conditions to optimize
resources over the Iur interface:
l
The UE only has connections

with cells in the DRNC.
The Iur transmission resources

are congested.
The service of UE is the same as

the service that is carried by the
congestion link.
The RNC selects the relocation or

the DSCR process according to the
setting of DSCRInd in ADD
NRNC.
2
SRNSR_D
SCR_LOC
_SEPRAT_
SWITCH
SRNS
relocation
or DSCR
switch for
separated
location
OFF

RNC triggers RNS relocation or
DSCR when the SRNC and CRNC
are separated and all the intrafrequency neighboring cells and the
best cell are not under the SRNC.
NRNC.
10-20

RAN
Serial No.
Algorithm
Switch
Switch
Name
Default
Configur
ation
Description
SRNSR_D
SCR_PRO
PG_DELA
Y_SWITC
H
SRNS
relocation
or DSCR
switch for
delay
optimizati
on
OFF

RNC initiates SRNS relocation
under the following conditions to
reduce link delay at the network side
to enhance service quality:
l
The SRNC and CRNC are

separated.
The link delay does not meet the

Qos requirement for the current
service.

NRNC.
4
SRNSR_D
SCR_SEPR
AT_DUR_
SWITCH
SRNS
relocation
or DSCR
switch for
separated
duration
OFF

RNC triggers RNS relocation or
DSCR when the separated time
between the SRNC and the CRNC
exceeds a certain threshold.
NRNC.
10.1.7 Compressed Mode Algorithm Switch

This describes the compressed mode algorithm switches.
ID
CmcfSwitch

10-21
RAN
Meaning
Table 10-7 List of compressed mode algorithm switches
Serial No.
Algorithm
Switch
Switch
Name
Default
Configur
ation
Description
CMCF_DL
_HLS_SWI
TCH
Compresse
d mode DL
higherlayer
scheduling
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the DL

higher-layer scheduling for
compressed mode is allowed.
CMCF_UL
_HLS_SWI
TCH
Compresse
d mode UL
higherlayer
scheduling
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the UL

higher-layer scheduling for
compressed mode is allowed.
CMCF_UL
_PRECFG_
TOLERAN
CE_SWIT
CH
Compresse
d mode UL
preconfigu
red state
tolerance
switch
OFF

disaccord between compressed
mode method and current traffic is
allowed.
CMCF_WI
THOUT_U
E_CAP_R
EPORT_S
WITCH
Compresse
d mode
without
UE
capability
report
switch
OFF

RNC needs to start the compressed
mode and deliver the measurement,
if the UE does not report the
compressed mode capability of the
corresponding frequency band after
the inter-frequency or inter-RAT
measurement is started.
10.2 Cell Algorithm Switches

This describes the cell algorithm switches, which are valid for single cells. Different cells can
have different algorithm configurations. The algorithm switches become effective as soon as
they are configured.
On the RNC LMT, cell-oriented algorithm switches are added uniformly through ADD
CELLALGOSWITCH, the state of each algorithm switch is queried through LST
CELLALGOSWITCH, and the algorithm switches are modified through MOD
CELLALGOSWITCH.
10.2.1 Cell Class Algorithm Switches
This describes the cell algorithm switches.
10.2.2 Uplink Admission Control Algorithm Switch
10-22

RAN
This describes the switch that is used to control the UL CAC algorithm.
10.2.3 Downlink Admission Control Algorithm Switch
This describes the switch that is used to control the DL CAC algorithm.
10.2.1 Cell Class Algorithm Switches

This describes the cell algorithm switches.
Table 10-8 List of cell algorithm switches
Algorithm
Switch
Switch
Name
Defau
lt
Confi
gurati
on
Description
Cell CAC algorithm switch: NBMCACALGOSWITCH

CRD_ADCTRL
NodeB
credit
admission
control
algorithm
ON
The switch is used to determine whether the

preliminary admission needs to be performed
for the credit of the intelligent-admission
NodeB and whether the credit admission control
algorithm is started for the cell. The NodeB
credit admission control algorithm is valid only
when NODEB_CONG_CAC_SWITCH in
the SET CACALGOSWITCH command is
enabled and CRD_ADCTRL is enabled.
IUBBAND_AD
CTRL
Iub
bandwidth
admission
control
OFF
Only when IUB_CONG_CAC_SWITCH in

the command SET CACALGOSWITCH is
enabled and this switch is also enabled, the Iub
bandwidth admission control algorithm is valid.
HSDPA_UU_A
DCTRL
HSDPA UU
Load
admission
control
OFF

HSDPA UU Load admission control algorithm
is started.
HSDPA_GBP_
MEAS
HSDPA
GBP
measureme
nt
OFF

HSDPA HS-DSCH required power
HSDPA_PBR_
MEAS
HSDPA
PBR
measureme
nt
OFF

HSDPA HS-DSCH provided bit rate
HSUPA_UU_A
DCTRL
HSUPA UU
Load
admission
control
OFF

HSUPA UU Load admission control algorithm
is started.

10-23
RAN
Algorithm
Switch
Switch
Name
Defau
lt
Confi
gurati
on
Description
MBMS_UU_AD
CTRL
MBMS UU
Load
admission
control
OFF

MBMS UU Load admission control algorithm
is started.
HSUPA_PBR_
MEAS
HSUPA
PBR
measureme
nt
OFF

HSUPA guaranteed bit rate measurement is
started.
DOFFC
Default
DPCH
offset
configuratio
n algorithm
ON
When the switch is enabled, the DOFF is

configured with intervals according to the load.
When the switch is disabled, the DOFF is
configured randomly.
Cell LDC algorithm switch: NBMLDCALGOSWITCH
10-24
INTRA_FREQU
ENCY_LDB
Intrafrequency
load
balance
algorithm
OFF
It is also named cell breathing algorithm. Based

on the cell load, this algorithm changes the pilot
power of the cell to control the load between
intra-frequency cells.
PUC
Potential
user control
algorithm
OFF
Based on the cell load, this algorithm changes

the selection/reselection parameters of a cell to
lead the UE to a lighter loaded cell.
UL_UU_OLC
Uplink
overload
control
algorithm
OFF
When the cell is overloaded in UL, this

algorithm reduces the cell load in UL by quick
TF restriction or UE release.
DL_UU_OLC
Downlink
overload
control
algorithm
OFF
When the cell is overloaded in DL, this

algorithm reduces the cell load in DL by quick
TF restriction or UE release.
UL_UU_LDR
Uplink load
rearrangem
ent
algorithm
OFF
When the cell is heavily loaded in UL, this

algorithm reduces the cell load in UL by using
inter-frequency load handover, BE service rate
reduction, uncontrollable real-time service QoS
renegotiation, CS inter-RAT handover, and PS
inter-RAT handover.

RAN
Algorithm
Switch
Switch
Name
Defau
lt
Confi
gurati
on
Description
DL_UU_LDR
Downlink
load
rearrangem
ent
algorithm
OFF
When the cell is heavily loaded in DL, this

algorithm reduces the cell load in DL by using
inter-frequency load handover, BE service rate
reduction, uncontrollable real-time service QoS
renegotiation, CS inter-RAT handover, and PS
inter-RAT handover.
OLC_EVENTM
EAS
OLC event
measureme
nt
OFF
The switch determines whether the load control

is triggered based on the event measurement
alone or based on the period measurement
report.
CELL_CODE_L
DR
Code
reshuffling
algorithm
OFF
When the cell is heavily loaded in DL, this

algorithm reduces the cell load in DL by using
BE service rate reduction and code tree
reshuffling.
CELL_CREDIT
_LDR
Credit
reshuffling
algorithm
OFF
When the cell credit is heavily loaded, this

algorithm reduces the credit load of the cell by
using BE service rate reduction, uncontrollable
real-time service QoS renegotiation, CS interRAT handover, and PS inter-RAT handover.
ALGO
RITH
M_DE
PEND
_ON_
LCG
Value range:
MAC-HS reset algorithm switch

NBMMACHSR
ESETALGOSEL
SWITCH
MAC-HS
reset
algorithm
switch
ALGORITHM_REQUIRED: Always reset

the MAC-HS no matter the target cell and
source cell are in the same NodeB or not.
ALGORITHM_DEPEND_ON_LCG: Reset
the MAC-HS only when the target cell and
source cell are in different local cell groups.
Recommended value:
ALGORITHM_DEPEND_ON_LCG
10.2.2 Uplink Admission Control Algorithm Switch

This describes the switch that is used to control the UL CAC algorithm.
ID
NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch

10-25
RAN
Value Range
ALGORITHM_OFF, ALGORITHM_FIRST, ALGORITHM_SECOND,
ALGORITHM_THIRD
Physical Scope
ALGORITHM_OFF: switches off the uplink admission control algorithm
ALGORITHM_FIRST: uses the load prediction algorithm for the uplink admission
ALGORITHM_SECOND: uses the total service normalized factor algorithm for the uplink
admission
ALGORITHM_THIRD: The loose call admission control algorithm is used in the uplink CAC.
Setting
The default setting is ALGORITHM_SECOND.
When the change range of the uplink background noise is wide or the RTWP reported by the
NodeB is invalid, it is necessary to use the total service normalized factor algorithm.
10.2.3 Downlink Admission Control Algorithm Switch

This describes the switch that is used to control the DL CAC algorithm.
ID
NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch
Value Range
ALGORITHM_OFF, ALGORITHM_FIRST, ALGORITHM_SECOND,
ALGORITHM_THIRD
Physical Scope
ALGORITHM_OFF: switches off the downlink admission control algorithm
ALGORITHM_FIRST: uses the load prediction algorithm for the downlink admission
ALGORITHM_SECOND: uses the total service normalized factor algorithm for the downlink
admission
ALGORITHM_THIRD: The loose call admission control algorithm is used in the downlink
CAC.
Setting
The default setting is ALGORITHM_FIRST.
If TCP measurement is invalid, the total service normalized factor algorithm is adopted.
10-26

RAN
10.3 Other Algorithm Switches

This describes some other algorithm switches, such as the Iub CAC algorithm switch, Iub
bandwidth-restricted BE service rate reduction algorithm switch, and intra-frequency
measurement control information indication.
10.3.1 NodeB credit admission Algorithm Switch
This describes the switch that is used to control the NodeB credit admission control algorithm.
10.3.2 Iub Bandwidth Congestion Control Algorithm Switch
This describes the Iub bandwidth congestion control algorithm switch.
10.3.3 Intra-Frequency Measurement Control Information Indication
This describes the indication that defines whether the intra-frequency measurement control
information should be delivered through the system messages.
10.3.4 Inter-Frequency or Inter-RAT Measurement Indication
This describes the indication that indicates whether inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement
control information is to be delivered in the system messages.
10.3.5 FACH Measurement Indication
This describes the indicator that indicates whether the FACH measurement occasion period
length coefficient is to be delivered in the system message. If the inter-frequency or inter-RAT
measurement control information is delivered in the system message, some UE needs to be
configured with the measurement occasion parameters to perform the inter-frequency or interRAT measurement when they are in the CELL-FACH state. If the inter-frequency or inter-RAT
measurement control information indicator is set to NOT_REQUIRE, the FACH measurement
indicator needs not to be configured.
10.3.1 NodeB credit admission Algorithm Switch

This describes the switch that is used to control the NodeB credit admission control algorithm.
Parameter ID
CacSwitch
Value Range
Table 10-9 NodeB credit admission algorithm switch
Algorithm
Switch
Switch
Name
Description
Related Command
NODEB_CR
EDIT_CAC_
SWITCH
NodeB
credit CAC
switch
The system performs the

CAC based on the usage state
of the NodeB credit. When the
idle NodeB's credit is not
enough, the system refuses
new access requests.
Set: SET
CACALGOSWITCH

Query: LST
CACALGOSWITCH
10-27
RAN
10.3.2 Iub Bandwidth Congestion Control Algorithm Switch

This describes the Iub bandwidth congestion control algorithm switch.
ID
IubCongCtrlSwitch
Value Range
Enum (ON, OFF)
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
When this switch is enabled, the Iub bandwidth restriction algorithm works, so that when the
occupied bandwidth of Iub interface exceeds the Iub congestion trigger threshold, the algorithm
uses LDR to periodically reduce some BE service rates or AMR service rates until the occupied
bandwidth is lower than the Iub congestion release threshold.

If there is insufficient transmission resource of the Iub interface and the carrier wants to have
more users be admitted even at the risk of reducing the QoS, this switch shall be ON. When the
transmission resources are abundant, this switch shall preferably be OFF.
Related Commands
NODEBALGOPARA to modify IubCongCtrlSwitch.
10.3.3 Intra-Frequency Measurement Control Information

Indication
This describes the indication that defines whether the intra-frequency measurement control
information should be delivered through the system messages.
ID
IntraFreqMeasInd
Value Range
Enum (REQUIRE, NOT_REQUIRE)
Physical Scope
REQUIRE: The intra-frequency measurement control information is delivered in SIB11.
10-28

RAN
NOT_REQUIRE: The intra-frequency measurement control information is not delivered in

SIB11.
Setting
The default setting is REQUIRE.
When intra-frequency measurement control information (the pre-configuration of the
measurement control) is delivered in the system, so that the UE can starts the intra-frequency
measurement and sends the measurement report immediately after it enters CELL_DCH state,
and the soft handover can be more quickly finished by the UE to avoid call drops when the UE
is in the soft handover area.

The preconfiguration of measurement control can enable the UE in the soft handover area to
implement soft handovers more quickly to decrease the call drop rate. With the preconfiguration
function, the UEs in the single signaling state perform soft handovers in a higher probability. If
the CN delivers the RAB assignment before a soft handover is complete, the delay of UE service
setup may increase.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLMEAS to set, LST CELLMEAS to query, and MOD CELLMEAS to modify
IntraFreqMeasInd.
10.3.4 Inter-Frequency or Inter-RAT Measurement Indication

This describes the indication that indicates whether inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement
control information is to be delivered in the system messages.
ID
InterFreqInterRatMeasInd
Value Range
Enum (NOT_REQUIRE, INTER_FREQ, INTER_RAT, INTER_FREQ_AND_INTER_RAT)
Physical Scope
NOT_REQUIRE: The inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement control information is not
required.
INTER_FREQ: The inter-frequency measurement control information is required.
INTER_RAT: The inter-RAT measurement control information is required.
INTER_FREQ_AND_INTER_RAT: The inter-frequency and inter-RAT measurement
control information is required.

10-29
RAN
Setting
The default setting is INTER_FREQ_AND_INTER_RAT, that is, the inter-frequency FDD
measurement indicator and Inter-RAT measurement indicator are set to TRUE in the system
message. This switch is oriented to cells.
When a UE in the CELL_FACH state receives the FACH measurement occasion info message
and in the message the inter-frequency FDD measurement indicator is set to TRUE, the UE
performs inter-frequency measurement and cell reselection assessment according to the interfrequency neighboring cell list in the SIB11 or SIB12. If in the preceding condition, the interRAT measurement indicator is set to TRUE, the UE performs inter-frequency measurement and
cell reselection assessment according to the inter-RAT neighboring cell list in the SIB11 or
SIB12. If the inter-frequency FDD measurement indicator and Inter-RAT measurement indicator
are set to FALSE in the system message, the UE does not start corresponding measurement and
cell reselection.
NOTE
If the inter-frequency FDD measurement indicator and Inter-RAT measurement indicator are set to TRUE
but no inter-frequency or inter-RAT neighboring cell is configured, the UE does not perform the interfrequency or inter-RAT measurement and cell reselection.
Related Commands
InterFreqInterRatMeasInd.
10.3.5 FACH Measurement Indication

This describes the indicator that indicates whether the FACH measurement occasion period
length coefficient is to be delivered in the system message. If the inter-frequency or inter-RAT
measurement control information is delivered in the system message, some UE needs to be
configured with the measurement occasion parameters to perform the inter-frequency or interRAT measurement when they are in the CELL-FACH state. If the inter-frequency or inter-RAT
measurement control information indicator is set to NOT_REQUIRE, the FACH measurement
indicator needs not to be configured.
ID
FACHMeasInd
Value Range
Enum (REQUIRE, NOT_REQUIRE)
Physical Scope
REQUIRE: The inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement occasion parameter is delivered in
SBI11.
NOT_REQUIRE: The inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement occasion parameter is not
delivered in SIB11.
Setting
If the inter-freq or inter-RAT measurement control information is delivered in the system
message (SIB11 or SIB12), UEs in the CELL_FACH state can perform inter-frequency or inter10-30

RAN
RAT cell measurement and reselection only when the CN delivers the inter-frequency or interRAT measurement occasion parameter in SIB11 or SIB12.

When there is no inter-frequency or inter-RAT cell, the FACH measurement indicator needs not
to be configured. To have the UE perform inter-frequency or inter-RAT cell reselection, the
FACH measurement indicator needs to be configured.
Related Commands
FACHMeasInd.

10-31
RAN
11
Parameters Configured on NodeB LMT
About This Chapter

This describes the parameters that can be configured on the NodeB LMT: the HSDPA flow
control parameters, HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters, HSUPA MAC-e
scheduling algorithm parameters, HSUPA power control parameters, and local cell management
parameters.
11.1 HSDPA Flow Control Parameters
This describes the HSDPA flow control parameters that can be modified by network planners.
11.2 HSDPA MAC-hs Scheduling Algorithm Parameters
This describes the HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters that can be modified by
network planners.
11.3 HSDPA Based on SPI Algorithm Parameters
This describes the HSDPA SPI algorithm parameters that can be modified by network planners.
network planners on the NodeB LMT.
11.5 HSUPA Power Control Parameters
This describes the HSUPA power control parameters: the power control algorithm switches for
downlink control channel, fixed power control mode algorithm parameters, and dynamic power
control mode algorithm parameters.
11.6 Local Cell Management Parameters
This describes the local cell management parameters: cell radius and cell handover radius.

11-1
RAN
11.1 HSDPA Flow Control Parameters

This describes the HSDPA flow control parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Table 11-1 List of HSDPA flow control parameters
Se
ri
al
N
o.
ID
Meaning
Default
Configuration
MML Command
SWITCH
Flow Control
Switch
AUTO_ADJUST
_ FLOW_CTRL
DR
Frame discard
rate threshold
on the Iub
interface
0.1%
TD
Delay trigger
threshold
2 (10 ms)
Set: SET
HSDPAFLOWCTRLP
ARA (BTS3836,
BTS3836A, BBU3836)
Query: LST
HSDPAFLOWCTRLP
ARA (BTS3836,
BTS3836A, BBU3836)
11.1.1 HSDPA Flow Control Switch

This describes the switch of dynamic adjustment of the HSDPA bandwidth. The switch
determines whether the congestion is controlled by the RNC or NodeB.
11.1.2 Frame Discard Rate Threshold on Iub Interface
This describes the frame discard rate threshold on the Iub interface. The frame discard rate on
the Iub interface is the frame discard rate of the transmission network on the Iub interface, namely
the packet loss rate caused by errors when the transmission network is in the idle state. Only if
the frame discard rate measured by the reception end exceeds the threshold, the system judges
that the Iub interface has congestion.
11.1.3 Time Delay Threshold on Iub Interface
This describes the time delay of frame transmission when the transport network is less busy.
The Iub congestion is triggered when the time delay measured at the NodeB exceeds the
threshold. Otherwise, it is considered as common time delay of the transport network other than
congestion.
11.1.1 HSDPA Flow Control Switch

This describes the switch of dynamic adjustment of the HSDPA bandwidth. The switch
determines whether the congestion is controlled by the RNC or NodeB.
ID
SWITCH
11-2

RAN
Value Range
SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL, AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL, NO_FLOW_CTRL
Physical Scope
SIMPLE_FLOW_CTR: Based on the configured Iub bandwidth and the bandwidth occupied by
R99 subscribers, the traffic is allocated to HSDPA subscribers when the physical bandwidth
restriction is taken into account.
AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRLNode: Based on the flow control of SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL,
traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the delay and packet loss on the Iub interface are taken
into account.
NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeB does not allocate bandwidth according to the configuration or
delay on the Iub interface. The RNC allocates the bandwidth according to the bandwidth on the
Uu interface reported by the NodeB.
Setting
This parameter should be configured according to the scenarios, and is set to
AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL by default.

This parameter helps implement the end-to-end congestion control when HSDPA data is
transmitted on the Iub interface. In this way, the Iub bandwidth utilization rate is promoted and
the transmission reliability is enhanced. The switch is enabled by default.
Related Commands
Use SET HSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST
HSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SWITCH.
11.1.2 Frame Discard Rate Threshold on Iub Interface

This describes the frame discard rate threshold on the Iub interface. The frame discard rate on
the Iub interface is the frame discard rate of the transmission network on the Iub interface, namely
the packet loss rate caused by errors when the transmission network is in the idle state. Only if
the frame discard rate measured by the reception end exceeds the threshold, the system judges
that the Iub interface has congestion.
ID
DR
Value Range
0 to 1000
Physical Scope
0 to 1, with the step of 0.001

11-3
RAN
Setting
The default value is 1, namely 0.1% when the Iub interface uses the ATM topology.
When the Iub interface uses IP networking, it is set to the discard target of the IP transmission
network.

l
If DR is excessively low, the dynamic adjustment algorithm may judge that there is a
congestionthe when frames are discarded due to the network code errors, thus decreasing
the bandwidth utilization rate.
If DR is excessively high, the sensitivity to clear Iub congestion decreases.
Related Commands
HSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query DR.
11.1.3 Time Delay Threshold on Iub Interface

This describes the time delay of frame transmission when the transport network is less busy.
The Iub congestion is triggered when the time delay measured at the NodeB exceeds the
threshold. Otherwise, it is considered as common time delay of the transport network other than
congestion.
ID
TD
Value Range
0 to 20
Physical Scope
0 ms to 100 ms, with the step of 5 ms
Setting
The parameter setting consists of two parts: the time delay of Iub transport network + 10 ms
l
Time delay of the Iub transport network

The time delay of the Iub transport network refers to the transmission delay period while
data is transmitted on HS-DSCH and it consists of the delay of data buffering in each
processing unit and the delay of transmission through the network. The time delay of ATM
transmission network differs from that of the IP transmission network. It is recommended
to send data frames when the network is less busy, and get the transmission delay differences
among labeled samples at the NodeB receiver. (The NodeB with enhanced performance
can get the time delay of data frame transmission.)
But there is no test result at present, and it is arranged for the time being as follows:
For the Iub interface with ATM networking: 0 ms
11-4

RAN
For Iub interface with IP networking: the time delay target of IP transport network
l
10 ms:
According to HS-DSCH INTERVAL (10 ms to 80 ms), when a data frame is transmitted
in a network not congested, the transmission delay may be up to 80 ms, but we take the
minimum value 10 ms as a benchmark.

l
If TD is excessively low, the system may judges that there is Iub-interface congestion when
the regular time delay jitter of the Iub interface happens, reducing the Iub bandwidth
utilization rate.
If TD is excessively high, the sensitivity to clear the congestion decreases, and the Iub
transmission delay increases.
Related Commands
HSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query TD.
11.2 HSDPA MAC-hs Scheduling Algorithm Parameters

This describes the HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters that can be modified by
network planners.
Table 11-2 List of HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters
Se
ri
al
N
o.
ID
Meaning
Default
Configuration
MML Command
SM
Scheduling
method
EPF
RSCALLOCM
Resource
allocate
method,
CODE_PRI :
code priority
(applied to the
power-limited
macro cells);
POWER_PRI :
power priority
(applied to the
code-limited
micro cells)
Set:
SET MACHSPARA
(BTS3836, BTS3836A,
BBU3836)
Query:
LST MACHSPARA
(BTS3836, BTS3836A,
BBU3836)

11-5
RAN
11-6
Se
ri
al
N
o.
ID
Meaning
Default
Configuration
SCCHPWRCM
HS-SCCH
power control
method
CQI
SCCHPWR
When the HSSCCH power is

controlled by
fixed
configuration,
SCCHPWR is
the fixed power
value of HSSCCH; when
the HS-SCCH
uses the
adaptive power
control based
on CQI,
SCCHPWR is
the HS-SCCH
initial transmit
power. The
value is an
offset in dB
relevant to the
transmit power
of PCPICH.
28, namely 3dB
RSCLMSW
Resource
limiting switch
OPEN
DYNCODESW
HSDPA
dynamic code
switch
controlled by
the NodeB
OPEN
MXPWRPHUSR
Maximum
transmit power
of per HSDPA
user.
100%

MML Command
RAN
Se
ri
al
N
o.
ID
Meaning
Default
Configuration
MML Command
8KRSCLMT
Resource
limiting for
different GBR
10%
Set:
10%
SET RSCLMTPARA
(BTS3836, BTS3836A,
BBU3836)
16KRSCLMT
32KRSCLMT
15%
64KRSCLMT
15%
128KRSCLMT
20%
256KRSCLMT
25%
384KRSCLMT
30%
Query:
LST RSCLMTPARA
(BTS3836, BTS3836A,
BBU3836)
11.2.1 Scheduling Method

This describes the scheduling method.
11.2.2 Resource Allocation Method
This describes the resource allocation method.
11.2.3 HS-SCCH Power Control Method
This describes the power control method of the HS-SCCH.
11.2.4 HS-SCCH Fixed Power or Initial Transmit Power
This describes the HS-SCCH fixed power or initial transmit power. When the HS-SCCH power
is controlled by the fixedly configured method, this parameter is the HS-SCCH fixed power.
When the HS-SCCH uses the adaptive power control based on the CQI, this parameter is the
HS-SCCH initial transmit power. The value is an offset in dB relevant to the transmit power of
PCPICH.
11.2.5 Resource Limiting Switch
This describes the resource limiting switch. The parameter decides whether to restrain a single
subscriber's maximum resource usage in a congested cell.
11.2.6 HSDPA Dynamic Code Allocation Switch
This describes the switch that indicates whether the HSDPA dynamic code allocation algorithm
is enabled.
11.2.7 Maximum Transmit Power of per HSDPA user.
This describes the maximum transmit power for per HSDPA user.
11.2.8 Resource limiting for different GBR
The parameters specify the maximum resource ratio available for different GBR.
11.2.1 Scheduling Method

This describes the scheduling method.
ID
SM

11-7
RAN
Value Range
EPF, PF, RR, MAXCI
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The default value is EPF.

RR : The service types of queues are not considered. All the queues in a cell are sequenced
according to the RR values.
MAX CI: The service types of queues are not considered. All the queues in a cell are sequenced
according to the MAXCI values.
PF: The service types of queues are not considered. All the queues in a cell are sequenced
according to the PF values.
EPF: The types of queues are considered.
Related Commands
Use SET MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST
MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SM.
11.2.2 Resource Allocation Method

This describes the resource allocation method.
ID
RSCALLOCM
Value Range
CODE_PRI, POWER_PRI
Physical Scope
Code priority, power priority
Setting
The default value is CODE_PRI.

If the power resource is limited, the code is preferably allocated to save power resources for
other subscribers; while the code resource is limited, the power is preferably allocated to save
code resources for other subscribers.
11-8

RAN
Related Commands
MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query RSCALLOCM.
11.2.3 HS-SCCH Power Control Method

This describes the power control method of the HS-SCCH.
ID
SCCHPWRCM
Value Range
CQI, FIXED
Physical Scope
CQI means that the adaptive power control based on CQI is used; FIXED means that the HSSCCH power is fixed.
Setting
The default value is CQI.

The HS-SCCH power control has a significant effect on data transmission.
l
If excessive HS-SCCH power is allocated, the available power of HS-PDSCH decreases,

and the cell throughout and user throughout declines.
If insufficient HS-SCCH power is allocated, the HS-PDSCH decoding error probability

increases, and the cell throughout and user throughout declines.
Related Commands
MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SCCHPWRCM.
11.2.4 HS-SCCH Fixed Power or Initial Transmit Power

This describes the HS-SCCH fixed power or initial transmit power. When the HS-SCCH power
is controlled by the fixedly configured method, this parameter is the HS-SCCH fixed power.
When the HS-SCCH uses the adaptive power control based on the CQI, this parameter is the
HS-SCCH initial transmit power. The value is an offset in dB relevant to the transmit power of
PCPICH.
ID
SCCHPWR

11-9
RAN
Value Range
0 to 80
Physical Scope
Setting

When the HS-SCCH power is configured to a fixed value, SCCHPWR has the following impacts
on the network performance:
l
If excessive HS-SCCH power is allocated, the available power of the HS-PDSCH

decreases, and the cell throughout and user throughout declines.
If insufficient HS-SCCH power is allocated, the HS-SCCH decoding error probability

increases, and the cell throughout and user throughout declines.
When the HS-SCCH uses the adaptive power control based on CQI, SCCHPWR has the
following impacts on the network performance:
l
If SCCHPWR is excessively high, the HS-SCCH power is wasted before the power control
takes effect.
If SCCHPWR is excessively low, the HS-SCCH decoding error probability increases

before the power control takes effect, weakening the data transmission performance.
Related Commands
MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SCCHPWR.
11.2.5 Resource Limiting Switch

This describes the resource limiting switch. The parameter decides whether to restrain a single
subscriber's maximum resource usage in a congested cell.
ID
RSCLMSW
Value Range
OPEN, CLOSE
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The default value is OPEN.
11-10

RAN

If the switch is turned off, it is likely that a vast majority of the cell resources are taken up by
the subscribers with high priority but poor CQI.
Related Commands
MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query RSCLMSW.
11.2.6 HSDPA Dynamic Code Allocation Switch

This describes the switch that indicates whether the HSDPA dynamic code allocation algorithm
is enabled.
ID
DYNCODESW
Value Range
OPEN, CLOSE
Physical Scope
OPEN: The dynamic code allocation is enabled.
CLOSE: The dynamic code allocation is disabled.
Setting
The recommended value of DYNCODESW is OPEN.

The HSDPA dynamic code allocation makes the physical layer channel codes be fully utilized,
but the number of allocated codes will not exceed the number of codes defined by the HSDPA
license.
Related Commands
MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query DYNCODESW.
11.2.7 Maximum Transmit Power of per HSDPA user.

This describes the maximum transmit power for per HSDPA user.
ID
MXPWRPHUSR

11-11
RAN
Value Range
1 to 100
Physical Scope
1% to 100%
Setting

If the parameter is set too low, the peak rate may be limited.
Related Commands
MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query MXPWRPHUSR.
11.2.8 Resource limiting for different GBR

The parameters specify the maximum resource ratio available for different GBR.
ID
8KRSCLMT
16KRSCLMT
32KRSCLMT
64KRSCLMT
128KRSCLMT
256KRSCLMT
384KRSCLMT
Value Range
1 to 100
Physical Scope
1% to 100%
Setting
11-12
GBR (bps)
Default value
8k
10%
RAN
GBR (bps)
Default value
16k
10%
32k
15%
64k
15%
128k
20%
256k
25%
384k
30%

The parameters are used to avoid impacting system capacity due to too much air interface
resource are consumed.
Related Commands
Use SET RSCLMTPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST
RSCLMTPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query the parameters.
11.3 HSDPA Based on SPI Algorithm Parameters

This describes the HSDPA SPI algorithm parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Table 11-3 List of HSDPA SPI scheduling algorithm parameters
Se
ri
al
N
o.
ID
Meaning
Default
Configuration
MML Command
SSPI
SPI initial
value
ESPI
SPI end value
15
SPIWEIGHT
Weight of SPI
N/A
EPFSA
EPF schedule
algorithm
switch
DS_PQ_SCHED
ULE
Set: SET
MACHSSPIPARA
(BTS3836, BTS3836A,
BBU3836)
Query: LST
MACHSSPIPARA
(BTS3836, BTS3836A,
BBU3836)
FCA
Flow control
algorithm
switch
FLOW_CONTRL
_FREE

11-13
RAN
Se
ri
al
N
o.
ID
Meaning
Default
Configuration
CQIADJA
CQI adjust
algorithm
switch
NO_CQI_ADJ
RBLERTARGET
Residual
BLER target
N/A
MAXRETRANS
Maximum
number of
retransmission
attempts
N/A
MML Command
11.3.1 SPI Initial Value

This describes the initial SPI value for subscribers.
11.3.2 SPI End Value
This describes the end SPI value for subscribers.
11.3.3 Weight of SPI
This describes the weight of SPI.
11.3.4 EPF Schedule Algorithm Switch
This describes the EPF schedule algorithm for SPI.
11.3.5 Flow Control Algorithm Switch
This descries the flow control algorithm switch for SPI.
11.3.6 CQI Adjust Algorithm Switch
This describes the switch of CQI adjust algorithm.
11.3.7 Residual BLER Target Value
This describes the residual BLER target value when setting outer loop control.
11.3.8 Maximum Number of Retransmission Attempts
This describes the maximum of retransmission attempts in the HSDPA outer loop power control
procedure.
11.3.1 SPI Initial Value

This describes the initial SPI value for subscribers.
ID
SSPI
Value Range
0 to 15
11-14

RAN
Physical Scope
0 to 15
Setting

The parameter is only used to set the value of parameters related to SPI algorithm.
Related Commands
Use SET MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST
MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SSPI.
11.3.2 SPI End Value

This describes the end SPI value for subscribers.
ID
ESPI
Value Range
0 to 15
Physical Scope
None.
Setting

The parameter is only used to set the value of parameters related to SPI algorithm.
Related Commands
MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query ESPI.
11.3.3 Weight of SPI

This describes the weight of SPI.
ID
SPIWEIGHT

11-15
RAN
Value Range
1 to 100
Physical Scope
1% to 100%
Setting
Traffic Class
User Priority
THP
Default SPI
Weight of SPI
SRB signaling
No ARP
None
15
100%
IMS signaling
No ARP
None
14
100%
Conversational
(VoIP)
None
13
100%
None
12
100%
11
90%
11
90%
2
3
Streaming
Interactive
Background
10
100%
100%
3 to 15
100%
90%
90%
3 to 15
90%
80%
80%
3 to 15
80%
None
100%
90%
80%

The parameter impact multi-subscribers differently.
11-16

RAN
Related Commands
MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SPIWEIGHT.
11.3.4 EPF Schedule Algorithm Switch

This describes the EPF schedule algorithm for SPI.
ID
EPFSA
Value Range
TS_SCHEDULE, DS_PQ_SCHEDULE, DS_URGENT_SCHEDULE
Physical Scope
Flow capacity sensitive queue, Time delay sensitive queue for PQ schedule, Time delay sensitive
queue for urgent schedule
Setting
The default value is DS_PQ_SCHEDULE.

The parameter need be set to DS_PQ_SCHEDULE for SRB signaling and IMS signaling.
The parameter need be set to DS_URGENT_SCHEDULE for VoIP.
The parameter need be set to TS_SCHEDULE for streaming traffic and BE service.
Related Commands
MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query EPFSA.
11.3.5 Flow Control Algorithm Switch

This descries the flow control algorithm switch for SPI.
ID
FCA
Value Range
FLOW_CONTRL_DYNAMIC, FLOW_CONTRL_FREE
Physical Scope
Dynamic flow control, Free flow control

11-17
RAN
Setting
The default value is FLOW_CONTRL_FREE.

The parameter need be set to FLOW_CONTRL_FREE for SRB signaling, IMS signaling, and
such low streaming service.
The parameter need be set to FLOW_CONTRL_DYNAMIC for streaming service and BE
service.
Related Commands
MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query FCA.
11.3.6 CQI Adjust Algorithm Switch

This describes the switch of CQI adjust algorithm.
ID
CQIADJA
Value Range
CQI_ADJ_BY_IBLER, CQI_ADJ_BY_RBLER, NO_CQI_ADJ
Physical Scope
Adjusted CQI by IBLER, Adjusted CQI by RBLER, Do not use CQI adjust algorithm.
Setting
The default value of is NO_CQI_ADJ.

It is recommended to use the default value.
Related Commands
MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query CQIADJA.
11.3.7 Residual BLER Target Value

This describes the residual BLER target value when setting outer loop control.
ID
RBLERTARGET
11-18

RAN
Value Range
1 to 50
Physical Scope
1 to 50%, with the step of 1%
Setting
None.

This parameter works only when the CQIADJA is set to CQI_ADJ_BY_RBLER.
This parameter is set according to QoS requirements. If it is set too high, the residual BLER is
large. If it is set too small, that will make the air interface transmission ratio be too small.
Related Commands
MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query RBLERTARGET.
11.3.8 Maximum Number of Retransmission Attempts

This describes the maximum of retransmission attempts in the HSDPA outer loop power control
procedure.
ID
MAXRETRANS
Value Range
0 to 10
Physical Scope
0 to 10 times
Setting
When the SPI is 13, The default value is 2.
For other SPI value, The default value is 4.

The parameter is set according to QoS requirements. If it's set too large, the traffic delay is too
long.
For the time delay sensitive services such as VoIP, it is recommended to set the parameter to 2.
For other services such as BE, it is recommended to set the parameter to 4.

11-19
RAN
Related Commands
MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query MAXRETRANS.

network planners on the NodeB LMT.
Table 11-4 List of HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters
S
er
ia
l
N
o.
ID
Meaning
Default
Configura
tion
MML Command
SCHEDULEPA
RA
Set the MAC-e parameters

or not.
YES
GBREnable
If the switch is on, the

scheduling algorithm
ensures the GBR rate for
GBR subscribers without
considering the uplink load.
Enabled
Set: SET
MACEPARA
(BTS3836, BTS3836A,
BBU3836) Query: LST
MACEPARA
(BTS3836, BTS3836A,
BBU3836).
11.4.1 MAC-e Schedule Parameters Switch

This parameter indicates whether to set the MAC-e schedule parameters or not.
11.4.2 GBR Scheduling Switch
This describes the GBR scheduling switch. If the switch is on, whether the user real rate is GBR
rate needs to be affirmed during the GBR user scheduling. The scheduling algorithm ensures
the GBR rate for GBR users without consideration of the uplink load.
11.4.1 MAC-e Schedule Parameters Switch

This parameter indicates whether to set the MAC-e schedule parameters or not.
ID
SCHEDULEPARA
Value Range
NO, YES
Physical Scope
None.
11-20

RAN
Setting
The default value is YES.

The parameter should be set YES when need to change the MAC-e parameters.
Related Commands
Use SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST
MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query RAVGINITVALUE.
11.4.2 GBR Scheduling Switch

This describes the GBR scheduling switch. If the switch is on, whether the user real rate is GBR
rate needs to be affirmed during the GBR user scheduling. The scheduling algorithm ensures
the GBR rate for GBR users without consideration of the uplink load.
ID
GBRENABLE
Value Range
OPEN, CLOSE
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The default value is OPEN.

If the GBR scheduling switch is set to OPEN, the RNC overload control needs to be configured
as an action which can be triggered by the RTWP measurement value.
Related Commands
MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query GBRENABLE.
11.5 HSUPA Power Control Parameters

This describes the HSUPA power control parameters: the power control algorithm switches for
downlink control channel, fixed power control mode algorithm parameters, and dynamic power
control mode algorithm parameters.
11.5.1 Power Control Algorithm Switches for the Downlink Control Channel

11-21
RAN
This describes the HSUPA power control algorithm switches for downlink control channel that
can be modified by network planners.
11.5.2 Fixed Power Control Mode Algorithm Parameters
This describes the fixed power control mode algorithm parameters that can be modified by
network planners.
11.5.1 Power Control Algorithm Switches for the Downlink Control

Channel
This describes the HSUPA power control algorithm switches for downlink control channel that
can be modified by network planners.
Table 11-5 List of power control algorithm switches for the downlink control channel
S ID
e
ri
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configur
ation
MML Command
Le
vel
EAGCHPCM
OD
E-AGCH HPC mode
FIXED
Cel
l
SERGCHPCM
OD
E-RGCH HPC mode for

EDCH serving radio
links
FIXED
NSERGCHPC
MOD
E-RGCH HPC mode for

EDCH non-serving radio
links
FIXED
SEHICHPCM
OD
E-HICH HPC mode for

serving radio links
FIXED
Set: SET
MACEPARA
(BTS3836,
BTS3836A,
BBU3836)
Query: LST
MACHSPARA
(BTS3836,
BTS3836A,
BBU3836).
NSEHICHPC
MOD
E-HICH HPC mode for

non-serving radio links
FIXED
11.5.1.1 E-AGCH HPC Mode

This describes the E-AGCH power control algorithm switch. If the switch is set to FIXED, the
transmit power is set according to the P-CPICH power and fixed power offset. If the switch is
set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according to the DCH power of the UE.
11.5.1.2 E-RGCH HPC Mode for Service Radio Links
This describes the RGCH power control algorithm switch of EDCH serving RLS. If the switch
is set to FIXED, the transmit power is set according to the P-CHPICH power and fixed power
offset. If the switch is set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according to the DCH power
of the UE.
11.5.1.3 E-RGCH HPC Mode for Non-service Radio Links
11-22

RAN
This describes the RGCH power control algorithm switch of EDCH non-serving RLS. If the
switch is set to FIXED, the transmit power is set according to the P-CHPICH power and fixed
power offset. If the switch is set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according to the DCH
power of the UE.
11.5.1.4 E-HICH HPC Mode for Service Radio Links
This describes the HICH power control algorithm switch of the RLS that contains serving RL.
If the switch is set to FIXED, the transmit power is set according to the P-CHPICH power and
fixed power offset. If the switch is set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according to the
DCH power of the UE.
11.5.1.5 E-HICH HPC Mode for Non-service Radio Links
This describes the HICH power control algorithm switch of the RLS that does not contain serving
RL. If the switch is set to FIXED, the transmit power is set according to the P-CHPICH power
and fixed power offset. If the switch is set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according
to the DCH power of the UE.
E-AGCH HPC Mode

This describes the E-AGCH power control algorithm switch. If the switch is set to FIXED, the
transmit power is set according to the P-CPICH power and fixed power offset. If the switch is
set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according to the DCH power of the UE.
ID
EAGCHPCMOD
Value Range
FIXED, DYNAMIC
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The HSUPA parameters have not been optimized, so the recommended value of
EAGCHPCMOD is FIXED.

Fixed power control mode can be easily implemented, but it may waste NodeB transmission
power. If dynamic power control mode is used, the power utilization is more efficient. But if the
parameter is set unreasonably, it may lead to power waste or the demodulation requirement may
not be satisfied.
Related Commands
MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query EAGCHPCMOD.

11-23
RAN
E-RGCH HPC Mode for Service Radio Links

This describes the RGCH power control algorithm switch of EDCH serving RLS. If the switch
is set to FIXED, the transmit power is set according to the P-CHPICH power and fixed power
offset. If the switch is set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according to the DCH power
of the UE.
ID
SERGCHPCMOD
Value Range
FIXED, DYNAMIC
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
SERGCHPCMOD is FIXED.

Fixed power control mode can be easily implemented, but it may waste NodeB transmit power.
If dynamic power control mode is used, the power utilization is more efficient. But if the
not be satisfied.
Related Commands
MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SERGCHPCMOD.
E-RGCH HPC Mode for Non-service Radio Links

This describes the RGCH power control algorithm switch of EDCH non-serving RLS. If the
switch is set to FIXED, the transmit power is set according to the P-CHPICH power and fixed
power offset. If the switch is set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according to the DCH
power of the UE.
ID
NSERGCHPCMOD
Value Range
FIXED, DYNAMIC
11-24

RAN
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
NSERGCHPCMOD is FIXED.

not be satisfied.
Related Commands
MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query NSERGCHPCMOD.
E-HICH HPC Mode for Service Radio Links

This describes the HICH power control algorithm switch of the RLS that contains serving RL.
If the switch is set to FIXED, the transmit power is set according to the P-CHPICH power and
fixed power offset. If the switch is set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according to the
DCH power of the UE.
ID
SEHICHPCMOD
Value Range
FIXED, DYNAMIC
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
SEHICHPCMOD is FIXED.

not be satisfied.

11-25
RAN
Related Commands
MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SEHICHPCMOD.
E-HICH HPC Mode for Non-service Radio Links

This describes the HICH power control algorithm switch of the RLS that does not contain serving
RL. If the switch is set to FIXED, the transmit power is set according to the P-CHPICH power
and fixed power offset. If the switch is set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according
to the DCH power of the UE.
ID
NSEHICHPCMOD
Value Range
FIXED, DYNAMIC
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
NSEHICHPCMOD is FIXED.

not be satisfied.
Related Commands
MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query NSEHICHPCMOD.
11.5.2 Fixed Power Control Mode Algorithm Parameters

This describes the fixed power control mode algorithm parameters that can be modified by
network planners.
11-26

RAN
Table 11-6 List of fixed power control mode algorithm parameters

S ID
e
ri
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configur
ation
MML Command
Le
vel
EAGCHPOW
ER
E-AGCH power
-92,
namely
9.2 dB
Cel
l
SERGCHPO
WER
E-RGCH power for

serving RLS
-200,
namely
20 dB
NSERGCHPO
WER
E-RGCH power for nonserving RLS
163,
namely
16.3 dB
Set:
SET MACEPARA
(BTS3836,
BTS3836A,
BBU3836)
Query:
LST MACEPARA
(BTS3836,
BTS3836A,
BBU3836).
SEHICHPOW
ER
E-HICH power for

serving radio links
192,
namely
19.2 dB
NSEHICHPO
WER
E-HICH power for nonserving radio links
100,
namely
10 dB
11.5.2.1 E-AGCH Power

This parameter is the AGCH power offset relative to the P-CPICH power in fixed power control
mode.
11.5.2.2 E-RGCH Power for Service Radio Links
This describes the RGCH power offset relative to the P-CPICH power in fixed power control
mode.
11.5.2.4 E-HICH Power for Service Radio Links
This describes the power offset of the HICH in the RLS that contains serving radio links relative
to the P-CPICH power in fixed power control mode.
11.5.2.5 E-HICH Power for Non-service Radio Links
This describes the power offset of the HICH in the RLS that does not contain serving radio links
relative to the P-CPICH power in fixed power control mode.
E-AGCH Power
This parameter is the AGCH power offset relative to the P-CPICH power in fixed power control
mode.

11-27
RAN
ID
EAGCHPOWER
Value Range
350 to 150
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value is 92, namely 9.2 dB.

l
If EAGCHPOWER is excessively low, the demodulation performance of AGCH channel

cannot satisfy the demodulation requirement.
If EAGCHPOWER is excessively high, the NodeB transmit power is wasted too much.
Related Commands
MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query EAGCHPOWER.
E-RGCH Power for Service Radio Links

This describes the RGCH power offset relative to the P-CPICH power in fixed power control
mode.
ID
SERGCHPOWER
Value Range
350 to 150
Physical Scope
Setting

l
11-28
If SERGCHPOWER is excessively low, the demodulation performance of the RGCH

RAN
l
If SERGCHPOWER is excessively high, the NodeB transmit power is wasted too much.
Related Commands
MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SERGCHPOWER.
E-RGCH Power for Non-service Radio Links

This describes the power offset of the RGCH for non-serving RLS relative to the P-CPICH
power in fixed power control mode.
ID
NSERGCHPOWER
Value Range
350 to 150
Physical Scope
Setting

l
If NSERGCHPOWER is excessively low, the demodulation performance of the RGCH

If NSERGCHPOWER is excessively high, the NodeB transmit power is wasted too much.
Related Commands
MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query NSERGCHPOWER.
E-HICH Power for Service Radio Links

This describes the power offset of the HICH in the RLS that contains serving radio links relative
to the P-CPICH power in fixed power control mode.
ID
SEHICHPOWER
Value Range
350 to 150

11-29
RAN
Physical Scope
Setting

l
If SEHICHPOWER is excessively low, the demodulation performance of the RGCH

If SEHICHPOWER is excessively high, the NodeB transmit power is wasted too much.
Related Commands
MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SEHICHPOWER.
E-HICH Power for Non-service Radio Links

This describes the power offset of the HICH in the RLS that does not contain serving radio links
relative to the P-CPICH power in fixed power control mode.
ID
NSEHICHPOWER
Value Range
350 to 150
Physical Scope
Setting

l
If NSEHICHPOWER is excessively low, the demodulation performance of the RGCH

If NSEHICHPOWER is excessively high, the NodeB transmit power is wasted too much.
Related Commands
MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query NSEHICHPOWER.
11-30

RAN
11.6 Local Cell Management Parameters

This describes the local cell management parameters: cell radius and cell handover radius.
Table 11-7 List of local cell management parameters
S ID
e
ri
a
l
N
o
.
Meaning
Default
Configur
ation
MML Command
RADIUS
Cell radius
29 km
HORAD
Cell handover
radius
0m
Set:
MOD LOCELL (BTS3836,
BTS3836A, BBU3836)
Query:
LST LOCELL (BTS3836,
BTS3836A, BBU3836)
11.6.1 Cell Radius

This describes the radius of a NodeB cell. The cell radius affects the demodulation of the uplink
board and the configuration of the parameters related to the access part.
11.6.2 Cell Handover Radius
This describes the cell handover radius, which can be configured on the NodeB LMT.
11.6.1 Cell Radius

This describes the radius of a NodeB cell. The cell radius affects the demodulation of the uplink
board and the configuration of the parameters related to the access part.
ID
RADIUS
Value Range
150 to 180000
Physical Scope
150 m to 180 km, with the step of 1 m
Setting
The default value is 29000, namely 29 km.

11-31
RAN
You can set and adjust the cell radius based on the network planning and network optimization
result. In case that the cell radius cannot be determined precisely, ensure that the set cell radius
is bigger than the required cell radius. If the configured cell radius exceeds the required cell
radius too much, the processing resource, however, is wasted and the processing delay increases.
Based on the data provided by relevant products, the handover synchronization time increases
by a maximum of 60 ms if the cell radius changes its value in increments of 3.75 km. If the set
value has a big difference from the actual value, the handover success rate may be affected.
CAUTION
l
When using the RRU, you must set the sum of the cell radius and the fiber transmission
delay as the cell radius.
If the access board of the NodeB is configured to support multiple sectors, the maximum
configurable cell radius is 30 km.

The setting of the cell radius must be the same as the result of network planning.
Related Commands
Use MOD LOCELL (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST LOCELL
(BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query RADIUS.
11.6.2 Cell Handover Radius

This describes the cell handover radius, which can be configured on the NodeB LMT.
ID
HORAD
Value Range
0 to 180000
Physical Scope
0 m to 180 km, with the step of 1 m
Setting
The default value is 0. The inner radius of a cell handover radius must be at least 78.125 m, that
is, 1 chip, shorter than the cell radius.
You can set and adjust the cell handover radius based on the network planning and network
optimization result. In case that the cell handover radius cannot be determined precisely, ensure
that the set cell handover radius is not bigger than the minimum cell handover radius required
by the network planning. If the configured cell handover radius is muchly smaller than the
required cell handover radius, the processing delay, however, increases.
11-32

RAN
CAUTION
When using the RRU, you must set the cell handover radius to the sum of the actual cell handover
radius and the fiber transmission delay.

If the cell handover radius is beyond the cell handover scope that is determined by network
planning, the NodeB cannot process the subscribers within the distance defined by the cell
handover radius, and the actual handover scope is smaller than the scope determined by network
planning.
Related Commands
Use MOD LOCELL (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST LOCELL
(BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query HORAD.

11-33

RAN Network Optimization Parameter Reference RAN10!0!01

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

RAN Network Optimization Parameter Reference RAN10!0!01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RAN

Network Optimization Parameter Reference

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Industrial Base

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2008. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

2.3 Non Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency Handover Management Parameters................................................2-41

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Issue Draft (2008-03-20)

2.5 Non Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management Parameters.........................................................2-70

3 Admission Control Parameters................................................................................................3-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

3.6 Non AMR Voice Uplink Threshold of Conversation Service......................................................................3-11

4 Load Control Parameters..........................................................................................................4-1

5 PS Service Rate Control Parameters.......................................................................................5-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Issue Draft (2008-03-20)

5.2.2 Traffic Lower Threshold........................................................................................................................5-9

6 Miscellaneous Topic Parameters.............................................................................................6-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

6.3 RRC Connection Setup Parameters...............................................................................................................6-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Issue Draft (2008-03-20)

7.4.2 Intra-Frequency Handover D2H Timer Length....................................................................................7-15

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

11 Parameters Configured on NodeB LMT............................................................................11-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Issue Draft (2008-03-20)

11.3.5 Flow Control Algorithm Switch.......................................................................................................11-17

Issue Draft (2008-03-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Issue Draft (2008-03-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Issue Draft (2008-03-20)

About This Document

About This Document

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Issue Draft (2008-03-20)

About This Document

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk that, if not avoided,

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Names of files,directories,folders,and users are in boldface. For

Book titles are in italics.

Terminal display is in Courier New.

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Command arguments are in italic.

Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional.

Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical

Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and

Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical

Issue Draft (2008-03-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical